Difference between revisions of "EM Repair"

Latest revision as of 15:11, 11 August 2024

1 Introduction

Electro-mechanical, commonly referred to as EM, pinball machines were manufactured from the 1930's until the mid 1970's, when the transition to solid state machines was made. From that span of 40 plus years, literally hundreds of companies manufactured EM pinball machines.

This guide focuses on machines primarily made from the 1950's until 1977 made by four of the largest pinball manufacturers at the time. Manufacturers included in this guide are:

D. G. Gottlieb & Co.®
Williams
Bally
Chicago Coin

Although the amount of companies discussed here is somewhat limited, EM repair transcends beyond these four companies. The operation of a relay, stepper unit, and score motor is essentially the same, regardless of the manufacturer.

2 Safety

Pinball machines operate off line voltage (120V in U.S.) so care must be taken when working on your machine. If you are not comfortable with the risk you should only attempt repairs that can be done with the machine unplugged.

Most EM machines primarily operate with 6.3VAC and 25VAC, which is somewhat safe. However, line voltage will be present from the line-in cord to the primary side of the transformer and the service outlet. Also, some machines have coils which operate on 120VAC, so some relay switches, score motor switches, and anti-cheat / kick off switches have 120VAC present on them. Finally, some older machines have 120VAC going to the start switch and the weighted slam switch located on the coin door. On these games you should check to make sure the fish paper insulation is still in good condition. The fish paper is used to isolate switch voltages from other current conducting items, like the coin door. If the fish paper is torn, misaligned, or missing, there is the potential to receive a shock. This shock can occur while either playing the game, or by touching the suspect game and another, properly grounded game simultaneously.

By all means if you decide to work on a game, do not perform any repairs in socks or bare feet. Don't laugh people have done and do this.

3 Games

The "Big Three" manufacturers were Gottlieb®, Williams, and Bally. The "best of the rest" would probably include Chicago Coin and Midway, as well as some popular foreign brands, such as Sonic, Segasa, Recel, Rally, Zaccaria, and Playmatic. Some of the foreign manufacturers used American pinball manufacturer parts in part or in whole. For example, Sonic is mainly based on Williams EM architecture, while Recel is mainly based on Gottlieb®.

A quick search of the Internet Pinball Database, shows that between all the manufacturers, there are over 3403 electro-mechanical games within this very broad category. There were many companies which only produced a few games, especially early on.

4 Technical Info

4.1 Recommended Documentation

Probably the single most important documentation to have while attempting to work on an EM pinball machine is the schematics. Schematics are analogous to the roadmap of a state - they are the electrical roadmap of a game. It is always highly recommended to have a copy of the schematics for a particular game on hand. Second to schematics is the game's manual, if one was printed. Game manuals for EM pinball machines were not available until 1967 for Williams, 1971 for Gottlieb®, approximately 1971 for Bally, and approximately 1972 for Chicago Coin. The game manual is an excellent, complimentary documentation to the schematics. If a game manual is available for a particular game, it is recommended to acquire it too.

Introduction to Bally Flipper Games - Late 1960s through 1976 EM Guidebook
Introduction to Coin Operated Amusement Games (Williams) - 1960s through 1970s EM Guidebook

A guide to reading schematics is available here: https://web.archive.org/web/20170428042920/http://tuukan.fliput.net/emkytkis_en.html

EM Schematics 101 video with John Robertson

4.1.1 Schematic Symbols

Key to Schematic Symbols

Symbol	Description
	Relay - A letter and/or name identifies the relay function. Switches elsewhere in the schematics will be identified with this letter.
	Solenoid - A coil that operates a device in the machine. Note the subtle different in that the coil is drawn upside down.
	Lamp. The label indicates the lamp function. GI lamps may not represent the exact number of lamps.
	Fuse
	Switch, normally open (N.O.) - The label indicates what relay the switch is on.
	Switch, normally closed (N.C.) - The label indicates what relay the switch is on. This switch is labeled as a score motor switch. Some schematics (e.g. 70s Williams') denote score motor switches in circles.
	Switch, make-break. The label indicates what relay the switch pair is on.
	Score Motor
	Stepper Unit with single wiper/rivet contact.
	Stepper Unit with dual wiper/rivet contact.

4.1.2 Parts Catalogs

A comprehensive list of Parts Catalogs

Manufacturer	Catalog	Version	Games	Notes
Gottlieb	1948 Parts catalog
Gottlieb	1953 Parts catalog
Gottlieb	1957 Parts catalog		Includes games from from Niagara (1950) to Sea Belles (1956)	Primary catalog
Gottlieb	1958 Parts catalog	Volume D
Gottlieb	1960 Parts catalog	Volume E
Gottlieb	1962 Parts catalog	Volume F		Primary catalog
Gottlieb	1964 Parts catalog	Volume G
Gottlieb	1966 Parts catalog	Volume H
Gottlieb	1968 Parts catalog	Volume J		Primary catalog
Gottlieb	1970 Parts catalog	Volume K
Gottlieb	1972 Parts catalog	Volume L		Primary catalog
Gottlieb	1974 Parts catalog	Volume M
Gottlieb	1976 Parts catalog	Volume N		Primary catalog. Contains coin door part number error.
Gottlieb	1978 Parts catalog	Volume P		Primary catalog. Contains coin door part number error.
Gottlieb	Parts and Price Supplement Volume P (1978)

4.1.3 Documentation Errors

4.1.3.1 Gottlieb

The 1976 and 1978 Gottlieb parts catalogs have a part number error for the coin door lockout coil assembly (page 67 in the 1978 catalog). The armature spring at the bottom of the lockout coil assembly is shown as part A-557 "Spring", but the part number is actually A-574. Part A-557 is the interlock relay housing.

4.2 Relays

Relays are small coils that when energized complete one or more circuits. They are usually high resistance so they can be activated for a long time without burning up or blowing a fuse. They are the workhorse of the EM world; without the relay, the proper circuits do not get energized and nothing happens. The relays set up the conditions that the score motor then completes the work on. Similar to how a mechanical cash register works; you punch in the functions, and pull down the handle which is that machinery's "score motor."

For example, a 500 point relay will pull in, causing a circuit path to the 100 point relay (which adds 100 points directly to the active score reel set) to be made, and also starting the score motor. The score motor will turn and additional switches will pulse 5 times, causing the 100 point relay to pulse 5 times, adding 500 points to the score. A 5000 point relay operates the same way - except it's completing a circuit to the 1000 point relay. The same 5 pulses from the score motor "do the work" of adding the score.

It is the interconnection of relays and their circuits that comprise the "programming" of an electro-mechanical machine. You can change the way a game plays by adding and changing circuits, to either fix errors in the original programming, or to create new and exciting rules.

4.2.1 Relay Types and Their Functions

A relay is a electrically operated device that when activated, has a moving armature that has the ability to operate various switches affixed to it. One function of a relay is to operate several switches in various discrete circuits at the same time. Step switches, due to their physical construction, need a certain amount of time to complete a step. A relay can trigger a switch or series of switches, in a very brief power pulse. For instance, a ball hitting a pop bumper might not close a switch long enough to enable a stepper unit to advance to the next contact. A relay can “lock in” and complete a circuit for a period of time that would enable a stepper unit to advance or reset properly.

4.2.1.1 Magnetic Relay

Williams Magnetic relay

Diagram and Schematic showing a Pop Bumper circuit

There are four basic types of relays used in EM machines. The first type that we shall reference here is known as a magnetic relay. Please refer to the schematic and diagram to the right for this section. Referring to the schematic, take as an example a N.O. switch (type A, by GTB) labeled “bumper” that is closed by a pinball striking the pop bumper. The coil indicated as a L RELAY, is a magnetic coil that is energized by the bumper switch. The result is that the coil becomes an electromagnet and attracts the armature which pulls down to the coil core and closes the 2 N.O. switches marked L 1 & L 2. The closed switch L 1 keeps the L relay energized, even though the pinball has bounced away from the bumper and its contact has opened.

Current still flows through the circuit via the closed L 1 switch, then through the N.C. switch labeled “on step switch”, to the electromagnetic coil on the L relay. This “on step switch” is mounted on the stepper unit so that it only opens when the step up arm of the stepper unit has completed a full stroke. After the step up arm has completed its stroke, the switch opens the circuit, cutting off the current to the L relay. Since the circuit to the L relay coil is now open, the coil no longer attracts the armature to its core. Helped by a spring attached to the armature, the armature returns to its original position and opens the 2 switches L 1 & L 2. With the switch at L 2 open again, the coil on the stepper unit is no longer energized, and so the drive arm returns to its original position, re-closes the N.C. switch and the stepper unit is ready for another cycle.

4.2.1.2 AG Type Relay

Gottlieb® "AG" relay

The second type of relay is similar to the above electromagnetic type, but is a high speed type with short switch blades and a short stroke, and is known as an “AG” relay. Please refer to the diagram on the right. An AG relay may have several switches in one or two stacks, in any kind of switch formation, N.O., N.C., Make-Break, or Make-Make. A plastic or nylon ”ladder” is riveted on the armature to operate the switches in unison.

4.2.1.3 Interlock Relay

Gottlieb® Interlock relay- The 1st relay stays activated until the 2nd relay releases it

The third type of relay is known as an Interlock relay, and it consists of two electromagnetic relays that are constructed in such a way, that when one relay pulls in (is energized), the armature of that relay operates the switches mounted on it, and the armature of the OTHER relay slides over and locks the first armature in its closed position. This holds the switches in the activated state, even as the power is cut off from the first coil. The switches cannot return to their normal state until the SECOND relay is energized, pulling the second relay’s armature back, thereby unlocking the first relay’s armature, permitting the first relay’s switches to return to normal.

4.2.1.4 Trip relay

Gottlieb® trip relay-These switches stay activated until reset by a reset bank coil

The fourth type of relay is a TRIP relay, usually ganged together is what is called a TRIP or RELAY BANK. There may be only a few relays in the bank, or up to a dozen. A trip relay, when energized, releases an armature which trips a latch that operates a series of switches. Even after power is removed from the trip coil, the latch, its spring and switches are held in the activated position. The only way the armature and its associated switches can be reset to normal, is mechanically by a large bank coil(or coils) which operates a bank reset arm. This coil is often 120 volts AC due to the large amount of physical power needed to reset a large bank of relays. When the reset coil is energized, the reset arm is pushed against all the latches of all the coils in its bank returning all the switches to their normal positions and releasing all the armatures which snap open due to the armature spring. The open armatures hold the latches in the open position when the reset coil is de-energized, and the pull of the reset spring draws the reset arm away from the latches.

4.2.1.5 Armature Switch and Series Latch

The trip relay bank may have an armature switch held open by the trip relay armature when in its reset state. The armature switch is wired in series with the reset bank coil, and its function is to ensure that the current flows to the reset coil until the bank is fully reset to its normal at rest position. In addition, there may be a SERIES LATCH, which does NOT have a coil to hold it open, but instead has a bar that rests on two or more latches in the relay bank. When ALL the latches in that series are tripped (activated) the SERIES LATCH drops also to operate its own group of switches.

4.2.2 Series Relay Explained

The series relay is, as implied by the name, a relay in series with another set of relays. This was done to allow a group of target switches to have both an individual action and a common, or shared, action.

For example, Gottlieb® used a series relay in it’s 1975 “Spirit of 76” game. A portion of the circuit diagram showing the series relay, labeled A, is shown in the figure below. A-1119 = 2.2 ohms, A-9746 = 1.8 ohms. The A-E star rollovers energize one of the 1B-5B bank relays while simultaneously energizing the series relay. The bank relay trips to control the rollover lights. The series relay controls the scoring. [ED: It would be good to identify the earliest game this was used on.]

Series relay as used in Gottlieb® Spirit of 76

Coil resistance is very important to correct operation of the series relay circuit. It is important to use the correct replacement coils in this circuit. The coil voltage will be divided across the coils in series, so each will only see a portion of the coil voltage. Typically, coils in series will be about the same resistance, so each will see one-half of the available voltage.

Game design is also critical to correct operation of the series relay. The relays in the circuit with the series relay must be controlled such that only one is energized at a time. This requires that the playfield switches in the circuit be physically separated so the ball has no way of actuating more than one switch at a time.

Use of the series relay was a design choice driven by cost. There are other ways to achieve the same game operation, but they involve using more switches and more relays.

4.2.3 Reset Completed Relay

stub

4.2.4 Delay Relay

Bally delay relay

Bally used a special relay in the 1970s to provide a time delay circuit. The delay relay uses a #455 flasher lamp in the lock-in circuit to generate the time delay. The lamp is in series with the normally open lock-in switch. When the relay is energized, the lock-in switch closes and the lamp lights. When the lamp filament heats up and the lamp flashes off for the first time, the open circuit releases the relay.

The flasher lamp is required for correct operation of the delay relay. Using a standard lamp will result in the relay locking on once it is energized. If the lamp is missing or burned out the relay will fail to lock-in, resulting in the relay energizing momentarily and no time delay. Note that the 6.5V lamp is powered by the 50V coil voltage in this circuit, so the delay is shorter than the normal flash delay. If the delay is too short or too long, the Bally game manual recommends experimenting with different #455 lamps until the desired delay time is achieved.

The picture to the right shows the delay relay from the "Over The Top" buzzer circuit on a 1976 Bally "Hokus Pokus" game. The #455 lamp is pointed out in red.

Bally delay circuit

The following circuit diagram shows the control for the delay relay as used in the "Hokus Pokus" Over-The-Top circuit. The right two circuit legs are the enable circuits for player 1 and player 2 respectively. The relay is energized when the "9th position" switch on the player's 10,000 point score reel is closed and the end-of-stroke switch closes. That is, when the score rolls over from 90,000 to zero. The left circuit leg is then enabled by the normally open switch on the delay relay itself, lighting the time delay lamp.

4.3 Switches

Schematic symbols for a N.O. & N.C. switch

Leaf switches in pinball games come in 4 formats: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.), Break-Make, & Make-Make, the last 2 of which are really combinations of a N.O. and/or a N.C. switch. Regardless of their function, all switches are in fact, a N.O. or N.C. type.

Leaf switches in EM games are of 2 compositions,at least 2 bronze blades each holding a Silver Contact or a Tungsten Contact(occasionally 2 contacts per blade). Since silver is a very high conductor of electricity, it is used on most EM switches, with the exception of the flipper cabinet and End of Stroke (EOS) contacts, which are tungsten. Silver tarnishes and turns black, but this does not effect its conductivity. Silver contacts may be cleaned with a flex-file or sandpaper, in order to redress the switch for adequate surface contact. Tungsten flipper contacts must be redressed with an ignition-type flat file as used in automotive repair, as the contacts are too hard to be smoothed by sandpaper or flex file abrasive. Gold flashed contacts, are not normally used in EM games, and must NEVER be cleaned with a file or sandpaper. A business card, or thin cardboard, is all that is necessary to clean electronic gold flashed contacts.

4.3.1 Normally Open (N.O.) Switch aka Form A Switch

Normally Open Switch in resting state

N.O. switch called Closed When Energized (C.W.E) or Closed When In (C.W.I.) on Old Williams schematics c. 1950

This is a leaf switch that has 2 (rarely 4) contacts that complete a circuit when pushed closed by some mechanical device. The switch re-opens when the device moves away from the moveable contact, and the springiness of the blade opens the circuit. Gottlieb® calls this type of switch, a “Form A” switch, and this term is sometimes used in its schematics.

4.3.2 Normally Closed (N.C.) aka Form B Switch

Normally Closed (N.C.) switch in resting state with optional nylon spacer

Normally Open & Closed switches on Bally Schematics, c. 1961.If you rotate the line segment representing the pole counter(anti-)-clockwise (CCW), it will have to go almost all the way around to touch the other wire, denoting a N.O.switch. A short CCW rotation signifies a N.C. switch

This type of switch, called a “Form B” switch by Gottlieb®, opens a circuit when a mechanical device pushes against the blade. A typical use of a N.C. switch is the bottom cabinet tilt or game off switch GTB uses on early EM games. When the bottom of the cabinet is struck intentionally or by a disgruntled player, the weight on the end of the blade moves the contacts apart and turns the game off.

4.3.3 Break-Make aka Form C switch

Break-Make switch aka Form C in resting state

Schematic diagram of a Break-Make Switch

This switch is really a composite of a N.O. and a N.C. switch with just three blades instead of four. The moveable center blade has contacts on BOTH sides. Proper adjustment insures that when a device moves the center blade towards the open contact, the CLOSED switch OPENS BEFORE the center contact touches the open switch’s contact. When the pressure is released, the center blade returns to its N.C. side and re-makes contact. This type of switch is often used on relays. A Make-Break switch is really the same, just upside-down, or in reverse, of the order of actions of a Break-Make switch. Special care should be taken with a Make-Break switch that the three blades are at no time shorted together. This can happen often when the blade stiffener is maladjusted, and contacts the other blade of the pair.

4.3.4 Make-Make aka Form AA switch

Make-Make switch aka Form AA in resting state

Make-Make schematic diagram

A make-make switch is a composite switch consisting of two N.O. switches using only 3 blades. When mechanical pressure is applied to the blade, the switch “makes” or closes the circuit, and continues to move until a second switch contact is closed, tying all 3 blades together.

Additional information & photos about leaf switches can be found here.

4.4 Score Motor

A nice explanation of score motors can be found on YouTube here.

The Score motor of an EM machine is the heart of an electro-mechanical computer. Through a combination of a motor, cogs and switch stacks, the score motor controls the game reset, scoring and features for the pinball machine. Like a computer program which has a fatal error, if a function controlled by the score motor cannot be executed the score motor will run on and on in a runaway fashion.

The score motor switches take a lot of abuse, and are often the target for an inexperienced repair person, when in fact, the reason the score motor will not stop rotating, is because a switch elsewhere is not operating correctly. The score reels are a notorious example of this, and will be discussed further below. Correct gap on the score motor switches is critical for proper game operation.

Score Motors Identified
A Gottlieb® score motor, top view from 1967 King of Diamonds.
A Williams Score motor mounted underneath the playfield from a 1950 Dreamy (only 2 cams used)
A Williams Score Motor from a 1958 Short-Stop (3 cams used)
Typical Williams Score Motor from a 1971 Stardust
Typical Bally Score Motor from a 1976 Night Rider
Chicago Coin Score Motor from a 1974 Hi Flyer

4.4.1 Gottlieb® Score Motor

Typical Gottlieb® score motor (from Target Alpha)

Most of the following will concern Gottlieb® score motors, but the general concepts will apply to all other motors as well. The score motor consists of a frame, gear motor, cam assembly and various switch stacks. The motor operates at 26 RPM, with a vertical shaft which has a cam assembly attached that operates the switch stacks.

4.4.1.1 Gottlieb® Score Motor Physical Description & Function

Gottlieb® Score Motor Cams

The cam assembly consists of 2 circular notched cams that rotate, driven by the motor. The cams in turn, actuate the switch stacks by two methods. Switch “dogs” ride along the edge of the cams, and pins protruding vertically from the face of the cams, above and below the score motor assembly, actuate switch stacks additionally. This arrangement creates 5 vertical levels of switch stack positions.

The top cam is divided into three equally spaced notches, while the lower cam has 3 notches which are further divided into 5 equally spaced teeth. When the score motor makes one complete revolution, this results in 3 complete operational cycles.

4.4.1.2 Understanding The Location of Score Motor Switch Stacks

A single blade without wires attached designates position 3 1/2

There are little paper labels that are numbered 1 through 3 ½ and 4 stuck to the base plate of the score motor to identify which position you are looking at. Feel fortunate if yours are still there and legible. If just one of them is remaining, you can count clockwise from that one to determine which stack is which number. Sometimes ALL of the stickers are gone, but you still can determine the switch stack. Number 3 ½ is a wireless switch blade all by itself attached to the frame. Just identify # 3 ½ and count clockwise to 4, then 1, 2, & 3. It may help you to make little labels and attach them to understand what you are looking at quickly, and for future reference.

Not all switch positions have switch stacks at every level. It may help to un-pin the score motor and pivot it up to look at levels A and B, or to adjust them. Of course, you will do this with the power off, unless you have no fear of the consequences of finger grinding gears, merciless sharp edged cams and electrical sparks.

4.4.1.3 Gottlieb® Switch Level Nomenclature

Gottlieb® names the switch stacks by level and orientation around the circumference of the top cam. At a casual glance, some of the switch stacks cannot be seen, because they are located below another switch stack. Each of the 5 positions around the circumference does NOT have the same number of switches or switch levels as the others.

Level A- Located at the bottom of the score motor assembly and actuated by the edge of the bottom cam.

Level B- Positioned just above the "A" level and operated by studs mounted vertically to the bottom of the top cam.

Level C- Switches actuated by the edge of the Top Cam.

Level D- Switches operated by vertical studs mounted to the top of the Top Cam.

Level E- A switch operated by a very long vertical stud mounted to the Top Cam. Switches are further identified by the position they occupy around the circumference of the score motor cams. The positions are labeled in a clockwise direction. 1,2,3,3 ½, & 4. A switch may be designated by the schematic by the label 1C, which indicates that the switch in question occupies the switch stack at position 1 (NOT 1 o'clock), riding on Level C, which is operated by the edge of the Top Cam. There may be several switches all occupying the same location, or it may be unique. The numbers and letters have no bearing on the order in which any of the switches control any operation of the machine. Please see the diagrams and photos for a visual reference that may make this clear.

4.4.1.4 At Rest Machine Position

Gottlieb® switch dog w/o switches attached

In a normal at rest condition, the score motor will be in a position where a “dog” will be resting in one of the 3 notches in the Top Cam, at Level C, Position 1. This switch will be a N.O. or Form “A” switch (as GTB calls it) whose function it is to lock-in the score motor for a 1/3 revolution when a power pulse is applied to the motor, coming from another circuit in the machine. The switch dog that rides along the edge of the cam, “climbs” out of the notch, closing the gap and making an electrical connection through switch 1 C. When the motor finishes rotating 1/3 of a revolution, the switch dog drops into the cam slot again, opening the circuit at 1C, thereby stopping the motor. Helping to keep the motor from over-running its desired position, is a single formed switch blade without any wires connected to it, that acts as a motor brake, located at position 3 ½ B. It sometimes happens that this switch is broken, and the game will act erratically. In proper operation, the switch at 3 ½ B contacts a cam stud, just after the switch at 1 C drops into its notch, stopping the motor.

In function, the score motor acts like a relay, but unlike a relay, the score motor can operate many switches from 1 to 5 times per power pulse. A further benefit of the score motor is that, the score motor supplies sufficient time for the stepper units to complete a step, ensuring proper game scoring and features.

Most of the switch stacks operate the same for each 1/3 of a revolution of the score motor, but the addition of the studs on the faces of the cams make it possible for a switch to operate only once for each complete revolution, or, if 2 studs are fixed at that level, two times for each revolution.

Each of the switch dogs have 2 slots in them, making it possible for the manufacturer to vary the timing of the operations that these switches control. These switch dog positions MUST NOT BE CHANGED. If you suspect that the position of a switch in the slot has been altered, in some schematics the proper location for the switch is indicated.

4.4.1.5 Detailed Operation and Identification of Score Motor Switch Positions

Below is a detailed explanation of the operation of each set of switches in a generic fashion, which may or may not be identical to your machine. Keep in mind that each motor number and letter position may refer to one or several individual switches. Although position 1 has switches that are first in operation, not all the switches at that position follow that sequence of operation.

Motor 1 A: This switch opens and closes 5 times for each 1/3 revolution of the score motor. The switch at 1A may control a scoring unit directly or in series with other motor switches through a controlling relay. It can also furnish impulses to reset continuous stepper units, to flash lights, or any other purpose where a short duration pulse is needed and timed through another motor switch.

Motor 1 B: Operates 4th in operational sequence and generally is used to time a scoring function. It can be used in series with other switches to eliminate or carry over the fourth pulse that would occur with motor 1 A.

Motor 1 C: As discussed above, this is the normal at rest position for the score motor. It functions as the motor override switch, and always operates the motor until 1C opens. This switch insures that the motor always stops at the same relative place, regardless when an external switch opens that triggered it. Additionally, motor 1C opens the replay button, keeping the player from energizing the start circuit until the motor is back to normal. Motor 1C cuts off power to the playfield switches while the motor is “off normal”, to keep scoring from the playfield from interfering with scoring coming through the motor. I may also control lights associated with scoring conditions active only when the motor is off normal.

This switch will often show a blue spark, especially noticeable in a darkened cabinet, that is a normal consequence of the motor’s EM field collapse when it turns off. Although normal, it causes pits and shortens the life of the contacts of 1C, which may need to be cleaned with a flexstone file or sandpaper, and its gap re-adjusted (if necessary), for reliable operation. This switch is the first thing that should be investigated when a score motor will not stop running.

Motor 1 D: Switches at 1D are actuated by studs attached to the top cam. If the 1D switches operate time with the 1st position of 1A, the switch is used to control scoring, or close a circuit to any unit such as a relay, that requires a pulse from motor1A. Motor 1D should be checked and adjusted if necessary, that it closes before motor 1A, and opens after motor 1A is opened.

If 1D is time coordinated with the 1C at rest position, it is usually used to turn on or off lights related to contacts on the playfield, or change score values of same.

Motor 1 E: Turns on or off lights for scoring and is not timed with motor 1A.

Motor 2 A: NOT USED.

Motor 2 B: Actuated by studs between the two cams and timed to operate between motor 4C and Motor 1C. Often used to hold in scoring, start, or extra ball relays, until they have completed their function. Drop out of these relays then occurs after 4C

Motor 2 C: This position is timed to the 2nd pulse from motor 1A, & is used to eliminate or carry over this pulse to other scoring circuits. The function of 2C may be to subtract the replay, step the total plays meter, reset a bank of relays, match (replay), or some other purpose that must time with motor 1A. This switch stack operates in the long position of the switch dog, while all the others are usually operated in the short dog position.

Motor 3 A: NOT USED

Motor 3 B: This motor position is timed with the 3rd pulse of 1A, and eliminates or carries the pulse to other scoring circuits in the machine. This switch stack may operate kickers, reset banks of relays, etc.

Motor 3 C: NOT USED

Motor 3 D: Operates with the motor at rest to turn on or off lights & control scoring, and may be used as an anti-cycle switch for a roto unit. Is not timed with Motor 1A.

Motor 3 E: May be used instead of, or in addition to 3D, and serves the same function.

Motor 4 A: This position is used as an alternative to 1A, and is timed to alternate with 1A. By operating this way, it reduces electrical load at any one time, due to this intentional staggering of operation with 1A. It may also flash lights when the motor is running, or in coordination with other relays.

Motor 4 B:This motor position is timed with the 3rd pulse from 1A and is used together with motor 3B. It is often used in the extra count circuit.

Motor 4 C: This position is timed with 1A in the final 5th pulse. It controls match, scoring, extra chute count, bank reset and other functions.

Motor 4 D: Operates in the rest position and therefore not timed to 1A. It controls lights, changes scoring, etc.

Games will always have exceptions and additional uses for the score motor at the above positions, and this section is meant to give an idea of the order of switch operation on the score motor. Ordinarily, no adjustment is needed in these switch positions, but attention should be paid to proper gaps for each leaf switch.

4.4.2 Williams Score Motors

4.4.2.1 Williams Horizontal Cam Score Motor

Early on, Williams used a horizontal cam score motor similar to the Gottlieb score motor. This style of score motor assembly was abandoned in the early 60's, and replaced with the more prevalent vertical cam system.

Williams Horizontal Cam Score Motor Assembly
A Williams Score motor mounted underneath the playfield from a 1950 Dreamy (only 2 cams used)
A Williams Score Motor from a 1958 Short-Stop (3 cams used - top view)
A Williams Score Motor from a 1958 Short-Stop (3 cams used - side view)

4.4.2.2 Williams Vertical Cam Score Motor

The Williams vertical cam EM score motor is very similar to the Bally EM score motor. Each motor has an "index" cam, located next to the actual motor. Adjacent to the index cam are 6 timing cams. The first 5 of these cams "drop out" at different points during a score motor revolution. The 6th cam drops out at the same time as the 5th cam. Adjacent to the 6th cam, the last two cams are "impulse" cams, used to carry out game functions requiring 5 pulses during a half revolution of the score motor, like bonus countdown, 50/500/5000 points, and score reel resets. The two impulse cams share the same timing, but typically the switch stack over the 7th cam is mounted forward of the switch stack over the 8th cam, causing the timing of these two cams to be exactly out of phase.

Three views of a typical Williams Score Motor (1971 Stardust)
Top View. Note that some switch stacks are further forward than others to adjust the timing.

4.4.3 Bally Score Motor

stub (describe switch positions and general make up like GTB score motor section)

Bally score motor switches have a number and letter, for example 4C. They are indicated on the schematics with a circle around the switch. The number indicates the cam number. The letter indicates the position in the switch stack, with A being the bottom, or closest to the cam. Switch 4C will be on the fourth cam, third switch in the stack. Cam #1 is the cam closest to the motor.

The schematics contain a timing diagram for the score motor. The cam position are shown in the rows, numbered along the left side. The columns indicate the rotational position of the cams. Zero is the "at rest", or home position. The black squares indicate the position that the switches on the cam operate.

Bally score motors from 1965 to 1977 operate for 180 degrees for each score motor cycle. The timing diagram depicts one full rotation of the score motor which is two score motor cycles. Both cycles provide the same switch operation.

Bally Score Motor Timing Diagram

Not all, but the vast majority of Bally score motors used in pinball machines use a vertical cam system. Switch stacks are then placed on the cams closest to the score motor outward. Below is an example of switch stack 1 on a Bally score motor in both at rest and motor running positions. This will give a general idea how normally open, normally closed, and make-break switches react while riding on a score motor cam.

Three views of a typical Bally Score Motor (1977 Night Rider)
Top View. Unlike the Williams Score Motor, all switch stack actuators on this Bally Score Motor line up.

Bally Score Motor Switch Stack 1
Score Motor at rest
Score motor running

4.4.3.1 Bally Motor Switch Level Nomenclature

Bally Score Motor Switch Levels Identified

Bally score motor switch levels are identical to Williams. Starting with the switch level located closest to the motor cams, the first level is referred to as "A". Any switches added above "A", are B, C, D, E, and so on.

4.4.4 Chicago Coin Score Motor

stub (describe switch positions and general make up like GTB score motor section)

4.5 Stepper Units

There are 3 basic types of steppers used in EM machines.

Step up / reset stepper
Step up / step down stepper
Continuous stepper

Additionally, Williams made a three-mode stepper -- Step Up / Step Down / Reset. The Reset mode is enabled by a rod connected to a relay plate. When the relay is enabled, the rod holds the step-down lever away from the gear, allowing it to sweep all the way back to its origin.

One thing that all steppers have in common is that then need to work well for you to be happy with the way your game functions. In fact, most of the functions are so integral to the game that your game will be "broken" if the steppers do not work. Most games cannot get through a reset sequence unless the score reels reset. Additionally, they might not advance to the next ball if the bonus is not counted down correctly. In order for a stepper to work correctly, it must be relatively clean and free of sticky grease and oil. The electrical contacts must be clean and should be coated with some sort of dielectric grease. The coil and plunger need to function smoothly. Finally, it needs to step once and only once per actuation. There are often adjustments to stops and coil locations that can be made to ensure this. When you actuate a stepper by hand, it needs to move smartly from by one step to the next. If this doesn't happen, it is time to rebuild your stepper.

4.5.1 Is Your Gottlieb Stepper Unit Missing a Tooth?

Gottlieb® Bonus Unit Stepper Close-Up. Image courtesy of Rob Madden.

No.
Gottlieb® steppers are built like tanks. The teeth on the main cog never break.

Some steppers, like the bonus unit pictured at left in particular, have a gap machined into the stepper perimeter that prevents the stepper from being stepped up more than 15 steps. That number of steps will be familiar as the maximum bonus count that can be accumulated on Gottlieb® bonus games.

4.5.2 Step Up / Reset Stepper

The step up/reset stepper is generally used when you only need to count up, not down. An example of the might be on a ball count unit that is used on a replay machine. For this application, you count up to 3 or 5 balls played, depending on the setting, then reset to 0 or 1 ball as part of the start up sequence. Step up/reset steppers are also used for the 100K unit on a Gottlieb® Woodrail. They are also occasionally used for bonus counters with the "scan style" bonus used on some later Gottlieb® games, like Target Alpha or Solar City and certainly in other places as well. Gottlieb® coin unit steppers came in two types of variants: step up, reset and step up, step down. Some Bally machines used a "Name Unit" which is a Step-up/Reset stepper for tracking the bonus on games that involved spelling out a the letters of a word.

Gottlieb® Step Up / Reset Stepper
Gottlieb® Bonus Unit (Target Alpha Style - Wiper Side)
Gottlieb® Bonus Unit (Target Alpha Style - Business Side)
Gottlieb® Balls Played Unit (Later Version - Wiper Side)
Gottlieb® Balls Played Unit (Later Version - Business Side)
Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit (Single Player Replay - Wiper Side)
(At Ball 1 Position)
Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit (Single Player Replay - Business Side)
(At Ball 1 Position)
Gottlieb® Coin Unit (Wiper Side) Note that the coin unit in the pic is shown in its reset position. The snowshoes of the wiper are properly indexed on the wiper board.
Gottlieb® Coin Unit (Business Side)

Williams Step Up / Reset Steppers
Williams 1970's Player Unit (Wiper Side)
Williams 1970's Player Unit (Wiper Contacts)
Williams 1970's Player Unit (Business Side)
Williams 1960's Ball Count Unit (Multi-Player Wiper Side)
Williams 1960's Ball Count Unit (Multi-Player Business Side)
Williams 1960's Coin Unit (Wiper Side)
Williams 1960's Coin Unit (Business Side)

Williams Step Up / Step Down / Reset Steppers
Placeholder for Williams Grand Prix Bonus Unit (1 of 2) (Wiper Side)
Williams Bonus Unit (with "knock-off" coil, Grand Prix, Stardust)

Bally Step Up / Reset Steppers
Bally Player Up Unit (Wiper Side)
Bally Player Up Unit (Business Side)
Placeholder for Bally Ball Count Unit (Wiper Side)
Placeholder for Bally Ball Count (Business Side)
Bally Coin Unit (Wiper Side)
Bally Coin Unit (Business Side)
Bally Name Unit (Wiper Side)
Bally Name Unit (Business Side)

4.5.2.1 Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit Wiper and Switch States Explained

In the following image gallery, a Gottlieb® ball count unit is shown in the various different states. This applies to Gottlieb® single player replay games, where an automatic ball lift is used [King of Diamonds (1/67) to T.K.O. (3/79)].

Upon the game resetting, the ball count unit's reset coil is pulsed, and the stepper wiper travels to the position one less than the first rivet of the upper rivet pairs. On the switch side, the zero position ball count unit switches open, and the 6th position ball count unit switch is closed. While the game is in this state, there is no power to the playfield coils, except any kick out holes on the playfield.
Once the ball passes over the trough switch for the 1st time, the ball count unit step up coil pulses once. This advances the wiper one step clockwise. At this point, the zero position ball count unit switches close. Likewise, the 6th position ball count unit switch remains closed. Each time the ball passes over the trough switch, the wiper advances one position. The switch states of the zero position and 6th position ball count unit switches are all closed during the course of gameplay.
When the last ball being played drains to the outhole, the wiper moves to the 6th rivet pair position. For 3-ball settings, the ball count unit step-up coil pulses 3 additional times from the 3rd rivet pair position. For 5-ball settings, the ball count unit step-up coil pulses only once from the 5th rivet pair position. Once the wiper reaches the 6th rivet pair position, the 6th position ball count unit switch on the back side opens. When both these instances occur, the power is shut off to the playfield, the game over light is illuminated, signalling the end of the game.

Switch States of a Gottlieb® Single Player Ball Count Unit (Replay Game) - 1975 Gottlieb® Atlantis
Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit at the Zero Position - Wiper Side
Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit at the 1st Ball Position - Wiper Side
Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit at the 6th Ball (Game Over) Position - Wiper Side
Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit at the Zero Position - Switch Side
Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit at the 1st Ball Position - Switch Side
Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit at the 6th Ball (Game Over) Position - Switch Side

4.5.3 Step Up / Step Down Stepper

A step up/step down stepper is possibly a little more common than the step up/reset style. A typical application would be as the ball count unit on an Add-A-Ball game. Here, it would step up the ball count to 5 (or 9), then step down one at a time as balls are used and step up one at a time as balls are earned. Another common application would be to count bonus points, where it steps up as bonus points are earned, and steps down at the end of the ball or whenever the bonus is collected. The most common application of all is to count the credits on a machine.

Gottlieb® Step Up / Step Down Steppers
Gottlieb® Replay (Credit) Unit (Drum Side)
Gottlieb® Replay (Credit) Unit (Business Side)
Placeholder for Gottlieb® Bonus Unit (Wiper Side)
Placeholder for Gottlieb® Bonus Unit (Business Side)
Gottlieb® Add-A-Ball Ball Count Unit (Free Fall - Wiper Side)
Gottlieb® Add-A-Ball Ball Count Unit (Free Fall - Business Side)
Gottlieb® Balls Played Unit (Dancing Lady - Wiper Side)
Gottlieb® Balls Played Unit (Dancing Lady - Business Side)
Placeholder for Gottlieb® Coin Unit (Wiper Side)
Placeholder for Gottlieb® Coin Unit (Business Side)

Bally Step Up / Step Down Steppers
Bally Credit Unit (Drum Side)
Bally Credit Unit (Business Side)
Bally Bonus Unit (Wiper Side)
Bally Bonus Unit (Business Side)

Williams Step Up / Step Down Steppers
Williams Credit Unit (Drum Side)
Williams Credit Unit (Business Side)
Placeholder for Williams Bonus Unit (Wiper Side)
Placeholder for Williams Bonus Unit (Business Side)
Placeholder for Williams Ball Count Unit (Single Player Wiper Side)
Placeholder for Williams Ball Count Unit (Single Player Business Side)

4.5.3.1 Gottlieb® Credit Unit (Drum type) Switch States Explained

In the following image gallery, a Gottlieb® credit unit is shown in the various different states. This applies to Gottlieb® replay games, where a drum style credit unit is used. This unit is used on all games from 1950-1979. The exceptions are games starting with Super Soccer (1/75) until Sure Shot (3/76), which use the "half-moon" style of credit unit.

Details to be added

Switch States of a Gottlieb® (Drum type) Credit Unit (Replay Game) - 1975 Gottlieb® Atlantis
Gottlieb® Credit Unit at the Zero Position
Gottlieb® Credit Unit at the 1 Credit Position (Same switch states for any value greater than zero, but less than the maximum)
Gottlieb® Credit Unit at the Maximum Credit Position (Adjustable)

4.5.3.2 Williams Credit Unit Examples

As mentioned previously, the credit unit is a common example of a step up/step down stepper. Since the various states of the credit unit are not adequately illustrated in Williams schematics or manuals, a few examples are provided below. In general these credit units work by causing a cog or pin on the stepper wheel to move clockwise when credits are added (the step up coil pulses once per credit) and counter-clockwise when credits are decremented (the step down coil pulses once per credit). This cog then actuates a M/B "zero position switch" to indicate whether there are or are not credits on the machine. Williams credit units also have a "max credit" switch which is opened by a second cog that turns clockwise. This switch opens the circuit and prevents additional credits from being added to the machine. The max credit cog is adjustable by the owner/operator. Machines which use a credit light located on the lower ball apron (pitch & bat games included) will have an additional NC switch that is actuated in tandem with the M/B switch. The light is used as a quick visual identifier when credits remain on the game. As long as one or more credits remain, the light is on. When this switch on the credit opens (zero credits on the machine) the lamp on the apron is no longer illuminated.

Example of 1969 Fast Ball Credit Unit
1969 Wms Credit Unit showing ZERO credits
1969 Wms Credit Unit showing credits
1969 Wms Credit Unit showing MAX credits

4.5.4 Continuous Stepper

By far the most common stepper is the continuous stepper. They come large and small. The small unit is the infamous, often cursed and never loved AS stepper on later Gottlieb® games. This is used most often for the match feature and occasionally as part of the circuit for spinner scoring. The AS unit can often be removed from the game by unplugging a pair of Jones plugs. In theory this was done so that the AS match unit could be removed from areas where matches for free games were not allowed. As a practical matter, it is probably a good thing as these miserable little Rube Goldbergian contraptions will cause you grief at some point and will need to be rebuilt, preferably in a good light. Good lighting is required because when the AS relay malfunctions and needs to be rebuilt, it will get its last lick in by flinging a part of itself across the floor in a desperate suicidal mission to permanently bring your game down.

Luckily, full size continuous steppers are much more common than their diminutive and cantankerous smaller brothers. The full size stepper are often found in the match feature of earlier Gottlieb® and Williams games, often ringing the bell while also stepping along merrily with the smallest score increment (1 or 10 points). They are also used in Gottlieb® woodrails to track the 10K points and send a signal over to the 100K stepper when it steps past 90K and needs to carry the decade over. Another common application is in the "player unit" on multi-player Gottlieb® games.

Bally 0-to-9 match units from the 1960's sometimes included a bell which rang each time that digit was scored.

Gottlieb® Continuous Steppers
Gottlieb® 0-9 (Match) Unit (Wiper Side)
Gottlieb® 0-9 (Match) Unit (Business Side)
Placeholder for Gottlieb® Woodrail 10K Unit (Wiper Side)
Placeholder for Gottlieb® Woodrail 10K Unit (Business Side)
Gottlieb® Player Unit from Target Alpha (Wiper Side)
Gottlieb® Player Unit from Target Alpha (Cam and Switch Stack Side)
Gottlieb® AS Stepper Unit (Wiper Side)
Gottlieb® AS Stepper Unit (PCB Removed)

Williams Continuous Steppers
Placeholder for Williams 0-9 Unit (Wiper Side)
Placeholder for Williams 0-9 Unit (Business Side)
Williams 00-90 Unit (Top View)
Williams 00-90 Unit (Wiper View)

Bally Continuous Stepppers
Bally 0-9 Match Unit (Wiper Side)
Bally 0-9 Match Unit (Business Side)
Placeholder for Bally 00-90 (Match) Unit
(Wiper Side)
Placeholder for Bally 00-90 (Match) Unit
(Business Side)
Placeholder for Bally Spinner Unit
(Wiper Side)
Placeholder for Bally Spinner Unit
(Business Side)
Bally Advance Unit (Continuous Stepper)

[It is worth noting that on later Bally games (1974 onward), the 0-9 unit and the spinner score units are, by and large, score reel units without the score reel.]

4.5.4.1 Score Reels

By far the most common use of the continuous stepper is in the score reels. In fact, it is so common that score reel rebuilding was given its own section in the Pinwiki. A continuous stepper often is used very heavily, which means they are subject to wear out – possibly more than other failure modes such as getting gunked up.

Gottlieb® Score Reels
Gottlieb® Metal "Rat Trap" Reel Unit
Gottlieb® Decagon Reel w/o circuit board (First Generation - 10-Sided Reel Drum)
Gottlieb® Decagon Reel incl. circuit board (First Generation - 10-Sided Reel Drum)
Placeholder for Gottlieb® Decagon Reel (Second Generation - Round Reel Drum)
Gottlieb® Decagon Reel (Third Generation)
Gottlieb® Decagon Reel (Third Generation) - Back Side (Note that the reel can be advanced via the small lever which protrudes through the metal cage of the reel.)

Williams Score Reels
Williams 5" Metal Reel (Drum Side)
Williams 4" Plastic Reel (Drum Side)
Williams 4" Plastic Reel (Back Side)
Williams 3" Plastic Reel (Drum Side - No PCB)
Williams 3" Plastic Reel (Back Side - No PCB)
Williams 3" Plastic Reel (Drum Side - With PCB)

Bally Score Reels
Placeholder for Bally Early 60's Score Reel (Drum Side)
Placeholder for Bally Early 60's Score Reel (Back Side)
Bally Late 60's / Early 70's Score Reel (Drum Side)
Bally Late 60's / Early 70's Score Reel (Back Side)

Chicago Coin Score Reels
Early 70's 3 inch Chicago Coin Score Reel (Drum Side)
Early 70's 3 inch Chicago Coin Score Reel (Back Side)
Placeholder for Chicago Coin Score Reel (Drum Side)
Placeholder for Chicago Coin Score Reel (Back Side)

4.6 Flippers

4.6.1 Different Styles of Flipper Assemblies

Late Style 2" Gottlieb® Flipper from 1967 Surf Side

Late Style 2" Gottlieb® Upper Flipper from 1967 Surf Side. Note- Lack of EOS switch & unusual triangular bakelite link

Early example of reversed "impulse" flipper from a 1950 Williams Dreamy. This coil has a single winding, making it impossible to hold the flippers in an up position. The EOS switch breaks the current to the coil, so the player can only "slap" the pinball with both flippers at the same time. Either cabinet switch would operate both flippers.

Bally "Zipper-Flipper" assembly from 1967 Rocket III. The left and right flipper assemblies (including solenoids and EOS switches) are mounted on independent brackets which can be pulled together or pushed apart by another pair of solenoids.

4.7 Roto Target

4.8 Vari-Target

Playfield view of a Gottlieb® vari-target

Underside view of a Gottlieb® vari-target

4.9 The Start Up Sequence Explained

Regardless of a particular machine's manufacturer, every EM pinball machine has a start up sequence. When a coin is inserted (if the coin switch is set for one game per coin) or a credit button pushed, an EM pinball machine has to successfully complete the start up sequence before a game can properly begin. Analogous to an EM's start up sequence is a computer booting up, and loading an operating system successfully.

The primary events which occur during the start up sequence are:

Resetting all the score reels to zero, or resetting lamp scoring values or lamp projected scoring values (games from the 1930's and 1940's in some cases) to zero on machines manufactured prior to the use of score reels.
Resetting the ball count to ball 1, player 1 or ball 1 minus 1, player 1 on multi-player games; resetting the ball count to ball 1 or ball 1 minus 1 (ball count unit does not reset to 1; it advances to 1, once ball has closed switch on ball trough in most cases) on single player games, where the ball count unit increments throughout a game; or setting the ball count to the maximum balls allowed per game on games where the ball count unit decrements throughout a game. In the case of older machines where a manual ball lift assembly was used, advancing when releasing the ball in multi-player games or balls in single player games.
Resetting game progressive sequences and features for machines which do not have game-to-game, progressive, carry over game features / sequences.
Resetting game specific mechanical assemblies such as single drop targets, drop target banks, vari-target, ball lane gates, etc.
Allowing power to pass to the playfield mechanisms

Although some of the above events may not occur, a game can still start and play. These types of issues can usually be overcome rather easily. The more difficult problems are when a particular event or events do not occur or halt the process during start up and the score motor continues to run. It is up to the repair tech to determine at what point the start up sequence has stalled or failed.

Below are some game specific start up sequences. These start up sequences can be applied to similar machines from the same manufacturer and era. In most cases, the start up sequence is explained in the machine's manual, if a manual was created for it.

An EM pinball enthusist created YouTube videos which illustrate the details of Gottlieb and Williams late 70's 4-player start up sequences. The first is based on a Gottlieb Spirit of 76, and the second is based on a Williams Space Mission. Again, the information will apply to similar machines from the same manufacturer and era.

4.10 Gottlieb® Solenoid Coil & Sleeve Chart

Coil	Sleeve	Length
A-1496	A-5065	1 7/8"
A-4893	A-5064	1 21/32" (note B)
A-5141	A-5064	1 21/32" (note B)
A-5143	A-5142	2 3/4" w/collar*
A-5193	A-5171	1 19/32" (note B)
A-5194	A-5064	1 21/32" (note B)
A-5195	A-5064	1 21/32" (note B)
A-5196	A-5172	2 ½"
A-5197	A-5172	2 ½"
A-7800	A-5172	2 ½"
A-9154	A-8111	1 1/4"
A-9479	A-5172	2 ½"
????	A-6087	1 1/4" w/collar*
A-15259	A-8111	1 1/4"
A-15555	A-5172	2 1/2"

Where noted with an asterisk*, sleeve has a collar 1/4" from end.

Note B: Original GTB specs are 1 19/32" & 1 21/32" but SUBSTITUTE 1 5/8" instead. Also, SUBSTITUTE 2" for 1 31/32" w/sleeve.

Older Gottlieb® and Williams, et al; may use a brass sleeve. If it can be removed, a nylon one can be used, but some brass sleeves are still available.

Additional information on Gottlieb® coils & sleeves can be found here.

4.11 Williams Solenoid Coil & Sleeve Chart

4.11.1 24 Volt Coils

Coil Number	WMS P/N	Length
A 21-550	3 A-7066	1 3/4"
A 22-550	3 A-7066	1 3/4"
A 23-600	3 A-7066	1 3/4"
A 23-650	3 A-7066	1 3/4"
A 26-1350	3 A-7066	1 3/4"
A1 23-750	3 A-7067	1 5/8- 2"
A2 23-750	3 A 7067-1	2 1/2-2 5/8"
A6 22-550	3 A-7067-4	???
A 5 26-1350	3 A 7067-3	1 9/16- 1 13/16"
B 26-800	3 A 7066-1	1 1/4"
C2 26-800	3 A 7067-2	???
DU 23-740	3 A 7066-2	???
FL 21-28	3 A 7066	1 3/4"
G 22-550	3 A 7066	1 3/4"
G 23-600	3 A 7066	1 3/4"
G 23-650	3 A 7066	1 3/4"
G 23-750	3 A 7066	1 3/4"
G 24-750	3 A 7066	1 3/4"
G 24-850	3 A 7066	1 3/4"

4.11.2 50 Volt Coils

Coil Number	WMS P/N	Length
A 24-975	2 A-2167-4	1 5/8" Aluminum*
A 25-900	3 A-7066	1 3/4"
A 25-1000	2 A-2167-4	1 5/8" Aluminum*
A 26-1100	3 A-7066	1 3/4"
A 26-1200	3 A-7066	1 3/4"
A1 26-1100	3 A-7067-1	2 ½- 2 5/8"
A2 26-1100	3 A-7067-1	2 ½- 2 5/8"
A2 26-1350	3 A-7067-1	2 ½- 2 5/8"
A3-25-950	3 A-7067-1	2 ½- 2 5/8"
A 30-2700	3 A-7066	1 3/4"
B 27-1100	3 A-7066-1	1 1/4"
B 28-1450	3 A-7066-1	1 1/4"
B 29-1600	3 A-7066-1	1 1/4"
C 27-1300	3 A-7067-2	1 3/8" w/collar*
C 30-2400	3 A-7067-2	1 3/8" w/collar*
D 22-1150	2 A-2168	2 1/4" Aluminum*
D 24-1150	2 A-2168	2 1/4" Aluminum*
D 24-1400	2 A-2168	2 1/4" Aluminum*
D 24-1600	2 A-2168	2 1/4" Aluminum*
DU 26-1350	3 A-7066-2	1 13/16"
FL 25-31	3 A-7066	1 3/4"
FL 26-950/250	2 A-2167-4	1 5/8" Aluminum*
G 25-1100	3 A-7066	1 3/4"
G1 25-1100	3 A-7066	1 3/4"
G 26-1400	3 A-7066	1 3/4"

The asterisk(*) denotes a best guess.

4.12 Setting your EM Machine to "High Tap"

EM machines provide a second transformer output for coil voltages called "High Tap." This voltage is intended for locations that have low line voltage, usually due to having a string of machines connected to the same electrical circuit. A location with modern wiring should not have low line voltage. By moving the power wire for the coils from the normal (25V) output to the high tap output, coil voltage is increased by about two volts.

In some cases, owners or operators may have switched a machine to "high tap" to overcome weak flippers or pop bumbers. This is not recommended. The root cause of the problem should be addressed by rebuilding the flippers and/or pop bumpers.

In other cases the machine may have been "high tapped" to increase the speed of the game play. It's your game, so set it however you like. It can always be changed back. Be advised that ball speeds over and above those intended by the original designers increase the possibility of breaking targets, drop targets and playfield plastics. This is also true when "juiced up" flipper coils are used such as the Gottlieb A-5141 "yellow dot" or "orange dot" coils made by the Pinball Resource.

5 EM Concepts of Operation

5.1 Basic Relay Logic

Illustrative example of how "seal-in" switches are used.

The diagram at left shows several key concepts to help understand how an EM game operates.

A simple example of how a game can score 5000 points (5, 50, or 500 too) begins with the #1 rollover switch, shown as "normally open" (NO), and with a "Start" arrow pointing to it.

When the rollover switch closes, the circuit to the coil on relay "A" is completed, and A energizes. From the relay information table, we see that relay A has three normally open (i.e. "3A", or 3 form A) switches, all of which are shown in the diagram. All of these switches close when A energizes.

The top switch is the "seal in" switch for the A relay. Via the "normally closed" (NC) switch at motor 2B, and the now closed seal in switch on A, the A relay will remain energized.

The middle switch on A, shown in the diagram, closes too. It will complete the circuit to energize L each time that the switch at motor 1A closes.

The bottom switch on A shown in the diagram closes and causes the score motor to begin running. The score motor will continue to run through a complete cycle via the switch at motor 1C. The switch at motor 1C closes when the score motor begins to turn, by virtue of a cam that raises, thereby closing the switch. Gottlieb motors revolve 1/3 of a revolution to complete a typical action. Bally and Williams score motors revolve 1/2 of a revolution to complete a typical action. The switch at motor 1C is called the "motor runout switch" because it guarantees that the motor will complete the full 1/3 revolution.

Gottlieb score motors pulse switches at level A on the score motor 5 times per 1/3 revolution. Bally and Williams score motors pulse switches on the "impulse" cam 5 times per 1/2 revolution. These switches are used to score more than a single 1, 10, 100, or 1000...typically 5, 50, 500, or 5000.

As the score motor turns, the switch at motor 1A will close 5 times in succession. When the switch closes, it completes the circuit to L, the 1000 point relay. Subsequent circuitry associated with the 1000 point relay causes the score reels to increment, the 1000 point chime to ring, and perhaps increment the 10000 point score reel (via a 9th position switch).

This basic kind of operation can be extended to include much more complex game actions. You will find that this circuit implementation is reused many times.

5.2 Start Up Sequences

The following is the start-up sequence for a Gottlieb® Southern Belle. The Southern Belle is a woodrail from 1955 with lightbox scoring. In other words, it has no score reels. Other Gottlieb® woodrails from this era will be similar, but not exactly the same. You will need to consult your schematic and figure out the exact sequence if it differs slightly from the one below:

Southern Belle Start Sequence:

1. Push start button, pulls in start S relay

2. Start relay resets 100K unit, closing switch at -1 position on 100K unit

3. Closed switch at -1 position pulls in Z relay

4. Z relay pulls in ball release coil which is held on by 2 ball hole switches and a switch on the ball release unit

5. The balls move off the two switches, opening the two switches, so now the ball release coil is retained by Z only.

6. Switch on Z relay closes and allows pulsing of 10K unit through Motor 1A

7. 10 K unit continues to pulse until it hits position 9 or 19 or 29 on the 10K unit, then the "bridge" there, in series with the NO switch (which closes once/pulse) on the 10 K unit pulls in the M relay.

8. The M relay steps the 100K drive coil up and stays pulled in until the 100K NC switch is opened (upon stepping once)

9. The 100K step moves the 100K stepper off the -1 position, opening the switch on that keeps the Z relay pulled in.

10. The Z relay releases – the 10K unit can no longer be pulsed though the switch on the Z relay.

11. Z relay opening also releasing the ball release coil.

12. The N flip/flop switch seems somewhat redundant in this setup.

The following is the start-up sequence for a Gottlieb® Roto Pool from 1958. You can see it is similar, but not exactly the same as the Southern Belle sequence.

Roto Pool Start Sequence:

1. Push start button, pulls in start S relay

2. Start relay resets 100K unit, through NC switch on motor 1C closing switch at -1 position on 100K unit

3. Closed switch at -1 position pulls in U relay

4. U relay pulls in ball release coil, which remains on by the U relay, a switch on the unit itself and a flip/flop on the N relay

5. Switch on the U relay is closed, allowing pulsing of the 10K unit though switch on motor 1A

6. 10 K unit continues to pulse until it hits position 9 or 19 or 29 on the 10K unit, then the "bridge" there, in series with the NO switch (which closes once/pulse) on the 10K unit pulls in the 0-9 coil relay

7. The M relay pulls in and is held in by it's own switch and a NC switch on the 10K unit and remains on until the 10K unit steps. The 100K step moves the 100K stepper off the -1 position, opening the switch on that keeps the U relay pulled in.

8. The U relay releases – the 10K unit can no longer be pulsed though the switch on the U relay.

9. The N flip/flop switch activates at some point, releasing the ball release coil (IMO, this is a poor design, leading to a burnt coil for any number of reasons (no FMEAs at Gottlieb®?)

1960s Gottlieb® Add-A-Ball Start-Up Sequence (Flipper Clown)

COIN CHUTE energizes START (S) relay. If HOLD (R) relay is not energized it will energize and hold on through it's own switch.
S relay switch starts the SCORE MOTOR
Score reels reset through S switch and SCORE MOTOR 1A
RELAY BANK resets through S and SCORE MOTOR switches 2C and 1B
BALLS TO PLAY steps down (SUBTRACT coil) through switches on S and D and SCORE MOTOR 1A.
RESET (D) relay energizes when all score reels and BALLS TO PLAY unit are at zero. It holds through a switch on itself for one score motor cycle, then the RELAY BANK resets through the START (S) relay armature switch via SCORE MOTOR 1C, de-energizing the D relay.
While D is energized the BALLS TO PLAY unit steps up five times through a switch on D and SCORE MOTOR 1A.

Gottlieb® Start-up Sequences from the 1970s

There is a great repository of Gottlieb® startup sequences gleaned from numerous game manuals.

70s Williams Start Up Sequence (4 player)

When the start (credit) button is pressed, the credit unit is decremented. This is done through the CREDIT UNIT zero position switch and a set of parallel switches that ensure the game is in "game over" or still on player 1, ball 1, and not at the maximum number of players (COIN UNIT last position switch).
The end of stroke (EOS) switch on the CREDIT UNIT decrement coil energizes the COIN relay.
The COIN relay:
- Trips the GAME OVER latch/trip relay once the PLAYER UNIT and BALL COUNT unit reach zero.
- Energizes the RESET relay.
- Runs the SCORE MOTOR.
The RESET relay:
- Energizes the BALL COUNT unit reset through the SCORE MOTOR.
- Energizes the GAME OVER relay latch coil.
- Energizes the COIN UNIT reset coil.
- Energizes the NO.1 and NO.2 (score) RESET relays, through the score motor.
- Runs the SCORE MOTOR.
The score reset relays pulse and zero the score reels, through a switch on the score reel that opens in the zero position to stop the reset for that reel.
The SCORE MOTOR runs until all score reels and the BONUS UNIT reach the zero position.
The RESET relay decrements the BONUS UNIT until it reaches the zero position.
When the BONUS RELAY drops out it energizes the OUTHOLE relay through a different BONUS UNIT zero switch and through the SCORE MOTOR.
The OUTHOLE relay:
- Runs the SCORE MOTOR and increments the BONUS UNIT once.
- Energizes the BALL RELEASE coil which kicks the ball into the shooter lane.

Bally start sequence:

1. When the coin is inserted into the game the coin relay energizes. It stays energized through its own hold on switch and a score motor switch. Once the start button is pressed the credit relay is energized which in turn energizes the coin relay if there are sufficient credits.

2. The lock relay is then energized by the coin relay at which time the game illuminates. The lock relay stays energized through its own hold on switch and a delay relay switch.

3. The coin relay then energizes the reset relay through a switch on the game over relay.

4. As the score motor runs, it energizes any score reset relays. The score reset relay will now resets the score reels to zero.

5. The total play meter is advanced by the coin relay via the score motor.

6. The ball count and player units are then reset by the reset relay via the score motor.

7. The credit unit is stepped down by the coin relay via the score motor.

8. The game over relay latch coil is now energized by the coin relay via the score motor.

9. The 100,000 relay latch coil (if equipped) is energized by the coin relay via the score motor.

10. The ball is now introduced into the shooter lane by the outhole relay via the score motor (assuming the outhole switch is closed).

11. If multiple players are added by the start button, the coin relay advances the coin unit,advances the total play meter, and steps down the credit unit.

5.3 Score Reel Switch States

Most score reels have three switch pairs, although the highest most score reel denomination typically has only two switch pairs. Regardless of the total amount of switch pairs, the switch states are actuated dependent upon the value displayed via the score window. The most important score values are when the score reel is either displaying a zero or nine.

Any given game needs to know when the score reel position is zero in order to successfully complete the start up sequence. If all of the score reels are not returned to zero at start up, the score motor will continue to run, and the start up / reset sequence will not finish.

The importance of the ninth position of the score reel is rather simple. When a score reel reaches a value of 9, it must send a signal to the next highest value score reel in order to advance that reel at the same time. Here's an example. While playing a Williams Gulfstream, the score is currently at 480 points. A 10 pt. switch is closed, and the score becomes 490 points. At this given point, the ninth position switch on the 10's reel is now closed. Shortly after, a second 10 pt. switch is closed, and the total score becomes 500 points. If the ninth position switch was not closed on the 10's reel, during the 10's reel advancing to zero, the score would "appear" to loop back around to 400 points. However, since the 10's reel ninth position switch was closed, an additional signal was sent to the 100's reel, telling it to advance one position, at the same time the 10's reel advanced. On a properly functioning machine, this event happens when any given reel reaches the ninth position. The exception is the highest denomination score reel, which typically does not have a ninth position switch.

For values other than 0 and 9, the game determines these values (including 0 and 9) via a bakelite circuit board attached to the score reel assembly. See the next section for details regarding these circuit boards.

NOTE: Although the pics below are from specific eras and reels, the switch states are not all inclusive to all games with these types of reels. The pics shown are just a sampling, and it is noted what specific game the pics came from. The game you are working on may not be the same as shown in the pics. An example would be the difference between the score reels of an early 70's single player versus an early 70's 2 or 4 player game.

Gottlieb® 1st Generation Decagon Score Reel Switches - 1966 Gottlieb® Dancing Lady
Gottlieb® 1st Generation Decagon Score Reel at the zero position
Gottlieb® 1st Generation Decagon Score Reel at the one position - switches will be in same states for 2-8
Gottlieb® 1st Generation Decagon Score Reel at the nine position

Gottlieb® 2nd Generation Decagon Score Reel Switches - 1975 Gottlieb® Atlantis
Gottlieb® 2nd Generation Decagon Score Reel at the zero position
Gottlieb® 2nd Generation Decagon Score Reel at the one position - switches will be in same states for 2-8
Gottlieb® 2nd Generation Decagon Score Reel at the nine position

Gottlieb® Last Generation Decagon Score Reel Switches - 1975 Gottlieb® Super Soccer
Gottlieb® Last Generation Decagon Score Reel at the zero position
Gottlieb® Last Generation Decagon Score Reel at the one position - switches will be in same states for 2-8
Gottlieb® Last Generation Decagon Score Reel at the nine position

Bally mid-1970's Score Reel Switches - 1976 Bally Aladdin's Castle
Bally mid-70's Score Reel at the zero position
Bally mid-70's Score Reel at the one position - switches will be in same states for 2-8
Bally mid-70's Score Reel at the nine position

5.4 Score Reel Bakelite Circuit Boards

In some cases, it is important for a game to know exactly what value any given score reel is. The two most common events where a game uses this information is the free game scoring thresholds and the match sequence at the end of the game.

Unfortunately, the score reel switch stacks are limited to conveying when a score reel is only at either the 0 or 9 position. If switch stacks were used to determine every value, the assembly would be large, cumbersome, and costly. To overcome these issues, a bakelite circuit board is attached to the score reel assembly. The compliment part to the circuit board is a small, two contact wiper secured to the score reel drum. As the score reel advances, the wiper makes contact with two, isolated circuit board traces. In turn, the wiper completes a specific circuit on the board.

Most all score reels have bakelite circuit boards attached to them. The exception is typically the next to lowest score reel value. In other words, if a game uses 4 reels total to achieve a maximum point value of 99,990 (the ones position is a non-existent dummy reel), the 100's reel assembly would not use a circuit board. The reason is it is not necessary. The 10's reel has a circuit board, because of the match feature (match numbers would be from 00-90 in this example). The 1K and 10K score reels have circuit boards too, because the free game scoring thresholds are in the range of 10,000 to 99,000. However, the game never needs to know the exact state of the 100's reel.

++++add more info and pics++++

6 Problems and Fixes

6.1 Turning Machines On / Off

Most modern EM pinball machines have a main power switch in circuit with the incoming 120VAC. However, when some games (Bally and Williams games from the 60's / early 70's) are turned on via this switch, the game still remains dark. To illuminate the game, it is necessesary to push the flipper cabinet button located on the left hand side. This closes a circuit which powers the game's lock relay.

Williams Knock Off Switch Located on the Front of the Motor Board

Earlier EM games (1940's, 50's, and early 60's) were not equipped with power switches. Any of these games would be powered on as soon as they were plugged in. However, these too may not be illuminated. Again, pressing the left flipper button would illuminate some games, while others would not be completely powered until a coin was dropped into the coin chute or a game started. To turn these games off, a sharp blow with the heel of the foot or palm of the hand would be necessesary. A sharp blow would take a small rod that was resting on the cabinet bottom, and cause it to raise upward, and open a normally closed switch which enabled the hold relay.

6.2 Lubrication

Over-lubrication causes far more trouble in coin operated equipment than under lubrication. Practically all cases of poor contact on switches and wiper disks are due to oil or grease, or oil vapor, which forms a film or residue on the contacts and will not allow current to pass through. Excess lubricant may also seep into clutches causing them to slip.

IMPORTANT: NEVER USE VASELINE FOR LUBRICATION ON ANY PART OF THE MACHINE! Vaseline is not a true lubricant. It leaves a dirty and gummy residue and becomes very thick when cold.

Step-up levers, ratchets, cams, shafts and other sliding or oscillating parts should be very lightly greased with special coin machine lubricant. The bakelite disks (biscuits) on the motor units and step-up units will require lubrication with the special coin machine lubricant only after the grease is completely evaporated or when the film of the grease becomes dirty (machines with bakelite disks only). In either event, clean the parts thoroughly with a solvent, then apply an extremely thin coat of the special grease.

Solenoid plungers should not have a lubricant of any kind. Should there be a sluggish tendency or if plungers are sticking, the parts should be cleaned with a solvent and flaked graphite if anything, applied on reassembly.

The general rule is "when in doubt, don't". There are very few places on a pinball machine that need lubrication and they're only in spots that have metal-to-metal contact. When needed, a good choice is "Super Lube Teflon Grease", a clear synthetic grease with Teflon. It can be found at local hardware stores or online, for example: http://www.pinrestore.com/Supplies.html

6.3 Free Play

6.3.1 Bally

Two credit unit switches that are opened at the credit unit zero position have been bent "permanently" closed. This image from a Bally "Flicker". The general procedure is identical for most EM games.

The image at left shows how to set a Bally EM game, in this case "Flicker", to free play. The two switches that open when the credit stepper wheel reaches zero, are adjusted so that the "floating" switch (the short switch) remains closed when the zero position cam would normally open them.

6.4 Switches

6.4.1 Defeating Bounce, Slam, and tilt switches

A "defeated" bounce switch. This one is on a Gottlieb "Pro-Football".

This technique works well for "normally closed" switches like the one pictured. A dicey bounce switch can cause a game to suddenly tilt without apparent reason.

Desolder one of the wires to the switch.
Solder that wire to the other wire.

6.4.2 Adjusting Switch Gaps

Useful tools for EM switches. 1) Ignition file for Tungsten contacts, 2) Flexstone File for Silver contacts, 3) Switch adjustment tool, 4) Homemade adjustment tool, 5 )Spring push/pull tool, very useful for switches also.

Proper switch clearance gaps are crucial for correct operation of any pinball game. Very many problems in EM games come down to a problem with incorrect operation of a switch. The switch blades are made up of phosphor bronze, which has high conductivity, resilience to form and excellent soldering characteristics, but has the drawback of being brittle compared to copper. Switch blades therefore, are commonly broken by the game, or careless actions by the repair person. A switch adjusting tool, purchased or homemade, is a necessity. Pliers or screwdrivers might be used in special circumstances, or in extremis, but are not best practice.

Switches in EM games are designed to have a degree of over-travel, which creates a wiping motion that helps clean the switch. The contacts must meet, stay together and slide across the face of the contact slightly, to be perfectly adjusted. They also must be gapped wide enough that they do not bounce, causing multiple switch closures. This problem is more often seen in electronic games, due to the rapid nature of the switch closures being too fast to effect an EM game. Electrical sparking can often be seen in dim light between the contacts, and this is not necessarily a cause for concern.

Before adjusting switches, make certain the screws holding the switch stacks are tight. Bakelite spacers in the switch stacks due to excessive moisture have occasionally shrunk by drying out, causing poor adjustment. Failing to tighten a switch stack prior to adjustment can cause newly adjusted switches to become maladjusted in short notice. When tightening a switch stack, tighten the screw closest to the switch blade contact first. The screw closest to the soldering tabs can then be tightened. Tightening switch stacks in this manner will keep the switches from "fanning" out, if the screws are tightened in the opposing manner. Some switches have a hex nut on the backside which will require holding it as you turn. After tightening a switch stack, be sure to recheck the gap of each switch, because it can change.

If you clean a set of points and find yourself having to do it again soon, check the switch contact. Switch contacts can become loose and swivel or spin. In turn, the contact will arc, and will not function effectively. Firm placement of the contact on the switch blade is necessary. The contact can be repeened, or soldered to the backside of the switch blade.

Using your switch adjusting tool put twisting pressure on the shorter switch blade as close to the switch stack as possible and include the blade stiffener (if present) in the adjuster slot. Except on rare occasion, never adjust the longer switch leaf which is actuated by the relay's armature. The exception to this rule is when when an inexperienced tech has mistakenly adjusted it previously and it needs attention. Try to use as little force and change of gap as possible to incrementally reach your gap goal. Using too much force and a back and forth gap readjustment tends to bend and weaken the switch blade which can make a deformed switch blade difficult to set for correct operation. This is often seen in games that have been “hacked”; sometimes the only way to remedy the situation is to replace the entire switch or disassemble it entirely. Cycle and recycle the mechanical device that activates the switch and observe the switch for proper gap, wiping action and release.

6.4.3 Recommended Gap Specifications

Gottlieb® recommends a gap of .019" on a normally open switch on the AG relay, with overtravel of .015". The lock-in switch should have only .010 gap in a de-energized state. Absolute precision in these measurements is not critical, but should give you an idea of what amount of gap you should look for. A automotive feeler gauge set could be used to help with this setting, but after some experience, “eyeballing” it will suffice.

Magnet type and interlock relays have longer switch blades, so the gap is wider at .031" or 1/32" with a similar overtravel. Rollover switches that are N.O. have some tolerance to their gap at .031" to .062" or 1/32" to 1/16" with a very small overtravel of 1/64". If the rollover is N.C., only a 1/64" gap is necessary.

Kicking rubber, or slingshot switches usually have a generous gap, at least 1/16", due to the rubber ring pushing back against the switch, and a bit of trial and error will be necessary to find the ideal gap setting. Pop bumper switches and scoring “dead” bumper switches, should have a gap of 1/64" for the actuating switch under the spoon, and a 1/32" gap for the score switch when open. All other types of switches will probably function well with a 1/32" gap, and this would be a starting point, modifying the gap on a case by case basis.

6.4.4 How to Fabricate Leaf Switches

1) Replacement switch blade with pre-formed contact holes 2) Fish paper 3) Blade stiffener 4) Bakelite switch separators in 1/16" & 1/32" thickness 5) Tungsten and Gold flashed contacts 6) Separator and screw insulators 7) “Dead” lug used on SS games

Very often the need to rebuild or fabricate leaf blade switches presents itself to the EM repair person. Sometimes the silver contact is worn out or missing, or the blade is bent or broken, to the point that a satisfactory repair cannot be done without replacing the switch. It can happen that the switch is missing entirely. When doing a repair on location, the exact parts may not be available. Fortunately, most switches for EM games can be replicated, and at a cost that may be cheaper than a new assembly. The mechanical procedure is described below, but first a general discussion of individual components (which I hope will be helpful to the novice) will ensue.

Switch blades come in 3 thicknesses depending on the intended use. The light gauge .008" blade may be used in relay banks where a small coil may have to draw down several switches, and perhaps in a spinner switch. The medium gauge .010 blade is used generally throughout the pinball game for any switch that is not a relay or flipper cabinet or EOS switch. The heaviest gauge .016" is used in EOS and flipper cabinet switches. They can be purchased from PBR, and it is advised to buy several of the medium and a few of the light & heavy blades for emergency and general repairs. These blades are of a single length, which may be cut to a suitable size, and are pre-drilled with 7 contact positions.

Switch blades are brittle, and cannot be bent or formed apreciably without cracking or breaking the blade. This makes it easy to score the blade with some side cutter pliers, then break off the unneeded section by bending it back and forth with a pair of pliers and a vise or some other hold down method. If a formed bend as used in drop target switches is required, an old blade from a scavenged switch must be utilized, or special ordered from a supplier (if available).

New switch contacts are no longer available in silver (that I am aware), but a gold flashed pair of contacts can substitute wherever the voltage and current handling is low. Tungsten contacts must be used for the End-of-stroke (EOS) switches and the flipper cabinet blades due to the higher voltage (35v or greater) and greater current these contacts must supply.

Fish paper spacers may be required for some EOS switches and usually for the coin door credit switch, and perhaps in other instances. The old fish paper if undamaged, can be used, and new pre-cut fish paper blades are available. A substitute can also be hand cut, if the need arises. Next, some switches require a blade lifter or spacer to push upon another switch or mechanism, such as in double EOS switch assemblies and score motor stacks. Many times these can be scavanged from the old blade, or a new one of a suitable length can be used. The height ranges from 3/32" to 11/32" by increments of 1/32", but usually the exact height is not critical. Again, having a small variety of blade lifters on hand for spares, is strongly urged. Some switch assemblies use a metal cover plate and a rectangular speed nut for the anchor for the screws, and new ones are available, but the old ones are usually fine.

Switch stack separators, usually made of bakelite or some other non-conducting material, come in 2 thicknesses, 1/16" & 1/32" and will be combined in various combinations to achieve the desired spacing the operating mechanism required. Old ones are fine to use, but are very brittle and prone to breaking if levered off too strongly or at an angle. A little care in separating the old switch stacks is indicated here. You may purchase new copies from the usual suppliers if necessary, or just scavange the necessary bits from previous repairs or your parts bin. If a machine screw is used to hold the switch assembly in place, it is a 4-40 screw (varying lengths) and corresponding nut, or a #4 pan head screw, if secured to the cabinet or playfield, or by a speednut.<br=clear all>

6.4.5 Procedure to Fabricate a Leaf Switch

If the original switch is present, it is an easy task to replicate a new one, or renew the bad parts, using the old switch as a model. Experimentation will be the only source for a missing or incorrect switch. For a complicated, multi bladed assembly, it is advised to take careful notes of how many spacers were used between each pair of switches,the presence of a "dead" lug (if any) and its location, and which blade had the blade lifter or blade stiffener, etc. Use a Stanley or other utility knife to separate the switch stack, levering each end of the stack a 1/64" or so, taking care not to crack the fragile bakelite spacer. You may also have success using a pin punch to press the tubing out. The tube switch insulators can be re-used or new ones put to service.

Each contact must be peened to the blade tightly for good electrical conductivity. A craftsman may also solder the peened nub to the blade to ensure its faultless operation. Use a hard wood scrap block (maple or similar), to back up the contact, while striking the nub with a punch and hammer. Don't backup the contact with a metal surface like a vise or anvil, as it will likely be marred or cracked. Clip off the long end of the blade if it is too long for the application by scoring the blade with a pair of side cutter pliers, and then bending it back and forth along the score line with suitable means. A bit of attention with a metal file to the ensuing sharp edge may save you a nasty scratch at some point. As an alternative, use a pair of diagonal cutters you don't really care about and just snap right through the blade directly. The nylon blade lifter, if required, may be peened by squeezing it with pliers, since it is rather soft. Re-assembly is straightforward, esp. if you took good notes.

A good substitute for an EOS switch

A useful sub for most low voltage switches

In place of re-creating the entire switch assembly, it may be that the only thing necessary to do is adapt an existing switch to an unavailable assembly by a slight modification of an existing readily available part. The blades are soft and easily drilled for a new spacer or contact, so I have found that an EOS switch like the Williams #03-7811, works quite well with a bit of modification for other EOS switch applications that are unavailable, involve double switches, or are just expensive. If a longer blade is needed, the top blade can be swapped out, or a second switch pair can be sandwiched in for a double flipper setup. Likewise, the Williams/Bally #SW-1A-120 assembly can sub for many playfield applications with just an addition of a spacer or two or a blade lifter. Your ingenuity can compensate for a lack of parts from available sources.

6.5 Coils

6.6 Stepper Unit Issues

6.6.1 Gottlieb® Stepper Unit Repairs

Gottlieb® ball count unit.

An excellent video showing disassembly, rehab, and reassembly of a Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit can be viewed here.

What follows is a step by step process for completely rebuilding a Gottlieb® step up/step down type stepper motor. This will be remarkably similar to a step-up/reset stepper or a continuous stepper. It will be close enough to a Williams that you can apply the procedure and figure out the few differences For instance, there are no snowshoes on a Williams, but there is a nasty looking brass spider that does the same thing.

This procedure is fairly comprehensive and if you want to just “fix what’s broke” you can pick and choose what to do within the procedure. The most common issue is probably that the unit requires a general degreasing and cleanup to step properly. After 40+ years, the original grease gets dirty, hard and sticky and the stepper will not function optimally in this condition.

The first thing you should do is to familiarize yourself with the function of the stepper you are rebuilding. Actuate the plungers by hand. Try to mimic an electrical response with your fingers – fast on and fast off. Observe the rotation of the stepper on the rivets. The stepper should advance one set of rivets with each actuation. It should move quickly, with no hesitation. The contacts should line up exactly with the rivets. Step the stepper up and down and establish it’s zero and maximum position. See if it binds under any of these conditions.

Assess the cleanliness of the rivet board, the springs (both on the snowshoes and the return spring), the plungers, the levers and the switches. Play with any levers and see that they rotate freely about their pivot points. Try to hold the levers out of the drive gear and assess the sluggishness of the gear when free of these encumbrances.

Look for any other obvious issues. Do you notice bent, or worn snowshoes? Is the plastic piece on the lever broken or missing? Do you notice rivets with large grooves or is the Bakelite disk burned next to some of the rivets? Are there any broken wires etc.?

The quickest, dirtiest method of fixing a gunked up stepper is to just clean up the rivets that you can get to with 600 grit sandpaper using alcohol as a lubricant/wetting agent. Then step the unit a bit and clean up the rest of the rivets. Wipe off the Bakelite disk with some alcohol and lubricate it with some Teflon gel and you are done. This may or may not fix your sluggish stepper, but there is a high probability it will get you at least marginally functional. If you are just starting out, you may want to leave it go at that. If you want to go further or this didn’t fix your issue, read on. Again, you can pick and choose what you do, but don’t do anything you are not comfortable with.

The following example is from a Gottlieb® Subway, 1966. This is the ball count unit. Since Subway is an Add-a-Ball, this is a step up/step down unit. The unit was actually functioning more or less fine when I got it, but I like to assess everything and check the coil stops etc. Additionally, I really like my mechanisms to be clean. Finally, I needed to write this pinwiki article, so I just scattered the whole thing and took lots of pictures. Also, was rebuilding the entire head, so I had the board out of the box and lying flat. So if it appears to defy gravity, or some angles seem odd, that is why.

Remove the Main Mechanism:

This is usually held in place with one hairpin on top and two on the bottom. If you remove the top one, it will allow the mechanism to flop down for some inspection and minor repairs or adjustments. If you remove the bottom two hairpins as well, you will have better access to do a complete overhaul.

Mark for reassembly

Mark your moving and stationary disks in some way that you will be able to reestablish the correct relative position of the stepping disk, the stationary disk and the gear/actuating mechanism upon reassembly. This is very important, so don’t skip this step. I like to do the following:

Step the mechanism to it’s “home” position. Usually there is a hard stop of some sort on the back of the gear.
Now use a paint pen or sharpie to mark at least one rivet and it’s corresponding snowshoe. I like to mark on the edge of the Bakelite, so it doesn’t get sanded off in later steps.
Take a picture, just to be sure.

Remove the active, snowshoe disk and spider

Remove the 3 screws that hold the active disk on the spider
Remove the spider by loosening or removing the set screws. I like to remove them, just to be sure they are out of the way. Note: On some machines, these screws run in a recess on the shaft, on others they run on a flat and on others they run on a finished, round portion of the shaft. Regardless, you need to make sure they are out of the way.
Work the spider off. Depending on the design (see above) and how bad the shaft is chewed up, this is anything from a 2 second job to 10 minutes of pain and hate.
At this point, your shaft is free on this side and held in place by the mechanism on the other side. You can stop here if you don’t want to completely remove the entire mechanism from the back box. You will have great access for cleaning up the rivets etc.
–Optional- Remove the rivet board from the stepper by removing the two screws that hold it to the frame. I like to do this to get the stepper free and to better manipulate it to strip the back side.

Inspect the snowshoes, and rivets

Again, this one wasn’t too bad. I replaced a couple of rivets for the “photo shoot”, but they probably didn’t need it. Here are some horror stories from another machine I recently worked on:

Note the burned out rivets and erosion on the disk. This was fixed by replacing the rivets and filling the grooves with JB Weld. In the second picture, the disk was warped and wouldn’t track properly. The snowshoes were stuck and bent. Ultimately, this part was replaced with a new one.

Remove the Coils, Coil Stops and Plungers

I like to do this regardless. As long as I am back there, I want to at least inspect the coil stops and sleeves. The only way to do that is to take them off. It isn’t too hard:

Remove the coil stops, this will be done by removing either a screw and nut or a socket head screw with an allen head wrench.
Slide the coil off the plunger.
Remove the plunger by either sliding it off the lever or removing the E clip, depending on the design.
Remove the coil sleeve.
Inspect and clean the plunger.
Face off the plunger end if it is mushroomed or excessively peened. You can also just replace the plunger if it is rusty or too far gone.
Replace or clean the coil sleeve (I always just replace it)
Inspect the coil stop. Replace if required.
Clean parts as required. Pay attention to any joints, such is the Bakelight/plunger joint.

6.6.2 Gottlieb® Replay Unit (Credit Unit) Issues

This applies to the step up / step down replay unit, commonly referred to as the credit unit, which uses a metal drum wheel. This does not apply to the "half moon" replay unit used in the mid-70's. Pictures are from 1970s and 1960s Gottlieb® credit units. Construction and function of these two different era units is the same.

Gottlieb® replay unit showing shoulder screw and subtract pawl (mid-70s unit)

A common issue with a Gottlieb® credit unit is the decrement of more than one credit at a time. A properly functioning credit unit should only decrement one credit. This issue is more prevalent with credit units from the mid to late 70's, however, any other like Gottlieb® credit unit applies here. The cause of this issue is typically due to a sticky subtract pawl (A-2484), which is secured by a shoulder screw (A-1058). The shoulder screw is lubricated by the factory, but due to contaminants and age in general, the lubrication becomes gummy. When the step down coil pulses, the subtract pawl will successfully be lifted from the ratcheting gear. However, the pawl will only slowly return to its proper resting position versus quickly springing back. A prime symptom of this issue is when 2 - 15 credits are showing via the credit window. Once the game's start button has been pressed once for a single game, the credit window now shows 0 credits available.

Gottlieb® replay unit with backing nut highlighted (mid-60s unit)

To resolve the issue, the shoulder screw must be removed, cleaned, and lubricated. To remove the screw, the backing nut on the drum side of the unit must be removed. The shoulder screw can now be loosened and removed. Take special care in removing the screw, as the chance of shearing the screw is high. The odds of shearing the screw, while attempting to remove the shoulder screw without loosening the backing nut first, are even higher.

A gunked up Gottlieb® A-1058 shoulder screw which was not allowing a credit unit to step down one step at a time

Gottlieb® shoulder screws (A-1058 & A-1059) commonly used on stepper units.

Once the screw is removed, thoroughly clean it, along with the holes used to secure the subtract pawl and reset lever (A-1279). Use rubbing alcohol as a cleaner, and make certain all of the old lubricant is successfully removed.

Gummy lubricant residue on credit unit frame

The old lubricant will sometimes have to gently be scraped away with a small flat blade screwdriver or similar instrument from the frame of the credit unit. After all of the pieces are cleaned, apply a conservative amount of Teflon gel or similar lubricant to any of the metal-on-metal areas. Assemble the unit. Note that the shoulder screw should not be tightened completely down. If this is done, the unit will function improperly as if the shoulder screw was still gummy. Find an acceptable adjustment for the shoulder screw, and then while steadying the screw with a screwdriver, tighten the backing nut. The credit unit should now decrement only one credit at a time.

6.6.3 Williams Stepper Unit Repairs

This shows a basic rebuild of a Williams Player Unit, This was necessary as someone thought it was a good idea to spray paint the unit blue. In addition to removing the paint from the bakelite boards so that electricity might flow, a rebuild was needed as the levers were gummed up and sticky.
For reference this unit came from a 1973 Jubilee

The basic procedure is as follows

Remove the coils and coil stops.
Remove the switch stack
Remove the center nut on the bakelite board side
Mark the bakelite board in the reset position so that it can be reinstalled in the correct position
Remove the board from the shaft
Mark the gear on the front in the reset position so that you know where to put it back
Remove the gear from the front
Pull the metal stepper unit out of the machine
Disassemble the parts needing to be cleaned
Clean parts, I prefer an ultrasonic cleaner and some sandpaper
Reassemble the unit and reinstall.
Verify coil moves correctly and freely.

Unit Installed and needing to be cleaned	Disc side of unit	This repair references the Player Unit stepper. Someone had spray-painted blue paint all over the unit. Note: It does not work better when blue. In addition the levers and coil sleeves were gummed up and the plungers would not move freely. This facilitated a full rebuild of the stepper unit. First remove the springs, both coils and switch stack. This is a good time to look at the coil sleeves and replace them if necessary. To remove the wiper disc first mark the position of the disc while in reset position and then remove the big nut in the middle. You can then pull the wiper disc off easily from the assembly
Disc Removed	Finger side of disc after cleaning	The rivets were totally covered in paint this required a sanding at the minimum. I used Melamine foam and 92% alcohol to remove the paint. When reassembling use a thin layer of Teflon lube on the rivets to reduce wear and allow the fingers to move freely across the rivets.
Before Teardown Gear Removed	Gear Removed With Spring	Note the winds of the center spring and mark the position of the unit in reset position. Then remove the gear and it should come out freely. The stepper unit pulled out of the machine and ready for disassembly. All that was needed was a screwdriver, 11/32 socket and a wrench.
Gunk On the posts		Here is a closeup of why the lever wouldn’t move freely. Notice the large buildup of old grease on the far post. Remove the levers and spacers and then you should be able to unscrew the posts
Torn down and ready for cleaning	All parts are now clean and ready for reassemble	All the parts laid out and ready to get cleaned First I soaked the parts in Mean Green. I then used an ultrasonic cleaner and sand paper when needed.
Money Shot	Finger side of disc after cleaning	All finished, reassembled and ready for reinstall

6.7 Score Reels

There are many types of score reels. Score reels are essentially 10 unit continuous steppers. In fact, many of the parts catalogs refer to them as such. Each manufacturer has their own individual design. Within each manufacturer, there may be several designs and even variations within each design. For instance, Gottlieb® introduced "rat trap" metal score reels in late 1954 with the multi-player game, Super Jumbo, and in 1959 the first single player game to use them was Miss Annabelle. Starting with Dancing Lady in late 1966, Gottlieb® moved away from the rat trap score reels to a newer, less complex design, plastic 10-sided reel, called a "Decagon" unit. However, the Decagon unit itself has several iterations, with 10-sided reels, round reels, and plastic mechanical parts replacing metal parts. In early 1975, Super Soccer was the first game to use the new style Decagon unit. Gottlieb® did a major redesign of the unit, which was cheaper, and considerably easier to service than prior versions. Even though the unit went through a complete redesign, it was still called a "Decagon" unit.

The point of all this is that there are many designs and iterations of these designs, and you will need to figure out your particular unit for yourself. It is unlikely that every iteration will ever be covered in this guide with a step by step procedure.

Score units generally provide the following functions:

Step once and only once per signal.
Provide a signal used by the startup sequence that the score reel is at zero. The majority of the time the switch is closed at zero, but sometimes it is open. It is best to refer to the game's schematic, or inspect other score reels in the machine if uncertain.
Provide a signal that the score reel did move. This is often a switch that is normally closed call the end of stroke (EOS) switch. Some form of an actuator is attached to the score reel's plunger, which opens the EOS switch each time the plunger is pulled in. This can be a cause of locked on coils, so be certain the EOS opens properly. Some people advocate keeping them permanently open on Gottlieb® Decagon units, however, this is not considered a good practice.
A signal when the unit is at position nine. This is used to "carry over the decade" upon the next advance of the reel. Of course the highest score unit will not (usually) have one of these, since there is no higher score reel to carry the decade over (though there may be an auxiliary "over the top" or other overflow score indicator light on the back glass).
Provide a signal to the high score and match features of a game as to exactly where the score reel is. This is typically done via a circuit board attached to the side of the reel unit, and a wiper on the reel, which rides on the circuit board.

Generally, you will need to do the following to service/rebuild one of these units. At a minimum, clean the circuit board, clean the score reels themselves, and de-gunk the unit so it steps smartly. You can go deeper as required or desired either due to the necessity of the repair, or your level of comfort taking it apart.

Pull the score unit from the game and let it hang.
Remove the retention on the circuit board
Remove the score reel
Clean up any gunked up, sticky moving parts with Mean Green or a similar degreaser
Clean up the score reel with Novus. BE CAREFUL, do not clean the numbers off the wheel.
Degrease the circuit board
Sand the face of the circuit board with 600 grit wet or dry sandpaper, using rubbing alcohol as the lubricant.
Clean any remaining grit or residue on circuit board with rubbing alcohol
Apply a Teflon based lubricant to the circuit board, like Superlube or a similar product.
Clean all the contact points.
Re-assemble and verify the unit steps correctly and the contacts open and close correctly

6.7.1 Gottlieb® Decagon (Early Design) Score Reel Overhaul

A Youtube Video of the process on a Gottlieb® Decagon is here:

Teardown – (Note, I have since found out that it is a lot easier to do this if you de-solder the coils): http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XVdUp5kVkjk

Cleanup http://www.youtube.com/user/newmantjn#p/u/13/QZVRilwjZZQ

Rebuild http://www.youtube.com/user/newmantjn#p/u/14/IMvvJCtBJc0

Epilogue - Fixing a problem: http://www.youtube.com/user/newmantjn#p/u/5/zQUHiT7BJB8

6.7.2 Gottlieb® Rat Trap Score Reel Overhaul

Background

The Iconic Rat Trap Score Reel. Where engineering and art intersect.

According to the IPDB, the first appearance of a Rat Trap metal score reel was on the four player "Super Jumbo" game in 1954. It is probably not pure coincidence that this was also Gottlieb's® first 4 player game. Gottlieb® had made a few 2 player games with lightbox scoring, but no four player games. It is likely that the Rat Trap reel was developed to allow for four player games, as the real estate required for lightbox scoring on a four player game would have been excessive. The single player games didn't catch up until 1959 with Miss Annabelle.

The mechanism itself is fairly robust and a beautiful piece of engineering. It suffers from having a lot of parts, which probably meant that it was a little expensive to produce and difficult to assemble. Additionally, there were some adjustments within the mechanism that needed to be made, which always adds to assembly cost. The score reels themselves are gorgeous and feature black letters on a white reel, with a distinctive, yet familiar font. The Wedgeheads of the 1960's that had these score reels just ooze nostalgia and class in a way that can never be approached with a DMD display. The drawbacks, most likely the cost of the unit, lead to its eventual replacement in 1966 with the "Decagon" unit. Subway was the last game to use this classic score reel.

A very nice video explanation of Rat Trap Score Reel disassembly, cleaning, and reassemlby has been put together by Kim Oswald (The Goat Shed, AUS). The video can be found here.

As you read the following procedure, please note a few things.

Only do what you are comfortable doing. 9 times out of 10, you will only need to clean up the circuit board, file the points and inspect the coil stops and sleeves.
Many of these procedures would apply nicely to a Decagon, Bally or Williams score reel. It's all the same – Take it apart, clean it, lube the circuit board, replace broken parts.
Take more pictures than you will need. You still will not have enough.
The letter/number combinations ( i.e. A-3131) are part numbers straight out of the 1962 parts list. The names are generally correct per the parts list as well (although "Rat Trap" is a term of endearment, not an official Gottlieb® name).

An exploded view of a Gottlieb score reel can be found on the "Spring Kits" page of The Pinball Resource's web page here: http://www.pbresource.com/springkit.html . Scroll down to the "Score Unit" spring kit section and click on the diagram for an enlarged view.

Teardown:

Remove the score reel assembly from the backbox. This is done by removing the two hairpin style cotter pins. It is OK to let the score reel assembly dangle
Next, remove the three screws holding the score reel on. Note that the score reel and the grounding wheel beneath incorporate a "poka-yoke" design. Poka-yoke is Japanese for "idiot proof", but here in the States we can come up with some pretty good idiots, so you may want to mark the score reel for orientation as well. The Poka-yoke feature on the score reel is that one of the plastic buttons is larger than the other three, so in theory it can only go together one way. The top button in the picture is the largest of the three. It can be jammed together if you are not careful, so be sure to familiarize yourself with this feature, or mark it (or both).
Next remove the score reel and the grounding wiper beneath it. Note in the picture of the grounding wheel that the top hole is much larger.

Score Reel Disassembly
Score Reel Removal
Remove these screws. Note larger hole assembly feature
Poka-Yoke assembly feature on the ground wheel

Stop here. Ask yourself: "Do I need to take this apart further?" Or "Can I get away with just cleaning up the circuit board and maybe replacing the coil stop or coil sleeve?" This is your machine, so do whatever you are comfortable with. The directions that follow will get you through a complete overhaul. This allows for inspection and cleaning of all parts. It also may result in lost parts and misassembly.

Remove the E clip that retains the cam and ratchet hub assembly. E clips are known to go flying, often resulting in cuss words and trips to the hardware store. Ease the E clip out and keep your finger over it.
Remove the bottom two screws from the circuit board. Slide it out from the retaining post on top.
Desolder the lead from the circuit board. While it is possible to work around this 10 second job, you will spend an extra half hour trying to reach things that you can't reach without a tweezers. You will also spend an extra hour hunting the pieces that go flying and two hours on diagnosing the poor switch cleaning and misassembly that will inevitably result in not having adequate access to the parts. Spend the 10 minutes desoldering and soldering. It is time well spent.
Swing the circuit board out of the way and there you have it! Access to a mechanical engineering marvel. Take a moment to enjoy that.

Score Reel Dissamebly - Removing the Circuit Board
Remove the E clip that retains the Cam and Ratchet Hub Assembly. Note how dirty the grease is on this circuit board
Remove the bottom two screws.
Desolder the wire to enable the board to swing out of the way.
Swing Board out of the way

Next, remove the coil stop, coil, plunger, insulating fish paper and coil sleeve. Unscrew the two screws holding the coil stop on and remove the coil stop. Slide out the coil and lift the plunger off the pin on the Step Up Pawl. Note any worn parts for replacement. Set aside the plunger, coil stop assembly, and coil sleeve for cleaning, unless any of these parts will be replaced.
Remove the Cam and Ratchet hub from the score reel assembly. You may need to rotate this while pulling it up. You may also need to move some of the spring loaded parts out of the way with a small screwdriver. (no picture)
Remove the E clip that holds Step Up Pawl A-3131 on. Remove the step up pawl and spring. Set aside for cleaning and/or replacement. (they should not need replacement) You can further disassemble this part to facilitate cleaning and drying if desired.
Remove the E clip retaining the A-5177 Drive Index Pawl Assembly on. Remove the spring and finally, the pawl.

Score Reel Dissamebly - Removing Rotating and Actuating Parts
Used parts from the coil assembly. From L to R - Plunger, Fishpaper, Coil Stop and Bracket, Coil Sleeve
Step Up Pawl removed
Ratchet and Pawl Removal

At this point, your Rat Trap score reel is completely disassembled and ready for clean up. It should look like this.

Rat Trap Score Reel Assembly, Fully Stripped

Cleaning and Refurbishing the Parts

Circuit Board

The circuit board will almost always need to be cleaned up. It will likely have a coating of old, dry, sticky grease on it. This coating causes sluggish score reel response, in turn preventing the machine from scoring correctly or maybe preventing it from resetting properly, resulting in the dreaded "score motor just runs" syndrome.
Clean/degrease the circuit board with synthetic steel wool (a "scrubbie") and Mean Green. DO NOT use real steel wool. I prefer to clean up the circuit board in two steps. A general degreasing and a contact cleaning using Mean Green and a scrubbie followed by sandpaper with alcohol. This two step process will save you sandpaper and yield better results than a clean up with sandpaper alone – but it is your machine, if you want to skip the Mean Green step, feel free. After the intitial clean up, it should look pretty good, but we can do better.
Next use alcohol and 600 grit wet or dry sandpaper to resurface the copper circuit board surface. You can use rubbing alcohol or denatured alcohol.
Finally, coat the circuit board with a very light coating of Teflon grease. Very light.
Lightly touch up the point on the Grounding Wheel.

Score Reel Cleanup - The Circuit Board
Initial Cleaning Done with Synthetic Steel Wool and Mean Green
Circuit Board After Mean Grean Degreasing
Sand with 600 Wet or Dry and Alcohol
Circuit Board After Light Sanding
Use Superlube or a Similar Dielectric Grease - Use Sparingly

Rotating and Actuating Parts

Take all the parts you set aside, including the ratchet parts, springs etc. and douse them with Mean Green.
Run a bottle brush through the holes if they are dirty.
Chuck everything into an ultrasonic cleaner if you have one. Scrub the parts with a toothbrush if you don't have a cleaner. Be CAREFUL! Don't lose those small parts!
Pull all the parts out and blow off with compressed air. You might want to put the smaller parts in a sock for this step so you don't blow them across the floor.

Cleaning Rotating and Actuating Parts
Hose the parts down with Mean Green
Clean out the Holes with a Bottle Brush
Parts in the Harbor Freight Ultrasonic Cleaner

Score Reel

Clean the number surface with Novus 2 and a VERY gentle hand. Don't clean off the numbers. (Test on an inconspicuous part of a number if you can find one - some score reels will lose ink if you look at them funny with cleaner in your hand.)
Coat the number surface with a coat of pure carnauba wax. Wipe off when dry.
Clean the inside surface with Novus or Mean Green (or leave it alone if you don't mind the dirt).

Score Reel Cleaning
Cleaning Supplies Used for Score Reels
Clean the Number Surface with Novus 2
Clean the Inside with Novus or a Rag Moistened with Mean Green

Coil/Coil stop/Coil Sleeve/Plunger

The coil stop and coil sleeve are often borderline for replacement. Generally, I figure that if they show any wear, they get replaced. The plunger itself is usually OK, or maybe could stand to have the end that hits the coil stop re-faced with a grinder. The coil is generally either perfectly fine, or completely failed. This score reel got a new coil stop and coil sleeve. Both of these parts were marginal, but once it is apart, you may as well replace marginal parts.
Replace the coil stop by holding it tightly in a vise and unscrewing the nut. Install the new one the same way.
Slip the new coil sleeve into the coil.

Coil Stop and Associated Parts
Replacement Parts for the Coil and Plunger
Replacing the Coil Stop

Switches

Tighten all switch stacks.
Clean all switches with a flex stone, small file or folded 400 grit sandpaper. Blow out, or better yet, run a piece of paper through the switches to get rid of any grit left in the switch.

Switches
Cleaning the Switches with Flexstone
Some Score Reels Have More Switches than Others

Reassembly

Install the Step Up Pawl A-3131, spring and E clip. I find it easier to hook both ends of the spring on and drop the assembly over the post. Take care not to overstretch the spring if you do it this way.
Install the A-5177 Drive Index Pawl Assembly, spring and E clip. You will likely need a dental pick, or needle nose pliers to install the spring.
Install the Cam and Ratchet Hub. This is trickier than it looks. I will get hung up on the spring loaded parts you just installed. Rotate it, use a small screwdriver to move the parts out of the way and gently push on it while rotating to get it to "drop" a level at a time. The first time you do it, you will have to keep looking to see what it is hung up on, but soon you will be a pro at it.
Reinstall the E clip that holds the Cam and Ratchet hub on
Drop the plunder in over the post on the Step Up Pawl.
Slip the coil with the new sleeve into the plunger.
Put the fishpaper insulator over the coil stop assembly and install both pieces onto the score reel frame. Don't forget the insulator. This can result in additional swearing.

Assembling the Rotating and Actuating Parts
Install the Step Up Pawl, Sring and E clip
Install the Drive Index Pawl Assembly, spring and E clip
Install the Cam and Ratchet Hub
Assemble the Plunger and Coil

Slip the circuit board onto the post and install the two screws/nuts that retain it. There is some slop in the holes, so center the circuit board hole on the Cam and Ratchet hub.
Solder the wire lead back on.
Hold the Grounding Wheel in place, being mindful of the proper orientation – the large hold and possibly the mark you put on it.
Put the numbered score reel in place, again being mindful of the orientation.
Put the spider washer, A-6362 over the score reel in any orientation.
Install the three self tapping screws to retain the score reel.
Put the score reel back in the backbox and retain it with the two cotter pins.

Finishing up the Assembly
Install the Circuit Board
Install the Grounding Wheel. In This Picture the Large Hole is Down
Install the Score Reel, Spider and Screws

6.7.3 Williams 5" Metal Reels

Overview:

The Williams 5" metal scoring reels are very similar in design to the Gottlieb "Rat Trap" style reels.

WMS Metal Score Reels
WMS 0-9 reel with the actual reel removed
The inner workings and switches of the reel
WMS 5" metal reel. Note the hole placement on the hub when reassembling. The holes circled in red are for the screws. The other holes are used for indexing on the hub.

6.7.4 Chicago Coin Machine (CCM) 3" Score Reels

Overview:

CCM Score reels are different than many of the major manufacturers. Instead of having a switch for the decade rollover, the connections are performed by the wiper fingers on the circuit board. The switches are only for EOS on this unit.
For reference the following pictures are from a 1974 Hi Flyer.

CCM Score Reels
CCM Score Reel Player 1. 1000s . This is in 0 Position
CCM Circuit Board and Fingers in 0 position

6.7.5 Score Reel Related Reset Problems

For EM score reels to reset properly, two things must happen.

The score motor must run to pulse the score reels until ALL off the reels have reached the zero position.
Each reel must advance until it reaches zero and then stop advancing.

The different manufacturers had slightly different ways of implementing these functions.

1970s Gottlieb with PLAYER UNIT (e.g. Spirit of '76)

Z1 relay assembly noting that the top NC switch is located above / outside of the switch stack armature

Each score reel reset (zero position) switch must close when its score reel is at zero. The reset switches are all connected in series and will advance the PLAYER UNIT when they are all zero. The Z1 & Z2 relays open alternately to reset players 1 & 2 separately from players 3 & 4.
Each score reel RUNOUT switch must open when its score reel is at zero. Pulses from SCORE MOTOR switch 1A advance the score reel until the reel is at zero and the RUNOUT switch opens. The Z1 relay enables players 1 & 2 for reset. The Z2 relay enables players 3 & 4 for reset.

Each NO switch on the Z1 and Z2 relays controls a score reel. The single NC switch located outside of the switch stack armature is used to advance the player unit. If one of the score reels does not properly reset, the Z1 or Z2 relay specific to that reel will not disengage. Hence, the NC switch does not become closed, and the player unit will not advance any further. The NO switches on the Z1 and Z2 relays are rarely an issue, however, the single external NC switch can become adjusted incorrectly and / or fouled.

1970s Williams (e.g. OXO) and 1970s Bally (e.g. Wizard!)

The DRUM UNIT ZERO switches are all wired in parallel. They are in the lock-in circuit for the RESET relay. All DRUM UNIT ZERO switches must open for the RESET relay to release, which stops the reset sequence.
A second DRUM UNIT ZERO switch opens when its score reel is at zero. Pulses from the #1 or #2 SCORE RESET relay advance the score reel until the reel is at zero and the DRUM UNIT ZERO switch opens. The #1 and #2 SCORE RESET relays are energized by score motor switches whenever the RESET relay is energized.

There are several problems that can occur during score reel reset. Since there are many switches involved in the score reel reset, especially on four-player games, it is a common cause of reset problems. It is important to note that the zero position switches, when out of adjustment, can indicate zero when the score reel is not on zero and visa-versa. Three common problems are described in the following sections.

If a single reel doesn't reset properly, the first thing to check is its RUNOUT switch. If it is stuck open the score reel won't advance for reset. If it is stuck closed, the score reel will keep advancing past zero.
If the reels all advance to zero and the the score motor keeps running (that is, reset doesn't complete becuase the PLAYER UNIT didn't advance (Gottlieb) or the RESET relay didn't release (Williams/Bally)), there is likely a zero postion switch stuck open (Gottlieb) or closed (Williams/Bally).
The last problem is tricky to diagnose. If a score reel zero position switch is stuck, the reset sequence can terminate prematurely, leaving some of the reels partially reset. This will show up on score reels that have low, non-zero scores. Since they need the most pulses to reset (e.g. 9 pulses for a '1') they may only get to 8 or 9 before the reset stops. Setting some score reels to '1' before starting a reset can help to isolate the problem, but it may be a problem with any of the zero postion switches.

6.8 Drop Targets

Complete Teardown and Rebuild of a Gottlieb® Drop Target Bank

This procedure was developed a few years ago while working on a Volley. The Volley has three, 5 target banks. Sometime after rebuilding the first one, I decided that there must be a better way. No way would David Gottlieb® have put up with dental picks and the like on his assembly line. So my goal was to develop a procedure that would require only fingers, or maybe a little "help" from a screwdriver. Note that this is for a complete overhaul. You might have to adapt if you just want to change a target or two. Generally, I like completely overhauling something and not worrying about it again, ever.

One other thing to note is that Gottlieb® made three or four variations on this target bank. Some have series bars, some don't. Some have bent reset bars, some are straight etc. If you generally follow these directions and take a lot of pictures, you will be fine.

One thing I have discovered over time is that a common mistake is to spend a lot of time trying to save a little time. This comes up in auto repair a lot. People will try real hard to not pull off a part which is held on by 4 bolts. So, in order to save the 3 minutes of time removing the 4 bolts, they will add an hour to the repair time trying to work around the part they should just have removed. The procedure really takes everything apart. It took about 45 minutes to completely disassemble the bank, clean every part and re-assemble. By contrast, the when I did a Big Brave bank a few years prior to this, it took me hours to get it done, since I tried to not take it apart all the way.

One more thing – you can leave some of the sub assemblies together if you don't plan on running the parts through a cleaner. For instance, you could leave the brackets attached to the back of the target bank. It's your machine, you decide how far you want to take it down.

Finally, if you are more of a "watch and learn" type person, as opposed to a "read and learn", I've posted a Youtube video of the rebuild on a Target Alpha drop target bank here: [1], and a written guide of a 10-target assembly here

Drop Target Bank Rebuild Procedure:

Remove Drop Target Bank from game

Playfield in Full Service Position

Put the playfield up in the full service position, with the playfield resting against the backbox. Use a towel to protect the playfield and backbox.
Unscrew all the switch stacks one by one. Wrap each switch stack in low tack masking tape or thread a 5-40 nut onto each screw to hold the switch stack together.
Undo the coil from the target bank. Don't let it just hang by the wires, tie it up with a piece of wire, string, tie wrap or old rubber ring.
Remove the screws that hold the target bank to the bottom of the playfield and pull out the target bank.

Teardown – NOTE take more pictures than you will ever need. You will still not have enough.

Rebuilt bank on the left, dirty bank on the right. Note, I helped myself out a little here, in that this was the third bank I did (so I had practice) and I had an exact target bank to reference. Not even a mirror image, which can make you stop and think for a bit.

Two Target Banks

Target Bank Ready for Teardown

The bank was completely off, some of the mounting brackets were loose from pulling it from the machine. The "front" and "back" of the target bank assume the bank is situated as shown, with the targets furthest from you. The side closest to you is the "front" and the side furthest away from you (closest to the targets) is the "back".

Drop Target Bank Teardown Procedure:

Remove the E clips on both sides of the rod
Remove the two plastic bushings that guide the rod
Remove the mounting bracket for the coil and rod
Remove the mounting bracket for the other end of the rod Note, you may need to slide the rod back and forth ¼ to ½ inch to accomplish this.
Remove the trigger arm return spring.
Remove the rod that runs through all the triggers.
Remove the front of the target bank.

At this point, you will have a sub-assembly like the one shown below. It should be fairly obvious that it is easy to pull off and reattach all those springs on the drop targets and triggers with the sub assembly as shown. One word of caution: Do not mix up the springs. The lighter weight springs attach to the plastic target. If you mix them up, the drop targets won't drop.

Target Bank Major Subassembly

Remove all the springs from the drop targets and triggers.
Pull out the drop targets.
Disassemble the rest of the steel box (if desired for cleaning)

I feel that mechanical mechanisms work best when they are clean. They were not designed to work with a layer of grunge, oil and dirt on them, so I like to clean them up prior to re-assembly. If it is your first shot at this, you might want to minimize some of the disassembly and cleaning in favor of making sure you can get it back together. That said, I like to clean the face of the drop targets with Novus, then put a generous layer of carnauba wax over the hot stamped face for protection. Next, scrub out the nooks and crannies in all the parts with Mean Green and a toothbrush. Then, into the ultrasonic cleaner, if you have one, otherwise rinse off and blow the parts dry with compressed air. BE CAREFUL not to blow you parts all over the garage. You can put the little parts in an old sock or something when you blow them off. Wipe off the wax when dry. For the very small parts, like screws, you are probably better off not washing them at all, unless you have a lot of spare parts around.

Drop Target Cleaning
Target Bank Completely Disassembled
Target Bank in Ultrasonic Cleaner
Target Bank Clean, Dry and Ready to Assemble

Target Bank Assembly Procedure:

Attach the "heavy" springs to the bottom plate.
Attach the "back" (the side closest to the targets) to the top and bottom. Be careful and consult your pictures as it is easy to put the top on upside down, or mix up the top and the bottom. This is why you may be better off leaving these three sides of the steel box in place the first time you do this. ATTACH ALL THE SCREWS LOOSELY.
Drop the targets in through the holes. No, you can't put the springs on first, they won't fit through the holes.

Drop in the targets and attach the springs to the targets.

Stick the triggers in through the targets. Make sure you have them right side up.
Attach the springs from the bottom plate to the trigger.
Attach the springs from the target to the trigger.

Attaching Springs
Triggers in Place, all Spring Attached
Another View

Note: You can do the prior two steps in either order. You shouldn't need any tools to do it, but a needle nose pliers, a hemostat or even a small screwdriver may help you if you have sausage sized fingers. Once this sub assembly is together, the springs will hold the triggers in place.

Feed in the reset arm. Make sure you have it oriented correctly. Notes: You cannot feed it in after you attach the back plate. Also, on a very long bank, you may need to feed it in prior to attaching the springs from the bottom plate to the triggers. Take care on how you position the reset arm - make sure it is on the correct side of the stop screws in the bottom plate. With this method of assembly, it is fairly obvious though.
Attach the front plate. You may have to move the triggers around a little to get them to go though the proper slots in the front plate. This is fairly easy though.

Assembling the Reset Arm and Front Plate
Feed In Reset Arm
Another View
Front Plate Attached

If there is a series arm, now is a good time to feed that in from one side or the other.
Now, feed in the arm through the guides in the front plate and all the triggers, the reset arm and the series arm. Leave the E clips off of both sides of the rod for now. You may have to wiggle the trigger arms a bit to get the rod to feed through.
Install the reset arm return spring.
Install rod support on one end of the assembly and the coil bracket/rod support on the other end. Install the plastic bushings on the end of the rods.
Tighten up all the loose screws.
NOW – finally- install those E clips!

Completed Drop Target Unit

Put the entire assembly back into the game. Clean up the backside of the switches that the trigger arms actuate when the targets drop. Gunk on those is a major reason what targets only go down half way. I like alcohol for this. Verify that all targets score. Verify that when all targets are down, the series bar pulls away from the NO switch (if you have one) and the switch scores.<br.

Sit back, have a beer or other tasty cold beverage, and congratulate yourself on a job well done, secure in the knowledge that you will not have to do it again for 20 years.

6.9 Pop Bumpers

6.9.1 Refurbishment

Over time, pop bumpers will need to be removed. If removal is necessary, rebuilding / refurbishing the pop bumper is recommended. Below are several reasons why removal of a pop bumper assembly is necessary.

The coil has melted from locking on and shorting its windings. Or, possibly the assembly has been gunked up by some unknowing technician, who kept spraying the assembly to lubricate it. The assembly has become covered with years of built up gunk from the use of this unnecessary lubricant. The pop bumper now needs to be overhauled. Even though Williams recommends in their EM operational manuals to lubricate the coil plungers with graphite, pop bumpers should really never be lubricated.
Another reason is due to the pop bumper body becoming broken or cracked. Pop bumper bodies are made of plastic, and deteriorate over time. In most instances, a cracked or broken pop bumper body does not impede the proper function of a pop bumper, but they can look unsightly.
The final reason is related to appearance, but preservation comes into play. On the top side of the playfield, most pop bumpers have a Mylar shield or "free-floating" platter, which gets worn and looks ugly. If dirt and / or grit are present underneath the platter, (this is extremely common), the platter starts to act like sandpaper. The end result is that the platter wears away the clearcoat and paint versus protecting the playfield like it was intended to do. The only resolution is removal and / or replacement of this platter.

Gottlieb®, and in the case of this narrative, Chicago Coin use "free-floating" Mylar platters. Some manufacturers such as Williams and Bally use self-adhering Mylar rings around the perimeter of the pop bumper skirt. The self-adhering style of protection may only need replacement if the Mylar ring is losing adhesion, and starting to lift away from the playfield.

For this narrative, refurbishing a pop bumper from a 1966 Chicago Coin Kicker machine will be discussed. Nearly all pop bumpers are constructed the same, so this rebuild will apply to many machines. Several solid state machines are similar, and equally apply.

Our target	This is the pop bumper that we will be restoring. As you can see the platter next to the playfield is well worn. This pop bumpers brother to the right will also need to be updated eventually.
Remove cap	The first step in working on the bumper is to remove the pop bumper cap. This is a game manufacturer / game era dependent step. In this case, we have two screws that need to be removed to access the interior. For Gottlieb® games, starting with Surf Side in 1967, gently compress the sides of the cap at 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock. In doing this, the tabs which hold the cap in place come free, and removal of the cap from the pop bumper body can be done.
Remove pop bumper bulb	Once we have gained access to the internals, remove the bulb from the lamp socket, and set it aside. A good tip is to place related parts from a section into an old peanut can or similar container to keep them together. At this point, do not remove the screws which secure the pop bumper body to the playfield. Instead, turn the playfield over to access the pop bumper "guts" on the underside. Removing the playfield from the cabinet and placing it horizontally can make it much easier to work on. However, take special precautions not to crack or break plastics and other assemblies which are elevated higher than the playfield rails. The playfield should not be resting on these types of assemblies if it is turned over. Otherwise, these assemblies can and probably will break.
Pop Bumper Under playfield	Here is a look at the underside of the playfield with the pop bumper with parts identified (click on image to enlarge).
Remove mounting bracket	Remove the mounting bracket for the bumper. This is done by removing the two screws which hold the pop bumper plunger and yoke assembly to the mounting bracket. Next, remove the four screws which hold the mounting bracket to the playfield. In the case of this unit, removal of the pop bumper coil stop at the top is not necessary. On this game, one of the coil stop mounting screws has been removed, and not replaced. Probably by someone who removed it, and did not place it in a peanut can to keep the parts together, but I digress. It is worth mentioning that most other manufacturers employ a pop bumper coil stop which is integral to the pop bumper mounting bracket, and not removable. Chicago Coin, "classic" Stern, Data East, Sega, and "new" Stern are the exceptions.
Remove rod and ring	Now remove the rod and ring by choosing an appropriate socket and unscrewing the nut cap from the rods. A 5/16" nutdriver is typically used.
Pop bumper bracket with plunger, yokes, and spring removed	Once the rods are removed, the plunger assembly can be lifted from the rods. Take note how it is assembled to restore the assembly to its original configuration.
Unsolder the lamp socket leads	Unsolder the lamp socket from the wires which feed it power.
Remove screws from pop bumper body	The playfield now has to be turned over again. Remove the two screws inside the pop bumper body which secure it to the playfield, and safely put them aside. Always take care not to lose any parts.
Removed bumper	The remaining portion of the pop bumper assembly on the top side of the playfield can now be removed. Just look at that mess around the Mylar protector. Once the body has been removed, and at some point prior to reinstalling it, clean the pop bumper spoon switch with rag or towel dipped in rubbing alcohol. The spoon switch collects dirt, especially if any lubricants have been applied to it.
Remove unwanted solder	Removal of the excess remaining solder from the lamp socket leads is necessary, if the lamp socket is to be reused. The leads will need to be clean to fit through the holes in the pop bumper base and body. If the lamp socket is not going to be reused, clip the socket leads just above the location where they were soldered. Please note that the yellow piece on the tip of the skirt finger is not typically used with manufacturers other than this era of Chicago Coin. It is also worth mentioning that Bally used metal skirt assemblies for a period during the mid-1960's.
Pop Bumper Shield	This is not a playfield restoration narrative to be sure. However, clean the area thoroughly under the old platter. After a good cleaning place down a new shield. A new platter can be purchased from the various pinball parts suppliers.
Shields new and old	These shields come in two flavors, self-adhering and free-floating. The recommended version is self-adhering, because once it is applied to the playfield surface, dirt and grime cannot get under it. The free-floating platters can be subject to the same wear as the originals, if not kept constantly clean. Ultimately, it is all a matter of personal preference which style to use. It may be necessary to cut the new replacement platter to fit. Use the removed platter as a guide for cutting the new replacement.
Pop Bumper Anatomy	Now, it's time to clean all of the pop bumper parts. This includes the skirt, base, and body. Note how all of the pieces go together to reassemble. The base is press fit into the pop bumper body and can be difficult to remove. Take your time and gently pry the pieces apart with a small screw driver, if required. Inside the base is a small spring which allows the skirt to retract to its centered, "home" position, after a pinball comes in contact with it. Take extra care with any plastic pieces which are hot ink stamped. Even the most gentle cleaners like soap and water can possibly remove the ink. Test a cleaning agent on a very, very small portion of an inked area first, before cleaning the whole inked area. The best way to clean the plastic parts is with a mild liquid soap and and warm water in the sink. On old toothbrush can be used to clean particularly dirty or hard to reach areas. Another method is to place the parts in the dishwasher. If using a dishwasher, do not put it on a heat dry cycle. Do not put plastics which are hot ink stamped in the dishwasher! Clean the rod and rings with chrome polish from any auto parts store to make them shine again. Replacement parts can be purchased from most of the recommended pinball parts suppliers.
Reassemble the top portion of the pop bumper body	Reassembly is essentially the reversal of removal. First, assemble the pop bumper body and associated parts which are located on the top of the playfield. The order in which the parts go together is the pop bumper body, the rod and ring, the skirt, the small skirt spring, and then the base. Next, insert the lamp socket leads into the top side of the pop bumper body. Make certain to use the two openings in the body, which are not intended for securing the body to the playfield. Please note that some of the pop bumper skirts will have a small pointed tip on them. This pointed tip should point to the top of the playfield when installed. Our example does not have this little skirt tip. Next, place the pop bumper body onto the playfield, and using the two screws, secure the body to the playfield. Once the pop bumper body is secured, turn the playfield over to expose the underside again.
Pop Bumper Sleeves	You will notice there is a sleeve inside of the solenoid, and the plunger moves back and forth inside of it. This is commonly referred to as a coil sleeve. It is recommended to replace this sleeve, again available from most any of the recommended pinball parts suppliers. In this example, the original brass metal sleeve is on the right, and a new nylon replacement is on the left. Each style of sleeve has a small flange on one side. When installing a new sleeve in a solenoid, make certain the flanged side is facing towards the coil stop, and away from the pop bumper spring. Some manufacturers did not use replaceable coil sleeves prior to the 1960's. In these cases, the coil sleeve is actually an integral part of the coil's windings. If the coil sleeve is brass, and there appears to be great difficulty in trying to remove it, don't remove it. Just clean it as best as possible. If the sleeve is worn through, replacement of the coil is the only solution.
Reassemble the plunger	Next, solder the lamp socket leads to the wires which feed power to the lamp. Then, place the plunger yokes over the rods, and secure the nuts to the rods. Do not over tighten these; Hercules need not apply here. Make them snug and secure. Along each step of the way, make sure the rod and ring moves freely, and that the skirt acts as if it is floating on the base. If things are not moving freely or feel restricted, go back and double check your work. See how that plunger is shining in the picture, it was cleaned and polished too.
Remount the bracket	Now it is time to remount the bracket. Secure the plunger bracket to the mount with the two screws. These two screws will typically have captive lock washers on them. Next, place the solenoid over the plunger. Pay special attention to the orientation of the solenoid lugs. Make certain the solenoid wires are facing the proper direction. Otherwise, they may get in the way when the pop bumper activates. Finally, secure the bracket to the underside of the playfield with the 4 screws.
Inspect the switches	Now it is time to inspect the switches. The switch stack was not removed, so adjusting may not be needed. However, due to age and general wear, it may need some adjustment. Equally, contacts which are slightly pitted should be burnished. It is a good practice to make certain that the skirt finger is centered within the spoon switch. Gently push on the center of the backside of the spoon switch. If the skirt finger moves at all, adjustment is necessary. Loosen the screws that mount the stack to the playfield, and adjust accordingly. Once the spoon switch is properly adjusted, push down on the skirt from the top side of the playfield. Push down at all points where a pinball can roll onto the skirt. Doing this will ensure the spoon switch contacts properly make at all possible positions.
Manually actuating the solenoid plunger	Manually actuate the solenoid plunger with you finger by pushing down on the edge of the yoke. If this case, make certain the normally closed EOS switch opens when the plunger is pulled in. In other cases, the switch activated by the yoke may be normally open. Everything should be moving freely with no binds. Check the rod and ring too for any bindings.
Pop Bumper Rebuilt	All done, she's lookin' 'more better'.

6.9.2 Lamp Sockets

Improving performance of pop bumper lamp sockets. Squeeze the socket slightly...but not too tight!

Pop bumper sockets used by almost all manufacturers are almost always problematic. A pop bumper lamp has a tough life. The vibration environment inside the pop bumper body is pretty severe. The lamp filament is subject to a lot of abuse. Better electrical connection and (somewhat) reduced vibration can be achieved by gently and gradually squeezing the lamp socket with a sturdy pair of needle-nose pliers. You want to squeeze the socket together just enough so that the lamp fits snugly. Using a "lamp cleaning stick" to burnish the socket base also helps. Even if you decide to use a 6.3V AC powered LED in the pop bumper, improving the electrical connection will help.

6.10 Score Motors

6.10.1 Gottlieb® Score Motor

6.10.1.1 Gottlieb® Score Motor runs too fast (aka Super Fast scoring)

Bottom view of a Gottlieb 50Hz (European) motor, part number B-11550.

Gottlieb® score motors for US domestic games are part number B-7760, and run on 60Hz AC power.
Gottlieb® score motors for European games are part number B-11550, and run on the European standard 50Hz AC power.
The score motor on games re-imported from Europe to the US will 20% faster since the European motor was designed to run on 50Hz but is being driven by 60Hz power.

Some machines can stand this increased speed. Most of the problems occur with functions that are pulsed 5 times per 1/3 motor revolution, such as 5/50/500 points or bonus countdown. The hardware must be in perfect working order or it may skip scoring pulses since it is being run faster than it was designed for.

There is really only one remedy and that is to source a US or European motor as applicable to your game/location.

Installing a 120 to 100 step down transformer, reducing the voltage 20% won't help since it's the frequency of the AC power that needs to be matched. A European 50Hz motor, powered by 100VAC, 60Hz, will still run fast, but the rest of the game might seem sluggish, the same as it would be if a "low tap" were available.

6.10.1.2 Gottlieb® Score Motor will Not Stop Running: Frequent Cause

Besides investigating Motor Switch 1C (as above), a frequent cause of a score motor that will not stop running is located in the score reels (when equipped). Each score reel has a ZERO POSITION switch, and EVERY switch must be open for the game to complete its startup routine. If the switch is maladjusted or bent closed, the score motor will run on and not stop. The score reels may continue to cycle the reel with the bad switch, so that could be a clue as to where to investigate first. The wiring of the switch should also be inspected, since even if the switch operates correctly, the reel will not complete the circuit to the score motor. There may be other causes for a score motor that will not stop rotating, but the zero position switch is very common and deserves a special mention.

6.10.1.3 Servicing and Lubrication of the Gottlieb® Score Motor

Bottom view of a GTB score motor. Use a few drops of 3-in-1 Oil in the indicated hole. Do NOT lubricate the brass gears

The score motor should have two kinds of lubrication when being serviced. A thin smear of a gel type grease like TEFLON GEL or similar should go on the edge of the top and bottom cams, and the studs which protrude from each. Excess lube that can get on the switch contacts must be avoided. In NO case, should you lube or oil the brass gears, and if someone has done so, remove the substance with a degreaser. The score motor itself takes a few drops of light oil like 3-in-1 oil, through a small hole in the base on the underside. To access the oil well of the score motor, most units were hinged, and held in place by a single hairpin opposite the hinged side. Pull the hairpin out with some needle nose pliers, and the motor can now be pivoted upward. Make sure to replace the clip when done. Pivoting the unit upward is also helpful when trying to view or adjust motor switches located in levels A or B.

Unfortunately, Gottlieb® score motor units from the 1950's and early 1960's were physically screwed to the wood "motor board" from the underside of the board. To access the motor's oil well, the large wood "motor board" has to be removed, turned on its side or upside down, and the screws holding the score motor assembly must be removed. When removing the wood motor board, take precautions not to twist on contort wiring harnesses.

6.10.2 Williams Score Motor

stub

6.10.3 Bally Score Motor

stub

6.10.4 Chicago Coin Score Motor

stub

6.10.5 General: Score Motor Keeps Running

A common problem in EM games is the continuous running of the score motor. The score motor controls the relay logic whenever a sequence of events is required, for example, during reset or when a target score requires multiple steps of a score reel. Score motor problems can be difficult to isolate because there are usually many different functions in the machine that run the score motor.

It’s important to note that the score motor running is a symptom of the problem and it’s unlikely that the actual problem is the score motor or a switch on the score motor. To find the relay switches that enable the score motor, find the score motor on the schematics and trace the wire. You’ll find a group of relay switches in parallel, each of which can energize the score motor. Normally, those relays should not be energized, so a first check is to see if any are energized. It’s also possible that a switch is bent and stuck closed. Sliding a strip of business card between the switch contacts is a good way to make sure the switch is open. Also check the switch solder tabs to make sure they didn’t get bent and shorted together.

If the score motor starts running when you power-on the game, a common problem is stuck coin switches on the coin door.

If the score motor continues to run after you start a new game, then the machine has not properly completed it’s reset sequence. Problems here are often in the score reel zero position switches or the bonus unit zero position switch. There are often multiple switches that indicate the zero position, so even though the mechanism appears to have reset correctly, the switch used to indicate completion (zero-position) to the reset circuitry may be malfunctioning.

6.11 Kickers/Slingshots

Typical EM game "kicker" or "slingshot". This one is from a Gottlieb Hot Shot.

EM game design often included triangular "slingshots" near the bottom of the playfield. Operation of slingshots is pretty simple. As pictured left, most slings have 2 standup switch pairs. When the ball impacts the rubber ring, one or both of these switches will close, routing coil power to the slingshot coil. The coil pulls a plunger in, which is attached to the kicker arm via a pivot joint. The kicker then kicks the entire sling rubber forward.

Adjustment for optimum performance of slingshots is important. Solid "Kick" factors include:

Proper sized rubber ring.
Tension of rubber ring.
Gap between standup switch contacts
Cleanliness of standup switch contacts. These contacts tend to build up carbon. Filing lightly will improve performance.
Distance of the kicker arm from where the ball impacts the rubber.
Overall length of the playfield facing sling kicker dimension. Shorter kickers impart a greater percentage of the kicker arm energy.
Friction at Plunger/Link/Kicker arm pivot points.
Alignment of plunger with coil sleeve.
Cleanliness of coil sleeve.
Condition of built-in coil stop on kicker coil bracket.
"Mushrooming" of kicker coil plunger.
Electrical current provided to the kicker coil.
And there may be others...

6.12 Chime Units

Chimes in electro-mechanical games evolved from discrete bells (or chimes) to "chime boxes" where all (or most) of the games chimes were collocated. Except for the occasional fried coil due to a scoring relay locking on, or a broken/missing nylon plunger tip, they are generally trouble free.

One exception is the Gottlieb chime box of the 1970s. Gottlieb used "beer tape" under each chime plunger to cushion the plunger's fall after chiming. Over time, this beer tape disintegrates into a sticky "goo", acts like contact cement, and prevents the chime plungers from being pulled up through the coil sleeve.

Correction is easy...

Disassemble the unit.
Scrape the beer tape residue off.
Use naphtha or isopropyl alcohol to clean down to the metal.
Replace the beer tape with your choice of cushioning material, as shown below. Ensure that the material is roughly the same thickness as the original pad. If the material is too thin, the chime plunger may not pull up into the coil sleeve.

Gottlieb Chime Unit Restoration
Uh-oh. This doesn't look good.
Chime unit disassembled. The problem can clearly be seen.
Here we've cleaned up the gooey mess. We decided to use stick on carpet sliders as pads.

6.12.1 Solid State Chime Unit in my EM Game?

Primitive WICO aftermarket sound board

WICO produced a primitive solid state chime unit for use in Electro-Mechanical games. The one pictured at left was installed in a Williams Space Mission. The sounds produced are often described as "awful".

A later model of WICO sound board was also produced. A video of it operating on a test bench can be found here.

6.13 Flippers

6.13.1 Noisy/Buzzing Flippers

When a flipper is held in the up position, some buzzing is not uncommon, especially in machines with AC voltage coils. The buzzing can be minimized by ensuring that the plunger and coil stop are flat and that the coil and all parts of the flipper mechanism are tight. The plunger and coil stop may need to be filed flat if they have mushroomed out. A spring (wave) washer that keeps tension on the coil can also help.

Flipper return springs that are too tight can also cause buzzing flippers. With the playfield up, the springs should just barely return the flippers to their resting position.

Excessive buzzing can indicate that the flipper coil is not switching to the hold coil at the end-of-stroke. You can read about flipper coils in PinWiki section Flippers. In a typical EM flipper circuit, the low-resistance (~2-8 ohms) power winding is in series with the high-resistance (~10-20 ohms) hold winding. The flipper end-of-stroke (EOS) switch shorts out the hold coil when the flipper is at rest. When the flipper button is pressed and power is applied to the flipper coil, the power coil flips the flipper. Near the end-of-stroke, the EOS switch opens which switches the hold coil into the circuit. The combined high resistance coil is enough to hold the flipper up. If a fast-moving ball should knock the flipper down, the EOS switch closes and the power coil keeps the flipper up.

There are alternative flipper wiring in some machines, so check your schematics to see how your flippers are wired.

If the EOS switch isn’t working, the power coil will be active while the flipper is up. This typically causes a very loud buzz from the flipper. Also, the flipper coil will rapidly overheat if the flipper is held up. The power winding of the flipper coil is only designed for low duty-cycle operation.

6.13.2 Weak Flippers

If the EOS switch is not making good contact, the hold winding will not be properly shorted out when the flipper is at rest. This will result in a weak flipper.

6.13.3 Gottlieb Mid-70's Flipper Crank Set Screws

The offending set screws used on some Gottlieb flipper cranks

Showing the different set screws which can be used on Gottlieb flipper cranks

A word of caution. There is one style of set screw that was used by Gottlieb which should be replaced. When removing, add solder to the screw (this will transfer heat better) and heat it with a soldering iron or soldering gun. Also, use a good 3/16" nutdriver to remove the set screw. Do not attempt to use a flat blade screwdriver. If an individual is fortunate enough to be able to remove the offending set screw without issue, throw them out! This style of set screw shown in the pics can easily snap off when tightening the screw too.

6.14 Power Issues

Williams silicon bridge rectifier:

The function of the rectifier and capacitor is to convert the alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), supplying DC to the bumpers, kickers, etc. The bridge rectifier would typically never need replacing as it is rated well over the voltage and current requirements of the components it supplies. If, however, the 15 amp 24 volt fuse on the mechanism panel opens, it could be due to a faulty rectifier. Disconnect the AC input to the rectifier, replace fuse, and recheck. If the 10 amp fuse located next to the rectifier opens, check all DC components I.E. bumpers, kickers etc. for shorts.

Bally silicon bridge rectifier:

Bally also used a bridge to convert AC to DC for various coils (usually flippers) in some of their games. The wiring is similar to Williams' and the diagnosis of a bad bridge/fuse blown is the same - check the end of stroke switches on the flippers, and for any stuck contacts on pop bumpers, sling kickers, etc.

6.15 Replacing a Power Cord

After many years, it is likely that your power cord on your old EM will need to be replaced. This could be for a number of reasons. Sometimes they get old and brittle, sometime they get cut and spliced with electrical tape or whatever. Replacing the cord is not too difficult.

The first thing you need to decide is if you are going to upgrade your existing setup or merely just replace like for like. EMs come with both grounded and ungrounded plugs. If you are replacing a grounded 3 prong plug with another one, your best bet it to just buy a 3 prong cord from Pinball resource, de-solder the old one and solder in the new one exactly how the old one was. Be careful not to switch the hot and neutral wires as that would make the game less safe.

If you are doing a straight swap of a two prong plug for a two prong plug, the easiest and cheapest solution is to buy a 12 foot or longer brown extension from a big box home improvement store, a mom and pop hardware store or even a dollar store. Cut off the female end, split and strip the wires. But which wire goes where? The new plug will be polarized, in other words, it can only go into the outlet in one direction. The old plug likely was not polarized and can go in either way. This is actually a good thing, because by carefully hooking up your new cord, you will make your game safer.

Two Prong Power Cord Replacement
A typical power cord which requires replacing
The hook up for a two pronged, polarized line cord. Note that the ribbed side goes to the transformer

The reason a cord is polarized is so that you will know where the hot wire is. The hot wire is the one that should always be switched and fused. Why is this? If you check for voltage at a plug with a multimeter, you will see that you get about 120v from the hot (small) slot to either the neutral (large) slot or the round (ground) hole. Within your household wiring, the ground is actually tied back to the neutral at the breaker. Furthermore, the ground is tied back to the earth at some point. If you switch off the neutral, rather than the hot wire, YOU could supply the ground, even if the game is turned off or there is a blown fuse. Current could flow through YOU to the earth. This would be a bad day. By switching off the hot wire, you minimize this risk. Further discussion on household wiring convention is here, if you are interested: http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/electric/hsehld.html

So, which wire is hot and which is neutral? You can follow from the male end of your plug and see that the smaller (hot) side of your cord is SMOOTH. This is what gets hooked up to your fuse block. The ribbed (neutral) side gets hooked up to your transformer.

6.16 Adding an On/Off Switch to an EM

Many EMs from the mid-sixties and earlier had a “kick-off” switch. While this was the on/off mechanism for these machines, it really wasn’t a great set up. The way the circuit worked was that it was always “at the ready” to come to life if you dropped a coin in, even after you kicked it off. The line (110v) voltage went through the fuse and several normally closed switched (often including a slam switch in the METAL door). When you dropped a coin in this would complete the circuit to the 110v side of the transformer, which would, in turn, pull in the hold relay on the 25v side of the transformer. The hold relay had 110 volts going though it’s switch which supplied the line voltage to the transformer for the duration of the time that the game was on. When the bottom of the machine was kicked in the area of the kick-off switch, it momentarily cut primary voltage to the transformer and everything would go dead, including the hold relay, so now the machine was “off”, waiting for somebody to drop a coin in and wake it up again.

This is a less than ideal setup for a number of reasons. First, I just don’t like to kick the bottom of my 50 year old machines. Second, the 110v to the coin door is just asking for trouble. Third, the hold relay is bad news, often getting quite crispy from being on all the time. Finally, I never feel comfortable with all that voltage “at the ready” within my machine. I want to know it is switched off in a positive manner. The following modification will make an early machine close to a seventies style on/off setup. You can choose to bypass as many of the NC switches as you want to improve the safety and reliability of the game. I personally choose to bypass all of them, get the 110v out of the coin door and disable the hold relay. You really don’t need all those slam and cheat switches in a home use environment and all they do is decrease the reliability of your game.

My preferred method is to disconnect the line wire from the downstream end of the fuse block. This is not the brown plug wire, but the wiring that is part of the harness. From here, run a length of wire up to the “traditional” switch area on to the right of the coin box. Now, find the hold relay switch pair with the 110v and de-solder those from the relay. Solder those two wires together, along with a new wire that also runs up to the switch area of the cabinet. Install a switch between the two added wires, shrink tube the splice and you are good to go. A good installation will also have the switch sitting in a recess in the bottom of the cabinet, so it does not get broken off. See a stock game with a switch for how that should look.

Wiring in a New On/Off Switch
This picture shows the new power cord installed and the fuse block after the original wire was removed and the new, larger (14 ga. but 16 ga. would have been fine) one added.
The smaller black and red wires, just to the left of the shrink tubing were pulled off the hold relay and soldered together and also to the single black wire coming out of the splice to the right. The lower, larger, light red/pink wire is the new wire installed at the fuse block. This is downstream of the fuse.
The splice on the black wire is almost complete. Just need to slide over the shrink tube and heat it up.

Another way is to simply de-solder the kick-off switch and run those wires over to your new switch. I have also seen the switch simply added with a wire going from the fuse block to the switch and back to the “downstream” wire that used to be on the fuse block. All these methods will “work”, but you will still be running 110v through all the normally closed slam switches and into the coin door if you choose to add the switch this way.

Regardless of how you wire it, the switch should go into a wooden recessed switch block, similar to those used on later machines. The following describes how to modify your cabinet to add a recessed switch. You may actually want to do the cabinet modifications prior to the wiring modifications.

First, get some birch plywood, cut to 3"x5" and find the center by connecting the corners. Now, drill out the center and coat the plywood with a heavy coat of Tightbond or similar grade wood glue. DON'T use gorilla glue. Next, use a big wood screw or deck screw and screw the block all the way through the bottom. Let it dry overnight. Remove the screw and use a hole saw to cut out the hole for the switch. Note how the hole left by the screw will be gone after the large hole is cut. Only saw about half way through. Now go from the bottom up to minimize splintering. The cabinet is now ready for your switch.

Modifying your cabinet for an On/Off Switch
A 3" x 5" block of birch plywood, cut and with the center marked.
Block with glue smeared on it and a pilot hole for the clamping screw drilled into it.
Block installed and with a large screw through the middle of it to hold it overnight until the glue dries.
Hole saw started from the top. Go half way and then finish from the bottom.
Finished cabinet, as viewed from the bottom. Ready for switch installation.

In order to mount your switch above the hole, you will need to attach it to a plate of some sort. Some people use hardboard (similar to peg board) and some people use a metal plate from the hardware store. I feel the cleanest installation is to use a plate that is made for this purpose and scavenged off another machine. Note that most machines have two of these plates mounted back to back. This was to not allow access to the threaded ring from the outside of the game, presumably to cut down on vandalism. In a home use environment, you really don’t need two plates on each machine, so you can easily scavenge one off a later machine that has two plates and use the “extra” one here. If you really want to finish it off nice, add an original switch cover. This will be tougher to find, as you will need something from a parts machine. To finish up and make it look nice, either zip tie or lace the new wires together and use a cable strap to tie them down so they will not get in the way. You can reference another machine to make it look “factory”.

Wiring in a New On/Off Switch
This picture shows the lacing used to bundle the new wires. Lacing was how EM wiring harnesses were originally constructed.
This picture shows the completed lacing. You could also zip tie it.
The completed installation of the new on/off switch.

6.17 Roto Targets

6.18 Vari Targets

6.19 Wax Lacing for EM wire bundles

Wax Lacing Technique, right and wrong...

An excellent resource for learning how to tie wax lacing around wire bundles can be found here. Of course, wax lacing is for the purist. It's much easier to use "zip ties" these days.

6.20 Flattening Playfield Light Shields (Plastics)

by Chris Hibler

Many techniques have been offered for bringing your playfield plastics back to their original flat form on RGP.

I've used the "camp stove method" which works pretty good but the risk of "bubbling" irreplaceable plastics is too high. I've never used the "oven method" as I just don't like the idea of putting irreplaceable plastics in an oven. Sure, it's a controlled environment, but I think the option detailed below works better as it's impossible to leave the plastics in the "oven" too long.

In St. Louis, the hot summers are perfect for flattening plastics. This procedure is simple and completely fool-proof. It is nearly impossible to ruin your plastics using this method, the one caveat being extremely warped, brittle plastics (butyrates) from older games. I don't know how anyone would deal with those anyway.

Procedure

Remove the playfield plastics and clean with Novus 1 or your choice of cleaner. I like Novus 1 as it's very mild on plastics.
Use Windex to clean two sheets of playfield glass. Let the Windex evaporate completely.
Sandwich the plastics between the two sheets of glass in a hot place. If the plastics are extremely warped, don't lay the top sheet of glass down all at once. Rest the edge of the glass on something that will allow the plastics to heat up for an hour or so, then lay the top sheet down all the way. Note: I've never had to do this but your mileage may vary.

A shot from above the plastics/glass sandwich

Top View
Here I chose my truck bed in direct sunlight. The black bed liner increases the heat.
These plastics are from Gottlieb's 1975 Fast Draw/Quick Draw

A shot from the side of the plastics/glass sandwich

Side View
Here's a side shot of the setup. The yellow arrows point to the two sheets of glass.
You can see that the warped plastics lift the top sheet just a bit.
As the plastics soften, the top sheet will gradually sink.

Wait 2 or 3 hours. What I like most about this method is that the timing is not critical. I usually set the plastics out some time during the day then wait for sundown to bring them in. It's impossible to "over cook" them.
Carefully remove and allow to dry in a cooler location.
The Final Step: Pour your favorite cold beverage and marvel at your genius.

7 Test Procedures

7.1 Testing with a Jumper Wire

Details here: http://www.planetimming.com/Pinball/troubleshooting/EM%20Troubleshooting.pdf

7.2 Testing with a Test Light

How to build your own test light: http://www.planetimming.com/Pinball/Pinball_EM_test_light.html

7.2.1 Electrical short troubleshooting Fuse helper

A circuit breaker aid with a blown fuse soldered in position

As an aid to finding the cause for an electrical short, you can make a circuit breaker tool to eliminate the need to constantly replace a fuse, while you investigate the cause. This could save you money in the long run. It is better to under-fuse the connection by a small amount, then to use the rated fuse rating, so a 3 amp circuit breaker could be used on a 5 amp fuse holder, or a 10 amp breaker for a 20 amp G.I. fuse holder. The very small GMA fuses (5x20mm) will probably need some kind of jumper wire setup.

a burned out fuse of any amperage or voltage (you were saving them just for such a thing!)
a circuit breaker of 1, 3, 5, or 10 amps, whatever amperage you require for the circuit you are troubleshooting. Buy ones like P/N 691-CMB10311C3NBA (CARLING) OR 655-W57-XB7A4A10-10 (Tyco)

Solder the burned out fuse to the spade terminals of the circuit breaker as shown in the photo. Alternatively, make a two wire female spade mini harness, and solder the bare wires to each end of the bad fuse and attach the circuit breaker that way.

8 Game Cosmetic Improvement Techniques

8.1 Insert Leveling

Loose Playfield Lamp Inserts on a 1956 Williams "Hot Diggity". Image courtesy of Steve Schukei.

Some games, Gottlieb Buccaneer and Gottlieb Royal Flush for instance, suffer from loose playfield inserts. Gluing inserts back into place can be tedious. Gorilla glue and SuperGlue are often suggested.

One excellent method of "leveling" the insert perfectly, can be seen in the YouTube video posted by EM game aficionado Steve Schukei here.

9 Resources

Online help is available by posting a request to the rec.games.pinball newsgroup. If you're new to newsgroups, Google Groups provides an easy-to-use interface: http://groups.google.com/group/rec.games.pinball/ Create a post with "Tech EM: " in the heading and provide as much information as possible about the problem.

There is also an "empinbalmachines" group on Yahoo! Groups. http://games.groups.yahoo.com/group/empinbalmachines/

Here is a handy file showing what fits what and the dimensions for coils and sleeves.

File:Coil Sleeves.pdf

10 Game Specific Problems and Fixes

10.1 Gottlieb 2001

A discussion of how to mod your game so that the drop targets reset after all targets down can be found here: http://pinside.com/pinball/forum/topic/give-your-2001-reset-drop-targets

10.2 Hacking a Fix for Quick Draw/Fast Draw Scoring

Procedure by Steve Charland (RIP my friend). Photos, video, and text by Chris Hibler, Updated schematic by Scott Charles

Gottlieb's 1975 classic "Fast Draw" sometimes suffers from a timing problem which results in 100 points being added to each player's score as the player unit advances during a single player game. Similar problems can occur in multi-player games. Steve Charland identified a very simple "hack" to fix this problem way back in 1999. Several people, including Steve, myself, and Scott Charles (seymour-shabow on RGP) have successfully implemented the hack. It corrects the problem 100% of the time.

There have been some reports that this problem can also occur in Fast Draw's 2-player brother, "Quick Draw", as well as "Surf Champ", "Far Out", and "Royal Flush". The "hack" will correct the problem in these games too.

A video recording of the problem
Click here for a YouTube video of the problem manifestation...

In an old RGP post, "Kirb" suggested several switch adjustments that can be made to minimize the problem. These adjustments may not eliminate the problem entirely. If you don't want to implement the hack, you can try these adjustments instead.

OPEN the gap of the trough switch (under the apron) . Make sure this switch is only closed when the ball just rolls over the switch. The idea is to have this switch closed for the shortest time possible. (BIG help)
OPEN the gap of motor 2D (yellow and blue wire) so that it does not reset the drop targets sooner than it has to.
OPEN the gap of motor 1C (yellow/black and red/white wire) to block the sealing of the J relay.

On to the "hack"...

The problem occurs because the "500 Point and Add Bonus Unit" relay (J on Fast Draw, E on Far Out) is energized when the drop targets are being reset as the player unit advances. By placing a switch in series with the J relay, we can prevent J from being energized. To do this, add a normally closed switch to the "Add Player Unit" relay (P), in series with J relay power. When P is energized, the normally closed switch that we'll add will open, breaking the circuit to J.

Note: Clicking on the thumbnails below will open a larger version of the image.

Modifications at the "J" Relay

J relay mods...
Remove the slate+white wire from the J relay. Leave the wire that goes from this lug to the coil in place. That wire "seals in" the relay. In this game, that wire was brown but YMMV. In place of the slate+white wire, solder a new wire that is about 12 inches long. Note: the other wire on this switch blade pair is brown-white-red but Gottlieb reds fade badly so this can't be seen in the photo.

Next, add about 9 more inches of wire to the end of the slate-white wire that was removed.

Modifications at the "P" Relay

P relay mods...
Add a normally closed switch to the end of the P relay. Solder the extended slate+white wire to one lug. Solder the new wire that you added from the J relay to the other lug. Which wire you solder to which lug is immaterial. Here I used a white wire with an orange tracer.

The switch that is added should be arranged as such: spacer, long blade, spacer, spacer, short blade, spacer, switch stack backing plate, screws. Using the right length screws is important as they cannot impinge on the relay armature.

An overview of the complete wiring "hack"

The big picture...
Be sure to check the gap for each switch on the P relay. Be sure that your new switch is adjusted normally closed and that it opens when P pulls in.

Note the heat shrink tubing where the slate+white wire was joined to the added white+orange wire. Zip-ties were used to tidy up the wiring.

The applicable schematic snippet, updated to show the "hack" as implemented

And an updated schematic snip-it...
This schematic diagram was provided by Scott Charles. The location of the NC switch was moved to reflect where it was implemented in this game.

10.3 Hacking a Gottlieb Lucky Hand

Procedure by Steve Charland, parts by Tim Meighan

Gottlieb used the same playfield layout for two great games in 1977, Jacks Open and Lucky Hand. Jacks Open is the replay version of the game while Lucky Hand is the Add-A-Ball version of the game. Lucky Hand could be set so that the "WOW" feature awarded either an extra ball or 50,000 points (novelty setting). On novelty setting, players could accumulate much higher scores which were indicated by "lightbox" type scoring in addition to the normal score reels.
On an RGP challenge by Mike Ostradick on June 18, 2007 (link), armed with a Lucky Hand to work with and an extensive background in EM pins, Steve Charland developed the following "hack" which modifies Lucky Hand so that the lightbox advance feature unit is split, awarding extra balls (WOW's) AND counting scores over 199,990 points instead of one or the other.
A player could now score up to 1,999,990 points while accumulating extra balls during add-a-ball play. Nice.

WARNING: I suggest reading all of what needs to be done before jumping in on this hack. You might be in over your head and should stop before you kill your game (or not, if you do it the easy way). This is something that should only be done if you have a good grasp of EM function and the ability to read a schematic so you don't get lost.

Our Objective, shown here is to enable both the Add-A-Ball feature and "novelty" scoring. Note how the picture shows 1,999,990 points scored plus 5 extra balls (the 5 "WOW"s that are illuminated).

Note: Clicking on any of the small pictures will open a larger picture in a new browser window.

SELECTING THE BEST DISK AND WIPER SET FOR THIS HACK

I picked a bonus unit disk set for this hack because it has just about everything you need to make it work. You will have to add 3 wipers to the wiper disk to make all 5 WOW's light when won. It looks a lot nicer when you use the correct parts and wire in to the same harness for the hack. My good friend Tim Meighan was kind enough to make a matching disk/wiper set for this hack to make my game look correct. He can be contacted at TimMeighan@msn.com if you would like to purchase a set of ready-made disks from him, or have him add more rivets to yours. Also thanks to Tim for contributing to this article.

Here are some pics of Tim's work, used in the implementation of this "hack".

Left to right: a. back of custom disk, b. Both custom disk and wiper, c. back of custom wiper, d. front of custom wiper, e. Custom disk and wiper installed.

Custom Disks Used in the Hack
back of custom disk
Both custom disk and wiper
Back of custom wiper
Front of custom wiper
Custom disk and wiper installed

SPLITTING THE WOW/100,000 UNIT

Gottlieb wasn't one to waste space or money on lots of extra parts. In the case of some of their later add-a-ball games, they took this philosophy to the extreme, allowing two completely different features to operate from one stepper unit. Of course, only one of these two features could be functional on location at a time and the one you got depended on whether the game was set to add-a-ball or novelty play.

One of these features was to keep track of "add-a-balls" (accumulated extra balls) earned through WOW's. On Gottlieb EM's, a WOW is the add-a-ball equivalent of a SPECIAL on a replay game. The other feature was to provide lightbox bulb-scoring of multiple 100,000's beyond what the score reels could hold, since the reels simply rolled back over to zero after 99,990.

It's easy to see that both of these features are desirable, so our objective with this hack is to split this unit and activate BOTH features at the same time during normal game play. There are two ways to complete this objective. Remove the "WOW" portion from the "lightbox advance" unit, or remove the "100,000" count from it. I chose the WOW to start because it *seemed* simpler but after it was done, really isn't, I'm always doing things the hard way. Both methods move about the same amount of wires but there is very little switch adjustment to do in the second hack. Would I do the hack again this way? NO, I'd go the other route but nothing is learned that way (especially by me). We'll go over doing the easy hack too. (make sure the wire used to run the coils is at least 18 gauge, 20 gauge for any lights minimum) The neat part about both hacks that the game can be converted back to original since you don't have to cut any wires. :)

MOVING THE "WOW" FEATURE TO A SEPARATE UNIT

1. Install another stepper unit in head (ball count stepper is best choice, we'll call it the "WOW" unit now). Make sure it doesn't touch any wires or light busses where installed (any wiring that can touch the chassis will have to be moved). Add the modified disk set to it.

2. Add a male Jones plug to novelty plug location in the head. This is optional but I like to do it when working out a new hack as an additional point of reference.

3. Remove the wire (white-red on Lucky Hand) from the add-a-ball Jones plug that runs to the 100,000 relay and jumper it over to the added novelty plug to it's opposite correct pin location. This disables the 100,000 relay ("JX" relay on Lucky Hand, possibly other games as well) and allows the "lightbox advance" unit to step up to 1,900,000 (in Lucky Hand).

4. Remove the lead wire (black-white wire on Lucky Hand) from the 5th position cam limiting switch on the "lightbox advance" unit disk and leave it loose for now. This switch is no longer needed on this unit and will be moved to the added "WOW" unit later.

5. Install a jumper on the added "WOW" unit from one coil solder lug to the other, then run one black wire from one of the leads to any coil black return lead. We'll visit these coils again in a later step. Be sure to leave enough room in *all* of the "WOW" unit wiring you install so you can still open it and work on the backside.

6. Run a new wire from the added "novelty" Jones plug hot lead for the 100,000 feature lights up to the added "WOW" unit light tab on the chassis. (WOW and 100,000 counting lights) so both features light up at the same time. Another place to add this jumper that seems easier is on the "lightbox advance" unit itself at the end of the same leads as on the Jones plugs. (wire colors are maroon-yellow and maroon-orange on Lucky Hand)

7. Remove all 5 WOW light wires (wire colors are blue-black, orange-black, brown-black, green-black & slate-black on Lucky Hand) from the "lightbox advance" unit disk and jumper them down to the added "WOW" unit disk in their proper positions. Now the easy work is done, both features should now be lit and the "lightbox advance" unit should now work properly. NOTE: One problem that will fix itself later as we move switches is that at this point, the through switch will take off 100,000 points each time a ball rolls over it. However, the added "WOW" unit should step up and down manually. From now on, we'll call the "lightbox advance" unit the "100,000 unit.

MAKING THE WOW UNIT STEP UP

8. This is one of 3 new switches that must be added to the backside of the added "WOW" unit runout post. Remember the wire (black-white wire on Lucky Hand) you removed from the "100,000" unit cam switch on step 4 above? Splice a wire to it and run it down to the added "WOW" unit switch on the backside of the unit. After stepping up, this switch must open when the post on the stepper gear touches it (just like a ball count unit).

9. Add a jumper wire from the run out switch to the step up coil. If done correctly, the "WOW" unit will now step up.

MAKING THE KNOCKER POP AT STEP UP OF THE "WOW" UNIT

Gotta have that POP when you win an extra ball!

10. Remove the wire (red-green on Lucky Hand) from the add-a-ball Jones plug that connects up the knocker to the female portion of the plug. Cap it off since you won't be needing it. Add a wire to the solder lug and then run it up to the step up coil on the "WOW" unit. The knocker will now fire every time you win an extra ball.

MAKING BOTH UNITS RESET AND THE "WOW" UNIT STEP DOWN WITH THE "BALL COUNT" UNIT

We'll deal with reset completed runout switches first. Right now, there are two, one on the "ball count" unit and one on the "100,000" unit. Another switch needs to be added in line with these two and installed on the added "WOW" unit. I chose to put the new switch between the zero position ball count and "100,000" reset completed switches. This switch will tell the game that the "WOW" unit has reset along with everything else and to then stop the reset.

11. Remove the reset runout wire off of the switch on the "100,000" unit. It should be the switch closest to the stepper post (brown-white-red wire on Lucky Hand). Add a wire to this wire and run it to the new runout switch (second added switch) on the "WOW" unit. From there, add another wire to the other side of the new switch and run it back to the place you removed the original wire (brown-white-red wire on Lucky Hand) from the "100,000" unit. This switch should close when the "WOW" unit is at zero and the AXR relay will now trip when all of the resets are completed on the game.

Now on to the reset of the "WOW" unit. Right now, you should have a problem with the through switch resetting the 100,000 unit since it's set up to step down the WOW count instead. This needs to be corrected and moved to the "WOW" unit instead. Also, there is a zero position game over switch on the "100,000" unit that needs to be moved down to the "WOW" unit. This switch turns off the "ball count" unit when a extra ball is won and allows the "ball count" unit to advance to game over when you don't have any more extra balls to play (we'll start here). then we need to make the "100,000" unit reset.

12. Remove the 2 wires (red and green-red wires on Lucky Hand) on the "100,000" unit zero position runout switch and splice wires to both. Add a new zero position runout switch (third added switch, or just move the old one to this unit) to the backside of the "WOW" unit. This switch needs to be closed when you have no extra WOW's (zero position). Connect the added wires to this switch.

This next step is important, it involves the game over portion of the hack (mentioned above). If ignored, "game over" won't work correctly. It will only go to game over after the last ball is played and it gets kicked back to the plunger lane via the through switch. We want it to turn the game off before doing so.

13. Locate the game over zero position switch on the "100,000" unit backside that controls reset (blue-red center wire on Lucky Hand) that comes from the AX reset relay. Remove the game over zero position switch (on-on) from the "100,000" unit and transplant it to the "WOW" unit. Take the center wire (blue-red on Lucky Hand), splice a wire to it and connect it to the transplanted game over zero position switch on the "WOW" unit. This wire should now be in the center of the 3 lug switch. Splice a wire to the other removed wire (orange-red on Lucky hand) from the old position on the "100,000" unit and run it over to the transplanted game over zero position switch on the "WOW" unit. This switch should be closed when the "WOW" unit is reset to zero.

14. Now take a jumper wire and connect one end to the reset coil on the "WOW" unit. Take the other end of that jumper wire and connect it to the last solder lug on the transplanted game over zero position switch. This switch should be open when the "WOW" unit is reset to zero. Make sure all switches do what they used to do when they were on the old "lightbox advance" unit and the game over will work correctly.

15. Abandon the wire (brown-red on Lucky Hand) on the "100,000" unit reset coil and run a new wire from the coil to the reset coil on the "ball count" unit. Connect the wire to the wire (slate-yellow on Lucky Hand) that isn't black on that coil. You should now be finished and ready to test the game for adjustments and a little fine tuning. At this point, your game should be working like mine, with both features.

16. All done. A complete view of the backbox with additional stepper and wiring included. Now go rack up some points and some extra balls.

An Alternative Method: MOVING THE 100,000 FEATURE TO A SEPARATE UNIT

For those that want to do this the easy way ;-) , I'll explore this hack (since my game is working the other way and I have no plans to change it now). I'll be doing the shortened version to save time (without extra comments or optional connections like Jones plugs). What will be needed is a bonus stepper unit with matching disks and a stepper gear from a credit unit. The reason for the gear change is that a credit unit gear allows for advancing past position 15, a bonus unit stepper unit gear does not. 4 more rivets will need to be added to the disk so the counter can go up to 1,900,000 like it originally does in novelty mode. The easiest way to do this is to send the disk to Tim Meghan for modification or have a new one made. Nothing should change on the wiper disk if it came from a bonus unit.

1b. Install the stepper unit ("100,000" unit) in the same place as step 1 above.

2b. Add 4 rivets to the disk and wire up the backside to work correctly during advance. Note: If you do nothing to the disk, it will only count to 1,500,000 which is more than enough.

3b. Move all ten of the 100,000 light wires from the "lightbox advance" unit disk and install them on the new "100,000" unit disk in their proper positions.

4b. Jumper a wire from the "lightbox advance" unit chassis lug to the added "100,000" unit chassis lug.

5b. Run a black wire from an existing coil up to the two coils on the added "100,000" unit for ground.

6b. Remove the wire (blue-white-red on Lucky Hand) from the 100,000 relay and run it to an added run out switch on the "100,000" unit. This switch is to limit the step up to 19. Connect the other side of this switch to the other lug on the added "100,000" unit step up coil.

7b. Run a reset wire from the reset coil (slate-yellow on Lucky Hand) on the ball count unit up to a zero position switch on the added "100,000" unit. From the other side of that switch, jumper a wire to the reset coil on the added "100,000" unit for AX reset.

8b. Splice a zero position switch into the line (brown-white-red on Lucky Hand) for the AX reset relay and install it in the same place mentioned in step 12 above for reset completed.

That should do it. It's easier, with less switch adjustments to make. I don't think I missed anything.

11 Repair Logs

Williams Klondike - there are three 3" score reel assemblies used in the playfield for a type of slot machine. Out of those three reels, two have the same symbols in the same order, while the third one does not. The "odd" reel is to be installed on the right reel assembly.

Something to keep in mind is that, as noted on the IPDB, there are some games where the right reel is not wired correctly.

@@ Line 1: / Line 1: @@
+==Introduction==
+Electro-mechanical, commonly referred to as EM, pinball machines were manufactured from the 1930's until the mid 1970's, when the transition to solid state machines was made.  From that span of 40 plus years, literally hundreds of companies manufactured EM pinball machines.<br>
-==Introduction==
+This guide focuses on machines primarily made from the 1950's until 1977 made by four of the largest pinball manufacturers at the time.  Manufacturers included in this guide are:
-Put system info here
+*D. G. Gottlieb & Co.®
+*Williams
+*Bally
+*Chicago Coin
+Although the amount of companies discussed here is somewhat limited, EM repair transcends beyond these four companies.  The operation of a relay, stepper unit, and score motor is essentially the same, regardless of the manufacturer.
+<br clear=all>
 ==Safety==
 Pinball machines operate off line voltage (120V in U.S.) so care must be taken when working on your machine.  If you are not comfortable with the risk you should only attempt repairs that can be done with the machine unplugged.<br>
-Most EM machines primarily operate with 6.3VAC and 25VAC, which is somewhat safe. However, line voltage will be present from the line-in cord to the primary side of the transformer and the service outlet.  Also, some machines have coils which operate on 120VAC, so some relay switches, score motor switches, and anti-cheat / kick of switches have 120VAC present on them.  Finally, some older machines have 120VAC going to the start switch and the weighted slam switch located on the coin door.  On these games you should check to make sure the fish paper insulation is still in good condition.  The fish paper is used to isolate switch voltages from other current conducting items, like the coin door.  If the fish paper is torn, misaligned, or missing, there is the potential to receive a shock.  This shock can occur while either playing the game, or by touching the suspect game and another, properly grounded game simultaneously.<br>
+Most EM machines primarily operate with 6.3VAC and 25VAC, which is somewhat safe. However, line voltage will be present from the line-in cord to the primary side of the transformer and the service outlet.  Also, some machines have coils which operate on 120VAC, so some relay switches, score motor switches, and anti-cheat / kick off switches have 120VAC present on them.  Finally, some older machines have 120VAC going to the start switch and the weighted slam switch located on the coin door.  On these games you should check to make sure the fish paper insulation is still in good condition.  The fish paper is used to isolate switch voltages from other current conducting items, like the coin door.  If the fish paper is torn, misaligned, or missing, there is the potential to receive a shock.  This shock can occur while either playing the game, or by touching the suspect game and another, properly grounded game simultaneously.<br>
 By all means if you decide to work on a game, do not perform any repairs in socks or bare feet.  Don't laugh people have done and do this.
@@ Line 12: / Line 20: @@
 ==Games==
-The "Big Three" manufacturers were Gottlieb, Williams, and Bally.  The "best of the rest" would probably include Chicago Coin and Midway, as well as some popular foreign brands, such as Sonic, Segasa, Recel, Rally, Zaccaria, and Playmatic.  Some of the foreign manufacturers used American pinball manufacturer parts in part or in whole.  For example, Sonic is mainly based on Williams EM architecture, while Recel is mainly based on Gottlieb.<br>
+The "Big Three" manufacturers were Gottlieb®, Williams, and Bally.  The "best of the rest" would probably include Chicago Coin and Midway, as well as some popular foreign brands, such as Sonic, Segasa, Recel, Rally, Zaccaria, and Playmatic.  Some of the foreign manufacturers used American pinball manufacturer parts in part or in whole.  For example, Sonic is mainly based on Williams EM architecture, while Recel is mainly based on Gottlieb®.<br>
 A [http://www.ipdb.org/search.pl?gtype=EM&searchtype=advanced quick search] of the Internet Pinball Database, shows that between all the manufacturers, there are over 3403 electro-mechanical games within this very broad category.  There were many companies which only produced a few games, especially early on.
@@ Line 18: / Line 26: @@
 ==Technical Info==
+===Recommended Documentation===
+Probably the single most important documentation to have while attempting to work on an EM pinball machine is the schematics.  Schematics are analogous to the roadmap of a state - they are the electrical roadmap of a game.  It is always highly recommended to have a copy of the schematics for a particular game on hand.  Second to schematics is the game's manual, if one was printed.  Game manuals for EM pinball machines were not available until 1967 for Williams, 1971 for Gottlieb®, approximately 1971 for Bally, and approximately 1972 for Chicago Coin.  The game manual is an excellent, complimentary documentation to the schematics.  If a game manual is available for a particular game, it is recommended to acquire it too.
+* [[media:Introduction-to-bally-flipper-games-1970s-em.pdf|Introduction to Bally Flipper Games]] - Late 1960s through 1976 EM Guidebook
+* [[media:Introduction-to-coin-operated-amusement-games-williams.pdf|Introduction to Coin Operated Amusement Games (Williams)]] - 1960s through 1970s EM Guidebook
+<br clear=all>
+A guide to reading schematics is available here:
+https://web.archive.org/web/20170428042920/http://tuukan.fliput.net/emkytkis_en.html
+[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dk1AAO2ihtA EM Schematics 101 video] with John Robertson
+=====Schematic Symbols=====
+Key to Schematic Symbols
+<br clear=all>
+{| class="wikitable"
+! width="240" | Symbol
+! width="400" | Description
+|-
+| [[File:schematic_relay.gif|Relay]]
+| Relay - A letter and/or name identifies the relay function.  Switches elsewhere in the schematics will be identified with this letter.
+|-
+| [[File:schematic_solenoid.gif|Solenoid]]
+| Solenoid - A coil that operates a device in the machine.  Note the subtle different in that the coil is drawn upside down.
+|-
+| [[File:schematic_lamp.gif|Lamp]]
+| Lamp.  The label indicates the lamp function.  GI lamps may not represent the exact number of lamps.
+|-
+| [[File:schematic_fuse.gif|Fuse]]
+| Fuse
+|-
+| [[File:schematic_switch_no.gif|N.O. Switch]]
+| Switch, normally open (N.O.) - The label indicates what relay the switch is on.
+|-
+| [[File:schematic_switch_nc.gif|N.C. Switch]]
+| Switch, normally closed (N.C.) - The label indicates what relay the switch is on.  This switch is labeled as a score motor switch.  Some schematics (e.g. 70s Williams') denote score motor switches in circles.
+|-
+| [[File:schematic_switch_make-break.gif|Make-Break Switch]]
+| Switch, make-break. The label indicates what relay the switch pair is on.
+|-
+| [[File:schematic_score_motor.gif|Score Motor]]
+| Score Motor
+|-
+| [[File:schematic_stepper_single.gif|Stepper - Single Wiper]]
+| Stepper Unit with single wiper/rivet contact.
+|-
+| [[File:schematic_stepper_double.gif|Stepper - Dual Wiper]]
+| Stepper Unit with dual wiper/rivet contact.
+|}
+====Parts Catalogs====
+A comprehensive [https://www.funwithpinball.com/resources/parts-catalog-list list of Parts Catalogs]
+{| class="wikitable"
+|-
+!Manufacturer
+!Catalog
+!Version
+!Cover
+!Games
+!Notes
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1948 Parts catalog
+|
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1953 Parts catalog
+|
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1957 Parts catalog
+|
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|Includes games from from Niagara (1950) to Sea Belles (1956)
+|Primary catalog
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1958 Parts catalog
+|Volume D
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1960 Parts catalog
+|Volume E
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1962 Parts catalog
+|Volume F
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|Primary catalog
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1964 Parts catalog
+|Volume G
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1966 Parts catalog
+|Volume H
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1968 Parts catalog
+|Volume J
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|Primary catalog
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1970 Parts catalog
+|Volume K
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1972 Parts catalog
+|Volume L
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|Primary catalog
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1974 Parts catalog
+|Volume M
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1976 Parts catalog
+|Volume N
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|Primary catalog. Contains coin door part number error.
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|1978 Parts catalog
+|Volume P
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|Primary catalog. Contains coin door part number error.
+|-
+|Gottlieb
+|Parts and Price Supplement Volume P (1978)
+|
+|[[file:placeholder.jpg|thumb|left|140px]]
+|
+|
+|}
+====Documentation Errors====
+=====Gottlieb=====
+* The 1976 and 1978 Gottlieb parts catalogs have a part number error for the coin door lockout coil assembly (page 67 in the 1978 catalog). The armature spring at the bottom of the lockout coil assembly is shown as part A-557 "Spring", but the part number is actually A-574. Part A-557 is the interlock relay housing.
+===Relays===
+Relays are small coils that when energized complete one or more circuits.  They are usually high resistance so they can be activated for a long time without burning up or blowing a fuse.  They are the workhorse of the EM world; without the relay, the proper circuits do not get energized and nothing happens.  The relays set up the conditions that the score motor then completes the work on.  Similar to how a mechanical cash register works; you punch in the functions, and pull down the handle which is that machinery's "score motor."<br>
+For example, a 500 point relay will pull in, causing a circuit path to the 100 point relay (which adds 100 points directly to the active score reel set) to be made, and also starting the score motor.  The score motor will turn and additional switches will pulse 5 times, causing the 100 point relay to pulse 5 times, adding 500 points to the score.  A 5000 point relay operates the same way - except it's completing a circuit to the 1000 point relay.  The same 5 pulses from the score motor "do the work" of adding the score.<br>
+It is the interconnection of relays and their circuits that comprise the "programming" of an electro-mechanical machine.  You can change the way a game plays by adding and changing circuits, to either fix errors in the original programming, or to create new and exciting rules.
+<br clear=all>
+====Relay Types and Their Functions====
+A relay is a electrically operated device that when activated, has a moving armature that has the ability to operate various switches affixed to it. One function of a relay is to operate several switches in various discrete circuits at the same time. Step switches, due to their physical construction, need a certain amount of time to complete a step. A relay can trigger a switch or series of switches, in a very brief power pulse. For instance, a ball hitting a pop bumper might not close a switch long enough to enable a stepper unit to advance to the next contact. A relay can “lock in” and complete a circuit for a period of time that would enable a stepper unit to advance or reset properly.<br>
+=====Magnetic Relay=====
+[[file:WMSMagneticRelay.jpg|thumb|left|Williams Magnetic relay]]
+[[file:GTBrelayschematic.jpg|thumb|right|Diagram and Schematic showing a Pop Bumper circuit]]
+There are four basic types of relays used in EM machines. The first type that we shall reference here is known as a magnetic relay. Please refer to the schematic and diagram to the right for this section. Referring to the schematic, take as an example a N.O. switch (type A, by GTB) labeled “bumper” that is closed by a pinball striking the pop bumper. The coil indicated as a L RELAY, is a magnetic coil that is energized by the bumper switch. The result is that the coil becomes an electromagnet and attracts the armature which pulls down to the coil core and closes the 2 N.O. switches marked L 1 & L 2. The closed switch L 1 keeps the L relay energized, even though the pinball has bounced away from the bumper and its contact has opened.
+Current still flows through the circuit via the closed L 1 switch, then through the N.C. switch labeled “on step switch”, to the electromagnetic coil on the L relay. This “on step switch” is mounted on the stepper unit so that it only opens when the step up arm of the stepper unit has completed a full stroke. After the step up arm has completed its stroke, the switch opens the circuit, cutting off the current to the L relay. Since the circuit to the L relay coil is now open, the coil no longer attracts the armature to its core. Helped by a spring attached to the armature, the armature returns to its original position and opens the 2 switches L 1 & L 2. With the switch at L 2 open again, the coil on the stepper unit is no longer energized, and so the drive arm returns to its original position, re-closes the N.C. switch and the stepper unit is ready for another cycle.
+<br clear=all>
+===== AG Type Relay=====
+[[file:GTBAGrelay.jpg|thumb|right|Gottlieb® "AG" relay]]
+The second type of relay is similar to the above electromagnetic type, but is a high speed type with short switch blades and a short stroke, and is known as an '''“AG”''' relay. Please refer to the diagram on the right. An '''AG''' relay may have several switches in one or two stacks, in any kind of switch formation, N.O., N.C., Make-Break, or Make-Make. A plastic or nylon ”ladder” is riveted on the armature to operate the switches in unison.<br clear=all>
+=====Interlock Relay=====
+[[file:GTBinterlockRelay.jpg|thumb|right|Gottlieb® Interlock relay- The 1st relay stays activated until the 2nd relay releases it]]
+The third type of relay is known as an '''Interlock''' relay, and it consists of two electromagnetic relays that are constructed in such a way, that when one relay pulls in (is energized), the armature of that relay operates the switches mounted on it, and the armature of the OTHER relay slides over and locks the first armature in its closed position. This holds the switches in the activated state, even as the power is cut off from the first coil. The switches cannot return to their normal state until the SECOND relay is energized, pulling the second relay’s armature back, thereby unlocking the first relay’s armature, permitting the first relay’s switches to return to normal.<br clear=all>
+=====Trip relay=====
+[[file:GTBtripRelay.jpg|thumb|right|Gottlieb® trip relay-These switches stay activated until reset by a reset bank coil]]
+The fourth type of relay is a '''TRIP''' relay, usually ganged together is what is called a '''TRIP''' or '''RELAY BANK'''. There may be only a few relays in the bank, or up to a dozen. A trip relay, when energized, releases an armature which trips a latch that operates a series of switches. Even after power is removed from the trip coil, the latch, its spring and switches are held in the activated position. The only way the armature and its associated switches can be reset to normal, is mechanically by a large bank coil(or coils) which operates a bank reset arm. This coil is often 120 volts AC due to the large amount of physical power needed to reset a large bank of relays. When the reset coil is energized, the reset arm is pushed against all the latches of all the coils in its bank returning all the switches to their normal positions and releasing all the armatures which snap open due to the armature spring. The open armatures hold the latches in the open position when the reset coil is de-energized, and the pull of the reset spring draws the reset arm away from the latches.<br>
+=====Armature Switch and Series Latch=====
+The trip relay bank may have an armature switch held open by the trip relay armature when in its reset state. The armature switch is wired in series with the reset bank coil, and its function is to ensure that the current flows to the reset coil until the bank is fully reset to its normal at rest position. In addition, there may be a '''SERIES LATCH''', which does NOT have a coil to hold it open, but instead has a bar that rests on two or more latches in the relay bank. When ALL the latches in that series are tripped (activated) the '''SERIES LATCH''' drops also to operate its own group of switches.<br clear=all>
+====Series Relay Explained====
+The series relay is, as implied by the name, a relay in series with another set of relays.  This was done to allow a group of target switches to have both an individual action and a common, or shared, action.
+For example, Gottlieb® used a series relay in it’s 1975 “Spirit of 76” game.  A portion of the circuit diagram showing the series relay, labeled A, is shown in the figure below.   A-1119 = 2.2 ohms, A-9746 = 1.8 ohms.  The A-E star rollovers energize one of the 1B-5B bank relays while simultaneously energizing the series relay.  The bank relay trips to control the rollover lights.  The series relay controls the scoring.  [ED: It would be good to identify the earliest game this was used on.]
+[[file:series_relay.gif|thumb|1040px|left|Series relay as used in Gottlieb® Spirit of 76]]
+<br clear=all>
+Coil resistance is very important to correct operation of the series relay circuit.  It is important to use the correct replacement coils in this circuit.  The coil voltage will be divided across the coils in series, so each will only see a portion of the coil voltage.  Typically, coils in series will be about the same resistance, so each will see one-half of the available voltage.
+Game design is also critical to correct operation of the series relay.  The relays in the circuit with the series relay must be controlled such that only one is energized at a time.  This requires that the playfield switches in the circuit be physically separated so the ball has no way of actuating more than one switch at a time.
+Use of the series relay was a design choice driven by cost.  There are other ways to achieve the same game operation, but they involve using more switches and more relays.
+====Reset Completed Relay====
+stub<br>
+====Delay Relay====
+[[file:over_the_top_relay.jpg|thumb|400px|right|Bally delay relay]]
+Bally used a special relay in the 1970s to provide a time delay circuit.  The delay relay uses a #455 flasher lamp in the lock-in circuit to generate the time delay.  The lamp is in series with the normally open lock-in switch.  When the relay is energized, the lock-in switch closes and the lamp lights.  When the lamp filament heats up and the lamp flashes off for the first time, the open circuit releases the relay.
+The flasher lamp is required for correct operation of the delay relay.  Using a standard lamp will result in the relay locking on once it is energized.  If the lamp is missing or burned out the relay will fail to lock-in, resulting in the relay energizing momentarily and no time delay.  Note that the 6.5V lamp is powered by the 50V coil voltage in this circuit, so the delay is shorter than the normal flash delay.  If the delay is too short or too long, the Bally game manual recommends experimenting with different #455 lamps until the desired delay time is achieved.
+The picture to the right shows the delay relay from the "Over The Top" buzzer circuit on a 1976 Bally "Hokus Pokus" game.  The #455 lamp is pointed out in red.
+<br clear=all>
+[[file:over_the_top_circuit.gif|thumb|400px|right|Bally delay circuit]]
+The following circuit diagram shows the control for the delay relay as used in the "Hokus Pokus" Over-The-Top circuit.  The right two circuit legs are the enable circuits for player 1 and player 2 respectively.  The relay is energized when the "9th position" switch on the player's 10,000 point score reel is closed and the end-of-stroke switch closes.  That is, when the score rolls over from 90,000 to zero.  The left circuit leg is then enabled by the normally open switch on the delay relay itself, lighting the time delay lamp.
+<br clear=all>
+===Switches===
+[[file:GenericSchematicSwitchDiagram.jpg‎|thumb|right|200px|Schematic symbols for a N.O. & N.C. switch]]
+Leaf switches in pinball games come in 4 formats: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.), Break-Make, & Make-Make, the last 2 of which are really combinations of a N.O. and/or a N.C. switch. Regardless of their function, all switches are in fact, a N.O. or N.C. type.<br>
+Leaf switches in EM games are of 2 compositions,at least 2 bronze blades each holding a Silver Contact or a Tungsten Contact(occasionally 2 contacts per blade). Since silver is a very high conductor of electricity, it is used on most EM switches, with the exception of the flipper cabinet and End of Stroke (EOS) contacts, which are tungsten. Silver tarnishes and turns black, but this does not effect its conductivity. Silver contacts may be cleaned with a flex-file or sandpaper, in order to redress the switch for adequate surface contact. Tungsten flipper contacts must be redressed with an ignition-type flat file as used in automotive repair, as the contacts are too hard to be smoothed by sandpaper or flex file abrasive. Gold flashed contacts, are not normally used in EM games, and must NEVER be cleaned with a file or sandpaper. A business card, or thin cardboard, is all that is necessary to clean electronic gold flashed contacts.<br>
+====Normally Open (N.O.) Switch aka Form A Switch====
+[[file:SwitchNormallyOpen.jpg|thumb|left|200px|Normally Open Switch in resting state]][[file:Closed_When_Energized_Color.jpg|thumb|right|200px|N.O. switch called Closed When Energized (C.W.E) or Closed When In (C.W.I.) on Old Williams schematics c. 1950]]
+This is a leaf switch that has 2 (rarely 4) contacts that complete a circuit when pushed closed by some mechanical device. The switch re-opens when the device moves away from the moveable contact, and the springiness of the blade opens the circuit. Gottlieb® calls this type of switch, a “Form A” switch, and this term is sometimes used in its schematics.<br clear=all>
+====Normally Closed (N.C.) aka Form B Switch====
+[[file:SwitchNormallyClosedLabelled.jpg|thumb|left|200px|Normally Closed (N.C.) switch in resting state with optional nylon spacer]][[file:BallySwitchNONCedited.jpg|thumb|right|200px|Normally Open & Closed switches on Bally Schematics, c. 1961.If you rotate the line segment representing the pole counter(anti-)-clockwise (CCW), it will have to go almost all the way around to touch the other wire, denoting a N.O.switch. A short CCW rotation signifies a N.C. switch]]
+This type of switch, called a “Form B” switch by Gottlieb®, opens a circuit when a mechanical device pushes against the blade. A typical use of a N.C. switch is the bottom cabinet tilt or game off switch GTB uses on early EM games. When the bottom of the cabinet is struck intentionally or by a disgruntled player, the weight on the end of the blade moves the contacts apart and turns the game off.<br clear=all>
+====Break-Make aka Form C switch====
+[[file:SwitchMakeBreakLabelled.jpg|thumb|left|200px|Break-Make switch aka Form C in resting state]]
+[[file:Break-Make_Switch_Schematic.png‎|thumb|right|140px|Schematic diagram of a Break-Make Switch]]
+This switch is really a composite of a N.O. and a N.C. switch with just three blades instead of four. The moveable center blade has contacts on BOTH sides. Proper adjustment insures that when a device moves the center blade towards the open contact, the CLOSED switch OPENS BEFORE the center contact touches the open switch’s contact. When the pressure is released, the center blade returns to its N.C. side and re-makes contact. This type of switch is often used on relays. A Make-Break switch is really the same, just upside-down, or in reverse, of the order of actions of a Break-Make switch. Special care should be taken with a Make-Break switch that the three blades are at no time shorted together. This can happen often when the blade stiffener is maladjusted, and contacts the other blade of the pair.<br clear=all>
+====Make-Make aka Form AA switch====
+[[file:SwitchMakeMakeLabelled.jpg|thumb|left|200px|Make-Make switch aka Form AA in resting state]]
+[[file:Make-Make_Switch_Schematic.jpg|thumb|140px|right|Make-Make schematic diagram]]
+A make-make switch is a composite switch consisting of two N.O. switches using only 3 blades. When mechanical pressure is applied to the blade, the switch “makes” or closes the circuit, and continues to move until a second switch contact is closed, tying all 3 blades together.<br><br>Additional information & photos about leaf switches can be found [http://bingo.cdyn.com/techno/readschem/switches.html here.] <br clear=all>
+===Score Motor===
+[[image:YT.png]] A nice explanation of score motors can be found on YouTube [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rPRc-8Yfflk <b><u>here</b></u>].
+The Score motor of an EM machine is the heart of an electro-mechanical computer. Through a combination of a motor, cogs and switch stacks, the score motor controls the game reset, scoring and features for the pinball machine. Like a computer program which has a fatal error, if a function controlled by the score motor cannot be executed the score motor will run on and on in a runaway fashion.<br>
+The score motor switches take a lot of abuse, and are often the target for an inexperienced repair person, when in fact, the reason the score motor will not stop rotating, is because a switch elsewhere is not operating correctly. The score reels are a notorious example of this, and will be discussed further below. Correct gap on the score motor switches is critical for proper game operation.<br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=3 caption="Score Motors Identified">
+file:GTBScoreMotorPhoto.jpg|A Gottlieb® score motor, top view from 1967 King of Diamonds.
+file:WMSScoreMotor.jpg|A Williams Score motor mounted underneath the playfield from a 1950 Dreamy (only 2 cams used)
+file:WMSScoreMotorShortStop.jpg|A Williams Score Motor from a 1958 Short-Stop (3 cams used)
+File:WilliamsScoreMotor.jpg|Typical Williams Score Motor from a 1971 Stardust
+File:BallyScoreMotor3-4View.jpg|Typical Bally Score Motor from a 1976 Night Rider
+File:CCMScoreMotor.JPG|Chicago Coin Score Motor from a 1974 Hi Flyer
+</gallery>
+</center>
+<br clear=all>
+====Gottlieb® Score Motor====
+[[File:Target Alpha Motor Switches.JPG|thumb|left|Typical Gottlieb® score motor (from Target Alpha)]]<br>
+Most of the following will concern Gottlieb® score motors, but the general concepts will apply to all other motors as well. The score motor consists of a frame, gear motor, cam assembly and various switch stacks. The motor operates at 26 RPM, with a vertical shaft which has a cam assembly attached that operates the switch stacks.
+<br clear=all>
+=====Gottlieb® Score Motor Physical Description & Function=====
+[[file:GTBScoreMotorCamLineDraw.jpg|thumb|left|Gottlieb® Score Motor Cams]]
+The cam assembly consists of 2 circular notched cams that rotate, driven by the motor. The cams in turn, actuate the switch stacks by two methods. Switch “dogs” ride along the edge of the cams, and pins protruding vertically from the face of the cams, above and below the score motor assembly, actuate switch stacks additionally. This arrangement creates 5 vertical levels of switch stack positions.<br>
+The top cam is divided into three equally spaced notches, while the lower cam has 3 notches which are further divided into 5 equally spaced teeth. When the score motor makes one complete revolution, this results in 3 complete operational cycles.<br clear=all>
+=====Understanding The Location of Score Motor Switch Stacks=====
+[[file:GTBScoreMotorSwitchBrake.jpg|thumb|left|A single blade without wires attached designates position 3 1/2]]
+There are little paper labels that are numbered 1 through 3 ½ and 4 stuck to the base plate of the score motor to identify which position you are looking at. Feel fortunate if yours are still there and legible. If just one of them is remaining, you can count clockwise from that one to determine which stack is which number. Sometimes ALL of the stickers are gone, but you still can determine the switch stack. Number 3 ½ is a wireless switch blade all by itself attached to the frame. Just identify # 3 ½ and count clockwise to 4, then 1, 2, & 3. It may help you to make little labels and attach them to understand what you are looking at quickly, and for future reference.<br>
+Not all switch positions have switch stacks at every level. It may help to un-pin the score motor and pivot it up to look at levels A and B, or to adjust them. Of course, you will do this with the power off, unless you have no fear of the consequences of finger grinding gears, merciless sharp edged cams and electrical sparks.<br clear=all>
+=====Gottlieb® Switch Level Nomenclature=====
+[[file:GTBScoreMotorLineDraw.jpg|thumb|left]]
+Gottlieb® names the switch stacks by level and orientation around the circumference of the top cam. At a casual glance, some of the switch stacks cannot be seen, because they are located below another switch stack. Each of the 5 positions around the circumference does NOT have the same number of switches or switch levels as the others.<br>
+Level A- Located at the bottom of the score motor assembly and actuated by the edge of the bottom cam.
+Level B- Positioned just above the "A" level and operated by studs mounted vertically to the bottom of the top cam.
+Level C- Switches actuated by the edge of the Top Cam.
+Level D- Switches operated by vertical studs mounted to the top of the Top Cam.
+Level E- A switch operated by a very long vertical stud mounted to the Top Cam.
+Switches are further identified by the position they occupy around the circumference of the score motor cams. The positions are labeled in a clockwise direction. 1,2,3,3 ½, & 4. A switch may be designated by the schematic by the label 1C, which indicates that the switch in question occupies the switch stack at position 1 (NOT 1 o'clock), riding on Level C, which is operated by the edge of the Top Cam. There may be several switches all occupying the same location, or it may be unique. The numbers and letters have no bearing on the order in which any of the switches control any operation of the machine. Please see the diagrams and photos for a visual reference that may make this clear.
+<br clear=all>
+=====At Rest Machine Position=====
+[[file:GTBSwitchDog.jpg|thumb|left|Gottlieb® switch dog w/o switches attached]]
+In a normal at rest condition, the score motor will be in a position where a “dog” will be resting in one of the 3 notches in the Top Cam, at Level C, Position 1. This switch will be a N.O. or Form “A” switch (as GTB calls it) whose function it is to lock-in the score motor for a 1/3 revolution when a power pulse is applied to the motor, coming from another circuit in the machine. The switch dog that rides along the edge of the cam, “climbs” out of the notch, closing the gap and making an electrical connection through switch 1 C.  When the motor finishes rotating 1/3 of a  revolution, the switch dog drops into the cam slot again, opening the circuit at 1C, thereby stopping the motor. Helping to keep the motor from over-running its desired position, is a single formed switch blade without any wires connected to it, that acts as a motor brake, located at position 3 ½ B. It sometimes happens that this switch is broken, and the game will act erratically. In proper operation, the switch at 3 ½ B contacts a cam stud, just after the switch at 1 C drops into its notch, stopping the motor.<br>
+In function, the score motor acts like a relay, but unlike a relay, the score motor can operate many switches from 1 to 5 times per power pulse. A further benefit of the score motor is that, the score motor supplies sufficient time for the stepper units to complete a step, ensuring proper game scoring and features.<br>
+Most of the switch stacks operate the same for each 1/3 of a revolution of the score motor, but the addition of the studs on the faces of the cams make it possible for a switch to operate only once for each complete revolution, or, if 2 studs are fixed at that level, two times for each revolution.<br>
+Each of the switch dogs have 2 slots in them, making it possible for the manufacturer to vary the timing of the operations that these switches control. These switch dog positions MUST NOT BE CHANGED. If you suspect that the position of a switch in the slot has been altered, in some schematics the proper location for the switch is indicated.
+<br clear=all>
+=====Detailed Operation and Identification of Score Motor Switch Positions=====
+Below is a detailed explanation of the operation of each set of switches in a generic fashion, which may or may not be identical to your machine. Keep in mind that each motor number and letter position may refer to one or several individual switches. Although position 1 has switches that are first in operation, not all the switches at that position follow that sequence of operation.<br>
+Motor 1 A: This switch opens and closes 5 times for each 1/3 revolution of the score motor. The switch at 1A may control a scoring unit directly or in series with other motor switches through a controlling relay. It can also furnish impulses to reset continuous stepper units, to flash lights, or any other purpose where a short duration pulse is needed and timed through another motor switch.<br>
+Motor 1 B: Operates 4th in operational sequence and generally is used to time a scoring function. It can be used in series with other switches to eliminate or carry over the fourth pulse that would occur with motor 1 A.<br>
+Motor 1 C: As discussed above, this is the normal at rest position for the score motor. It functions as the motor override switch, and always operates the motor until 1C opens. This switch insures that the motor always stops at the same relative place, regardless when an external switch opens that triggered it. Additionally, motor 1C opens the replay button, keeping the player from energizing the start circuit until the motor is back to normal. Motor 1C cuts off power to the playfield switches while the motor is “off normal”, to keep scoring from the playfield from interfering with scoring coming through the motor. I may also control lights associated with scoring conditions active only when the motor is off normal.<br>
+This switch will often show a blue spark, especially noticeable in a darkened cabinet, that is a normal consequence of the motor’s EM field collapse when it turns off. Although normal, it causes pits and shortens the life of the contacts of 1C, which may need to be cleaned with a flexstone file or sandpaper, and its gap re-adjusted (if necessary),  for reliable operation. This switch is the first thing that should be investigated when a score motor will not stop running.<br>
+Motor 1 D: Switches at 1D are actuated by studs attached to the top cam. If the 1D switches operate time with the 1st position of 1A, the switch is used to control scoring, or close a circuit to any unit such as a relay, that requires a pulse from motor1A. Motor 1D should be checked and adjusted if necessary, that it closes before motor 1A, and opens after motor 1A is opened.<br>
+If 1D is time coordinated with the 1C at rest position, it is usually used to turn on or off lights related to contacts on the playfield, or change score values of same.<br>
+Motor 1 E: Turns on or off lights for scoring and is not timed with motor 1A.<br>
+Motor 2 A: NOT USED.<br>
+Motor 2 B: Actuated by studs between the two cams and timed to operate between motor 4C and Motor 1C. Often used to hold in scoring, start, or extra ball relays, until they have completed their function. Drop out of these relays then occurs after 4C<br>
+Motor 2 C: This position is timed to the 2nd pulse from motor 1A, & is used to eliminate or carry over this pulse to other scoring circuits. The function of 2C may be to subtract the replay, step the total plays meter, reset a bank of relays, match (replay), or some other purpose that must time with motor 1A. This switch stack operates in the long position of the switch dog, while all the others are usually operated in the short dog position.<br>
+Motor 3 A: NOT USED
+Motor 3 B: This motor position is timed with the 3rd pulse of 1A, and eliminates or carries the pulse to other scoring circuits in the machine. This switch stack may operate kickers, reset banks of relays, etc.
+Motor 3 C: NOT USED
+Motor 3 D: Operates with the motor at rest to turn on or off lights & control scoring, and may be used as an anti-cycle switch for a roto unit. Is not timed with Motor 1A.
+Motor 3 E: May be used instead of, or in addition to 3D, and serves the same function.
+Motor 4 A: This position is used as an alternative to 1A, and is timed to alternate with 1A. By operating this way, it reduces electrical load at any one time, due to this intentional staggering of operation with 1A. It may also flash lights when the motor is running, or in coordination with other relays.
+Motor 4 B:This motor position is timed with the 3rd pulse from 1A and is used together with motor 3B. It is often used in the extra count circuit.
+Motor 4 C: This position is timed with 1A in the final 5th pulse. It controls match, scoring, extra chute count, bank reset and other functions.
+Motor 4 D: Operates in the rest position and therefore not timed to 1A. It controls lights, changes scoring, etc.
+Games will always have exceptions and additional uses for the score motor at the above positions, and this section is meant to give an idea of the order of switch operation on the score motor. Ordinarily, no adjustment is needed in these switch positions, but attention should be paid to proper gaps for each leaf switch.
+<br clear=all>
+====Williams Score Motors====
+=====Williams Horizontal Cam Score Motor=====
+Early on, Williams used a horizontal cam score motor similar to the Gottlieb score motor.  This style of score motor assembly was abandoned in the early 60's, and replaced with the more prevalent vertical cam system.<br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=3 caption="Williams Horizontal Cam Score Motor Assembly">
+File:WMSScoreMotor.jpg|A Williams Score motor mounted underneath the playfield from a 1950 Dreamy (only 2 cams used)
+File:WMSScoreMotorShortStop.jpg|A Williams Score Motor from a 1958 Short-Stop (3 cams used - top view)
+File:WMSScoreMotorShortStopSide.jpg|A Williams Score Motor from a 1958 Short-Stop (3 cams used - side view)
+</gallery>
+</center>
+<br clear=all>
+=====Williams Vertical Cam Score Motor=====
+The Williams vertical cam EM score motor is very similar to the Bally EM score motor. Each motor has an "index" cam, located next to the actual motor. Adjacent to the index cam are 6 timing cams. The first 5 of these cams "drop out" at different points during a score motor revolution. The 6th cam drops out at the same time as the 5th cam. Adjacent to the 6th cam, the last two cams are "impulse" cams, used to carry out game functions requiring 5 pulses during a half revolution of the score motor, like bonus countdown, 50/500/5000 points, and score reel resets. The two impulse cams share the same timing, but typically the switch stack over the 7th cam is mounted forward of the switch stack over the 8th cam, causing the timing of these two cams to be exactly out of phase.
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=3 caption="Three views of a typical Williams Score Motor (1971 Stardust)">
+File:WilliamsScoreMotor1.jpg
+File:WilliamsScoreMotorTopView.jpg|Top View. Note that some switch stacks are further forward than others to adjust the timing.
+File:WilliamsScoreMotor.jpg
+</gallery>
+</center>
+<br clear=all>
+====Bally Score Motor====
+stub (describe switch positions and general make up like GTB score motor section)<br>
+Bally score motor switches have a number and letter, for example 4C.  They are indicated on the schematics with a circle around the switch.
+The number indicates the cam number.  The letter indicates the position in
+the switch stack, with A being the bottom, or closest to the cam.  Switch 4C will be on the fourth cam, third switch in the stack.  Cam #1 is the cam closest to the motor.
+The schematics contain a timing diagram for the score motor.  The cam position are shown in the rows, numbered along the left side.  The columns indicate the rotational position of the cams.  Zero is the "at rest", or home position.  The black squares indicate the position that the switches on the cam operate.
+Bally score motors from 1965 to 1977 operate for 180 degrees for each score motor cycle.  The timing diagram depicts one full rotation of the score motor which is two score motor cycles.  Both cycles provide the same switch operation.
+[[File:bally_score_motor_timing_1975.jpg|thumb|left|300px|Bally Score Motor Timing Diagram]]<br clear=all>
+Not all, but the vast majority of Bally score motors used in pinball machines use a vertical cam system.  Switch stacks are then placed on the cams closest to the score motor outward.  Below is an example of switch stack 1 on a Bally score motor in both at rest and motor running positions.  This will give a general idea how normally open, normally closed, and make-break switches react while riding on a score motor cam.<br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=3 caption="Three views of a typical Bally Score Motor (1977 Night Rider)">
+File:BallyScoreMotorFrontView.jpg
+File:BallyScoreMotorTopView.jpg|Top View. Unlike the Williams Score Motor, all switch stack actuators on this Bally Score Motor line up.
+File:BallyScoreMotor3-4View.jpg
+</gallery>
+</center>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=2 caption="Bally Score Motor Switch Stack 1">
+File:Bally Motor Switch 1 At Rest.JPG|Score Motor at rest
+File:Bally Motor Switch 1 Motor Running.JPG|Score motor running
+</gallery>
+</center>
+=====Bally Motor Switch Level Nomenclature=====
+[[File:Bally Motor Switch Levels.JPG|thumb|left|200px|Bally Score Motor Switch Levels Identified]]<br>
+Bally score motor switch levels are identical to Williams.  Starting with the switch level located closest to the motor cams, the first level is referred to as "A".  Any switches added above "A", are B, C, D, E, and so on.
+<br clear=all>
+====Chicago Coin Score Motor====
+stub (describe switch positions and general make up like GTB score motor section)<br>
+===Stepper Units===
+There are 3 basic types of steppers used in EM machines.
+*Step up / reset stepper
+*Step up / step down stepper
+*Continuous stepper
+Additionally, Williams made a three-mode stepper -- Step Up / Step Down / Reset.  The Reset mode is enabled by a rod connected to a relay plate.  When the relay is enabled, the rod holds the step-down lever away from the gear, allowing it to sweep all the way back to its origin.
+One thing that all steppers have in common is that then need to work well for you to be happy with the way your game functions.  In fact, most of the functions are so integral to the game that your game will be "broken" if the steppers do not work.  Most games cannot get through a reset sequence unless the score reels reset.  Additionally, they might not advance to the next ball if the bonus is not counted down correctly.  In order for a stepper to work correctly, it must be relatively clean and free of sticky grease and oil.  The electrical contacts must be clean and should be coated with some sort of dielectric grease.  The coil and plunger need to function smoothly.  Finally, it needs to step once and only once per actuation.  There are often adjustments to stops and coil locations that can be made to ensure this.  When you actuate a stepper by hand, it needs to move smartly from by one step to the next.  If this doesn't happen, it is time to rebuild your stepper.
+<br>
+====Is Your Gottlieb Stepper Unit Missing a Tooth?====
+[[File:GottliebPioneerBonusUnitCog.jpg ‎|left|thumb|300px|Gottlieb® Bonus Unit Stepper Close-Up. <i>Image courtesy of Rob Madden</i>.]]<br>
+No.<br>
+Gottlieb® steppers are built like tanks. The teeth on the main cog <i><b>never</b></i> break.
+Some steppers, like the bonus unit pictured at left in particular, have a gap machined into the stepper perimeter that prevents the stepper from being stepped up more than 15 steps. That number of steps will be familiar as the maximum bonus count that can be accumulated on Gottlieb® bonus games.
+<br clear=all>
+====Step Up / Reset Stepper====
+The step up/reset stepper is generally used when you only need to count up, not down.  An example of the might be on a ball count unit that is used on a replay machine.  For this application, you count up to 3 or 5 balls played, depending on the setting, then reset to 0 or 1 ball as part of the start up sequence.  Step up/reset steppers are also used for the 100K unit on a Gottlieb® Woodrail.   They are also occasionally used for bonus counters with the "scan style" bonus used on some later Gottlieb® games, like Target Alpha or Solar City and certainly in other places as well.  Gottlieb® coin unit steppers came in two types of variants: step up, reset and step up, step down.  Some Bally machines used a "Name Unit" which is a Step-up/Reset stepper for tracking the bonus on games that involved spelling out a the letters of a word.<br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Gottlieb® Step Up / Reset Stepper">
+File:Solar city bonus unit back.jpg|Gottlieb® Bonus Unit (Target Alpha Style - Wiper Side)
+File:Solar city bonus unit front.jpg|Gottlieb® Bonus Unit (Target Alpha Style - Business Side)
+File:GTB Balls Played Unit Wiper Side.JPG|Gottlieb® Balls Played Unit (Later Version - Wiper Side)
+File:GTB Balls Played Unit Business Side.JPG|Gottlieb® Balls Played Unit (Later Version - Business Side)
+File:GTB Ball Count Unit Wiper Side 1.JPG|Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit (Single Player Replay - Wiper Side)<br>(At Ball 1 Position)
+File:GTB ball count unit ball 1.JPG|Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit (Single Player Replay - Business Side)<br>(At Ball 1 Position)
+File:GTB Coin Unit Wiper Side.JPG|Gottlieb® Coin Unit (Wiper Side) Note that the coin unit in the pic is shown in its reset position.  The snowshoes of the wiper are properly indexed on the wiper board.
+File:GTB Coin Unit Front.JPG|Gottlieb® Coin Unit (Business Side)
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Williams Step Up / Reset Steppers">
+File:Wms Player Unit Wiper Side.jpg|Williams 1970's Player Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:Wms_Player_Unit_Wiper_Contacts.jpg|Williams 1970's Player Unit (Wiper Contacts)
+File:Wms Player Unit Mech Side.jpg|Williams 1970's Player Unit (Business Side)
+File:WMS Ball Count Unit Wiper Side.JPG|Williams 1960's Ball Count Unit (Multi-Player Wiper Side)
+File:WMS Ball Count Unit Biz Side.JPG|Williams 1960's Ball Count Unit (Multi-Player Business Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Williams 1960's Coin Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:WMS Coin Unit Biz Side.JPG|Williams 1960's Coin Unit (Business Side)
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Williams Step Up / Step Down / Reset Steppers">
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Williams Grand Prix Bonus Unit (1 of 2) (Wiper Side)
+File:WilliamsStepperWithKnockoff.jpg|Williams Bonus Unit (with "knock-off" coil, Grand Prix, Stardust)
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Bally Step Up / Reset Steppers">
+File:BallyPlayerUnitTraceSide.jpg|Bally Player Up Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:BallyPlayerUnitBusinessSide.jpg|Bally Player Up Unit (Business Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Bally Ball Count Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Bally Ball Count (Business Side)
+File:BallyCoinUnitTraceSide.jpg|Bally Coin Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:BallyCoinUnitBusinessSide.jpg|Bally Coin Unit (Business Side)
+File:BallyNameWiper.JPG|Bally Name Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:BallyNameBusiness.JPG|Bally Name Unit (Business Side)
+</gallery>
+</center>
+<br>
+=====Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit Wiper and Switch States Explained=====
+In the following image gallery, a Gottlieb® ball count unit is shown in the various different states.  This applies to Gottlieb® single player replay games, where an automatic ball lift is used [King of Diamonds (1/67) to T.K.O. (3/79)].<br>
+*Upon the game resetting, the ball count unit's reset coil is pulsed, and the stepper wiper travels to the position one less than the first rivet of the upper rivet pairs.  On the switch side, the zero position ball count unit switches open, and the 6th position ball count unit switch is closed.  While the game is in this state, there is no power to the playfield coils, except any kick out holes on the playfield.
+*Once the ball passes over the trough switch for the 1st time, the ball count unit step up coil pulses once.  This advances the wiper one step clockwise.  At this point, the zero position ball count unit switches close.  Likewise, the 6th position ball count unit switch remains closed. Each time the ball passes over the trough switch, the wiper advances one position.  The switch states of the zero position and 6th position ball count unit switches are all closed during the course of gameplay.
+*When the last ball being played drains to the outhole, the wiper moves to the 6th rivet pair position.  For 3-ball settings, the ball count unit step-up coil pulses 3 additional times from the 3rd rivet pair position.  For 5-ball settings, the ball count unit step-up coil pulses only once from the 5th rivet pair position.  Once the wiper reaches the 6th rivet pair position, the 6th position ball count unit switch on the back side opens.  When both these instances occur, the power is shut off to the playfield, the game over light is illuminated, signalling the end of the game.
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=3 caption="Switch States of a Gottlieb® Single Player Ball Count Unit (Replay Game) - 1975 Gottlieb® Atlantis">
+File:GTB ball count unit ball 0 wiper side.JPG|Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit at the Zero Position - Wiper Side
+File:GTB Ball Count Unit Wiper Side 1.JPG|Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit at the 1st Ball Position - Wiper Side
+File:GTB ball count unit ball 6 wiper side.JPG|Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit at the 6th Ball (Game Over) Position - Wiper Side
+File:GTB ball count unit ball 0.JPG|Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit at the Zero Position - Switch Side
+File:GTB ball count unit ball 1.JPG|Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit at the 1st Ball Position - Switch Side
+File:GTB ball count unit ball 6.JPG|Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit at the 6th Ball (Game Over) Position - Switch Side
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<br clear=all>
+====Step Up / Step Down Stepper====
+A step up/step down stepper is possibly a little more common than the step up/reset style.  A typical application would be as the ball count unit on an Add-A-Ball game.  Here, it would step up the ball count to 5 (or 9), then step down one at a time as balls are used and step up one at a time as balls are earned.  Another common application would be to count bonus points, where it steps up as bonus points are earned, and steps down at the end of the ball or whenever the bonus is collected.  The most common application of all is to count the credits on a machine.<br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Gottlieb® Step Up / Step Down Steppers">
+File:GTB Replay Unit Drum Side.JPG|Gottlieb® Replay (Credit) Unit (Drum Side)
+File:GTB Replay Unit Business Side.JPG|Gottlieb® Replay (Credit) Unit  (Business Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Gottlieb® Bonus Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Gottlieb® Bonus Unit (Business Side)
+File:GTB Ball Count AAB Wiper Side.JPG|Gottlieb® Add-A-Ball Ball Count Unit (Free Fall - Wiper Side)
+File:GTB Ball Count AAB Switch Side.JPG|Gottlieb® Add-A-Ball Ball Count Unit (Free Fall - Business Side)
+File:GTB Balls Played Unit Dancing Lady.JPG|Gottlieb® Balls Played Unit (Dancing Lady - Wiper Side)
+File:GTB Balls Played Biz Side.jpg|Gottlieb® Balls Played Unit (Dancing Lady - Business Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Gottlieb® Coin Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Gottlieb® Coin Unit (Business Side)
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Bally Step Up / Step Down Steppers">
+File:BallyCreditUnitWheelSide.jpg|Bally Credit Unit (Drum Side)
+File:BallyCreditUnitBusinessSide.jpg|Bally Credit Unit (Business Side)
+File:BLY Bonus Stepper Wiper Side.JPG|Bally Bonus Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:BLY Bonus Stepper Business Side.JPG|Bally Bonus Unit (Business Side)
+</gallery>
+</center>
+<br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Williams Step Up / Step Down Steppers">
+File:WMS_Credit_Unit_Drum_Side.JPG|Williams Credit Unit (Drum Side)
+File:WMS Credit Unit Business End.JPG|Williams Credit Unit (Business Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Williams Bonus Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Williams Bonus Unit (Business Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Williams Ball Count Unit (Single Player Wiper Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Williams Ball Count Unit (Single Player Business Side)
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<br>
+=====Gottlieb® Credit Unit (Drum type) Switch States Explained=====
+In the following image gallery, a Gottlieb® credit unit is shown in the various different states.  This applies to Gottlieb® replay games, where a drum style credit unit is used.  This unit is used on all games from 1950-1979.  The exceptions are games starting with Super Soccer (1/75) until Sure Shot (3/76), which use the "half-moon" style of credit unit.<br>
+*Details to be added
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=3 caption="Switch States of a Gottlieb® (Drum type) Credit Unit (Replay Game) - 1975 Gottlieb® Atlantis">
+File:GTB credit unit at zero.JPG|Gottlieb® Credit Unit at the Zero Position
+File:GTB credit unit greater than zero.JPG|Gottlieb® Credit Unit at the 1 Credit Position (Same switch states for any value greater than zero, but less than the maximum)
+File:GTB credit unit at maximum.JPG|Gottlieb® Credit Unit at the Maximum Credit Position (Adjustable)
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<br clear=all>
+=====Williams Credit Unit Examples=====
+As mentioned previously, the credit unit is a common example of a step up/step down stepper.  Since the various states of the credit unit are not adequately illustrated in Williams schematics or manuals, a few examples are provided below.  In general these credit units work by causing a cog or pin on the stepper wheel to move clockwise when credits are added (the step up coil pulses once per credit) and counter-clockwise when credits are decremented (the step down coil pulses once per credit).  This cog then actuates a M/B "zero position switch" to indicate whether there are or are not credits on the machine.  Williams credit units also have a "max credit" switch which is opened by a second cog that turns clockwise.  This switch opens the circuit and prevents additional credits from being added to the machine.  The max credit cog is adjustable by the owner/operator.  Machines which use a credit light located on the lower ball apron (pitch & bat games included) will have an additional NC switch that is actuated in tandem with the M/B switch.  The light is used as a quick visual identifier when credits remain on the game.  As long as one or more credits remain, the light is on.  When this switch on the credit opens (zero credits on the machine) the lamp on the apron is no longer illuminated.
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=3 caption="Example of 1969 ''Fast Ball'' Credit Unit">
+File:WMS Credit Unit Swx Side 0.JPG|1969 Wms Credit Unit showing ZERO credits
+File:WMS-Credit-Unit-Swx-Side-CR.JPG|1969 Wms Credit Unit showing credits
+File:WMS-Credit-Unit-Swx-Side-MX.JPG|1969 Wms Credit Unit showing MAX credits
+</gallery>
+</center>
+<br clear=all>
+====Continuous Stepper====
+By far the most common stepper is the continuous stepper.  They come large and small.   The small unit is the infamous, often cursed and never loved AS stepper on later Gottlieb® games.  This is used most often for the match feature and occasionally as part of the circuit for spinner scoring.  The AS unit can often be removed from the game by unplugging a pair of Jones plugs.  In theory this was done so that the AS match unit could be removed from areas where matches for free games were not allowed.  As a practical matter, it is probably a good thing as these miserable little Rube Goldbergian contraptions will cause you grief at some point and will need to be rebuilt, preferably in a good light.  Good lighting is required because when the AS relay malfunctions and needs to be rebuilt, it will get its last lick in by flinging a part of itself across the floor in a desperate suicidal mission to permanently bring your game down.<br>
+Luckily, full size continuous steppers are much more common than their diminutive and cantankerous smaller brothers.  The full size stepper are often found in the match feature of earlier Gottlieb® and Williams games, often ringing the bell while also stepping along merrily with the smallest score increment (1 or 10 points).  They are also used in Gottlieb® woodrails to track the 10K points and send a signal over to the 100K stepper when it steps past 90K and needs to carry the decade over.  Another common application is in the "player unit" on multi-player Gottlieb® games.<br>
+Bally 0-to-9 match units from the 1960's sometimes included a bell which rang each time that digit was scored.<br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Gottlieb® Continuous Steppers">
+File:GTB 0-9 Unit Wiper Side.JPG|Gottlieb® 0-9 (Match) Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:GTB 0-9 Unit Business Side.JPG|Gottlieb® 0-9 (Match) Unit (Business Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Gottlieb® Woodrail 10K Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Gottlieb® Woodrail 10K Unit (Business Side)
+File:GTB Player Unit Wiper Side.jpg|Gottlieb® Player Unit from Target Alpha (Wiper Side)
+File:GTB Player Unit Switch Stacks.jpg|Gottlieb® Player Unit from Target Alpha (Cam and Switch Stack Side)
+File:GTB AS Unit.JPG|Gottlieb® AS Stepper Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:GTB AS Relay Circuit Baord Removed.JPG|Gottlieb® AS Stepper Unit (PCB Removed)
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Williams Continuous Steppers">
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Williams 0-9 Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Williams 0-9 Unit (Business Side)
+File:WMS 00-90 Unit Top View.JPG|Williams 00-90 Unit (Top View)
+File:WMS 00-90 Unit Wiper Side.JPG|Williams 00-90 Unit (Wiper View)
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Bally Continuous Stepppers">
+File:Bally0-9MatchWiper.JPG|Bally 0-9 Match Unit (Wiper Side)
+File:Bally0-9MatchBusiness.JPG|Bally 0-9 Match Unit (Business Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Bally 00-90 (Match) Unit<br>(Wiper Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Bally 00-90 (Match) Unit<br>(Business Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Bally Spinner Unit<br>(Wiper Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Bally Spinner Unit<br>(Business Side)
+File:BallyAdvance.JPG|Bally Advance Unit (Continuous Stepper)
+<!-- File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Bally Match Unit (Top View) -->
+<!-- File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Bally Match Unit (Wiper View) -->
+<!-- a 0-9 unit IS a match unit.  It can also be used as a spinner unit. --*greywolf; -->
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<small><i>
+[It is worth noting that on later Bally games (1974 onward), the 0-9 unit and the spinner score units are, by and large, score reel units without the score reel.]<br>
+</i></small>
+=====Score Reels=====
+By far the most common use of the continuous stepper is in the score reels.  In fact, it is so common that score reel rebuilding was given its own section in the Pinwiki.  A continuous stepper often is used very heavily, which means they are subject to wear out – possibly more than other failure modes such as getting gunked up.<br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Gottlieb® Score Reels">
+File:RatTrapScrews.jpg|Gottlieb® Metal "Rat Trap" Reel Unit
+File:GTBdecagonScoreReel No Boar.jpg|Gottlieb® Decagon Reel w/o circuit board (First Generation - 10-Sided Reel Drum)
+File:GTBdecagonScoreReel.jpg|Gottlieb® Decagon Reel incl. circuit board (First Generation - 10-Sided Reel Drum)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Gottlieb® Decagon Reel (Second Generation - Round Reel Drum)
+File:GTB New Decagon Drum Side.JPG|Gottlieb® Decagon Reel (Third Generation)
+File:GTB New Decagon Back.JPG|Gottlieb® Decagon Reel (Third Generation) - Back Side (Note that the reel can be advanced via the small lever which protrudes through the metal cage of the reel.)
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Williams Score Reels">
+File:WMS 5 inch complete reel.JPG|Williams 5" Metal Reel (Drum Side)
+File:WMS 4 in reel.JPG|Williams 4" Plastic Reel (Drum Side)
+File:WMS 4 in reel back.JPG|Williams 4" Plastic Reel (Back Side)
+File:WMS 3 in reel.JPG|Williams 3" Plastic Reel (Drum Side - No PCB)
+File:WMS 3 in reel back.JPG|Williams 3" Plastic Reel (Back Side - No PCB)
+File:WMS 3 in reel with PCB.JPG|Williams 3" Plastic Reel (Drum Side - With PCB)
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Bally Score Reels">
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Bally Early 60's Score Reel (Drum Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Bally Early 60's Score Reel (Back Side)
+File:BLY 3in Reel Drum Side.JPG|Bally Late 60's / Early 70's Score Reel (Drum Side)
+File:BLY 3in Reel Back.JPG|Bally Late 60's / Early 70's Score Reel (Back Side)
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=4 caption="Chicago Coin Score Reels">
+File:CCM_ScoreReel_front.jpg|Early 70's 3 inch Chicago Coin Score Reel (Drum Side)
+File:CCM_ScoreReel_back.jpg|Early 70's 3 inch Chicago Coin Score Reel (Back Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Chicago Coin Score Reel (Drum Side)
+File:Placeholder.jpg|Placeholder for Chicago Coin Score Reel (Back Side)
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<br clear=all>
+===Flippers===
+====Different Styles of Flipper Assemblies====
+{|
+|[[File:GottliebSurfSideFlipperLowe.jpg|thumb|Late Style 2" Gottlieb® Flipper from 1967 Surf Side]]||[[File:GottliebSurfSideFlipperUpper.jpg|thumb|Late Style 2" Gottlieb® Upper Flipper from 1967 Surf Side. Note- Lack of EOS switch & unusual triangular bakelite link]]
+|[[file:WMSdreamyFlippers.jpg|thumb|Early example of reversed "impulse" flipper from a 1950 Williams Dreamy. This coil has a single winding, making it impossible to hold the flippers in an up position. The EOS switch breaks the current to the coil, so the player can only "slap" the pinball with both flippers at the same time. Either cabinet switch would operate both flippers.]]||
+[[File:BallyZipper.JPG|thumb|Bally "Zipper-Flipper" assembly from 1967 Rocket III.  The left and right flipper assemblies (including solenoids and EOS switches) are mounted on independent brackets which can be pulled together or pushed apart by another pair of solenoids.]]
+|}
+<br clear=all>
+===Roto Target===
+===Vari-Target===
+{|
+|[[File:GTB Vari.JPG|thumb|left|200px|Playfield view of a Gottlieb® vari-target]]
+|[[File:GTBVariTargetBelow.jpg|thumb|left|200px|Underside view of a Gottlieb® vari-target]]
+|}
+<br clear=all>
 ===The Start Up Sequence Explained===
-Regardless of a particular machine's manufacturer, every EM pinball machine has a start up sequence.  When a coin is inserted, if the coin switch is set for one game per coin denomination, or a credit button pushed, an EM pinball machine has to successfully complete the start up sequence, before a game can properly begin.  Analogous to an EM's start up sequence is a computer booting up, and loading an operating system successfully.<br>
+Regardless of a particular machine's manufacturer, every EM pinball machine has a start up sequence.  When a coin is inserted (if the coin switch is set for one game per coin) or a credit button pushed, an EM pinball machine has to successfully complete the start up sequence before a game can properly begin.  Analogous to an EM's start up sequence is a computer booting up, and loading an operating system successfully.<br>
 The primary events which occur during the start up sequence are:
-#Resetting all the score reels to zero, or resetting lamp scoring values or projected scoring values to zero on machines manufactured prior to the use of score reels.
+#Resetting all the score reels to zero, or resetting lamp scoring values or lamp projected scoring values (games from the 1930's and 1940's in some cases) to zero on machines manufactured prior to the use of score reels.
-#Resetting the ball count to ball 1 player 1 on multi-player games; resetting the ball count to 1 on single player games, where the ball count unit increments throughout a game; or setting the ball count to the maximum balls allowed per game on games where the ball count unit decrements throughout a game.  In the case of older machines where a manual ball lift assembly was used, releasing the ball in multi-player games or balls in single player games.
+#Resetting the ball count to ball 1, player 1 or ball 1 minus 1, player 1 on multi-player games; resetting the ball count to ball 1 or ball 1 minus 1 (ball count unit does not reset to 1; it advances to 1, once ball has closed switch on ball trough in most cases) on single player games, where the ball count unit increments throughout a game; or setting the ball count to the maximum balls allowed per game on games where the ball count unit decrements throughout a game.  In the case of older machines where a manual ball lift assembly was used, advancing when releasing the ball in multi-player games or balls in single player games.
 #Resetting game progressive sequences and features for machines which do not have game-to-game, progressive, [http://pinwiki.com/wiki/index.php?title=Glossary#C carry over game features / sequences].
 #Resetting game specific mechanical assemblies such as single drop targets, drop target banks, vari-target, ball lane gates, etc.
 #Allowing power to pass to the playfield mechanisms
-Although some of the above events may not occur, but a game will successfully start and play.  These types of issues can usually be overcome rather easily.  The more difficult problems are when a particular event or events do not occur or halt the process during start up, and the score motor continues to run.  It is up to the repair tech to determine at what point the start up sequence has stalled or failed.<br>
+Although some of the above events may not occur, a game can still start and play.  These types of issues can usually be overcome rather easily.  The more difficult problems are when a particular event or events do not occur or halt the process during start up and the score motor continues to run.  It is up to the repair tech to determine at what point the start up sequence has stalled or failed.<br>
+Below are some game specific [[EM_Repair#Start_Up_Sequences | start up sequences]].  These start up sequences can be applied to similar machines from the same manufacturer and era.  In most cases, the start up sequence is explained in the machine's manual, if a manual was created for it.<br>
+An EM pinball enthusist created YouTube videos which illustrate the details of Gottlieb and Williams late 70's 4-player start up sequences.  The first is based on a [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IAC54vlyumI Gottlieb Spirit of 76], and the second is based on a [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=seoCS2bIuvw Williams Space Mission].  Again, the information will apply to similar machines from the same manufacturer and era.
+<br clear=all>
+===Gottlieb® Solenoid Coil & Sleeve Chart===
-Below are some game specific start up sequences.  These start up sequences can be applied to similar machines from the same manufacturer and era.  In most cases, the start up sequence is explained in the machine's manual, if a manual was created for it.<br>
+{| class="wikitable"
+|-
+! Coil
+! Sleeve
+! Length
+|-
+| A-1496
+| A-5065
+| 1 7/8"
+|-
+| A-4893
+| A-5064
+| 1 21/32" (note B)
+|-
+| A-5141
+| A-5064
+|1 21/32" (note B)
+|-
+| A-5143
+| A-5142
+| 2 3/4" w/collar*
+|-
+| A-5193
+| A-5171
+| 1 19/32" (note B)
+|-
+| A-5194
+| A-5064
+| 1 21/32" (note B)
+|-
+| A-5195
+| A-5064
+| 1 21/32" (note B)
+|-
+| A-5196
+| A-5172
+| 2 ½"
+|-
+| A-5197
+| A-5172
+| 2 ½"
+|-
+| A-7800
+| A-5172
+| 2 ½"
+|-
+| A-9154
+| A-8111
+| 1 1/4"
+|-
+| A-9479
+| A-5172
+| 2 ½"
+|-
+| ????
+| A-6087
+| 1 1/4" w/collar*
+|-
+| A-15259
+| A-8111
+| 1 1/4"
+|-
+| A-15555
+| A-5172
+| 2 1/2"
+|}
+Where noted with an asterisk*, sleeve has a collar 1/4" from end.<br>
+'''Note B:''' Original GTB specs are 1 19/32" & 1 21/32" but SUBSTITUTE 1 5/8" instead. Also, SUBSTITUTE 2" for 1 31/32" w/sleeve. <br>
+Older Gottlieb® and Williams, et al; may use a brass sleeve. If it can be removed, a nylon one can be used, but some brass sleeves are still available.
+Additional information on Gottlieb® coils & sleeves can be found [http://pbresource.com/coilsleeve.html here.]
+===Williams Solenoid Coil & Sleeve Chart===
+====24 Volt Coils====
+{| class="wikitable"
+|-
+! Coil Number
+! WMS P/N
+! Length
+|-
+| A 21-550
+ | 3 A-7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| A 22-550
+| 3 A-7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| A 23-600
+| 3 A-7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| A 23-650
+| 3 A-7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| A 26-1350
+| 3 A-7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| A1 23-750
+| 3 A-7067
+| 1 5/8- 2"
+|-
+| A2 23-750
+| 3 A 7067-1
+| 2 1/2-2 5/8"
+|-
+| A6 22-550
+| 3 A-7067-4
+| ???
+|-
+| A 5 26-1350
+| 3 A 7067-3
+| 1 9/16- 1 13/16"
+|-
+| B 26-800
+| 3 A 7066-1
+| 1 1/4"
+|-
+| C2 26-800
+| 3 A 7067-2
+| ???
+|-
+| DU 23-740
+| 3 A 7066-2
+| ???
+|-
+| FL 21-28
+| 3 A 7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| G 22-550
+| 3 A 7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| G 23-600
+| 3 A 7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| G 23-650
+| 3 A 7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| G 23-750
+| 3 A 7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| G 24-750
+| 3 A 7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| G 24-850
+| 3 A 7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|}
+<br>
+====50 Volt Coils====
+{| class="wikitable"
+|-
+! Coil Number
+! WMS P/N
+! Length
+|-
+| A 24-975
+| 2 A-2167-4
+| 1 5/8" Aluminum*
+|-
+| A 25-900
+| 3 A-7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| A 25-1000
+| 2 A-2167-4
+| 1 5/8" Aluminum*
+|-
+| A 26-1100
+| 3 A-7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| A 26-1200
+| 3 A-7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| A1 26-1100
+| 3 A-7067-1
+| 2 ½- 2 5/8"
+|-
+| A2 26-1100
+| 3 A-7067-1
+| 2 ½- 2 5/8"
+|-
+| A2 26-1350
+| 3 A-7067-1
+| 2 ½- 2 5/8"
+|-
+| A3-25-950
+| 3 A-7067-1
+| 2 ½- 2 5/8"
+|-
+| A 30-2700
+| 3 A-7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| B 27-1100
+| 3 A-7066-1
+| 1 1/4"
+|-
+| B 28-1450
+| 3 A-7066-1
+| 1 1/4"
+|-
+| B 29-1600
+| 3 A-7066-1
+| 1 1/4"
+|-
+| C 27-1300
+| 3 A-7067-2
+| 1 3/8" w/collar*
+|-
+| C 30-2400
+| 3 A-7067-2
+| 1 3/8" w/collar*
+|-
+| D 22-1150
+| 2 A-2168
+| 2 1/4" Aluminum*
+|-
+| D 24-1150
+| 2 A-2168
+| 2 1/4" Aluminum*
+|-
+| D 24-1400
+| 2 A-2168
+| 2 1/4" Aluminum*
+|-
+| D 24-1600
+| 2 A-2168
+| 2 1/4" Aluminum*
+|-
+| DU 26-1350
+| 3 A-7066-2
+| 1 13/16"
+|-
+| FL 25-31
+| 3 A-7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| FL 26-950/250
+| 2 A-2167-4
+| 1 5/8" Aluminum*
+|-
+| G 25-1100
+| 3 A-7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| G1 25-1100
+| 3 A-7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|-
+| G 26-1400
+| 3 A-7066
+| 1 3/4"
+|}
+The asterisk(*) denotes a best guess.
+===Setting your EM Machine to "High Tap"===
+EM machines provide a second transformer output for coil voltages called "High Tap."  This voltage is intended for locations that have low line voltage, usually due to having a string of machines connected to the same electrical circuit.  A location with modern wiring should not have low line voltage.  By moving the power wire for the coils from the normal (25V) output to the high tap output, coil voltage is increased by about two volts.
+In some cases, owners or operators may have switched a machine to "high tap" to overcome weak flippers or pop bumbers.  This is not recommended. The root cause of the problem should be addressed by rebuilding the flippers and/or pop bumpers.
+In other cases the machine may have been "high tapped" to increase the speed of the game play. It's your game, so set it however you like. It can always be changed back. Be advised that ball speeds over and above those intended by the original designers increase the possibility of breaking targets, drop targets and playfield plastics. This is also true when "juiced up" flipper coils are used such as the Gottlieb A-5141 "yellow dot" or "orange dot" coils made by the Pinball Resource.
+==EM Concepts of Operation==
+===Basic Relay Logic===
+[[file:SealInSwitch.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Illustrative example of how "seal-in" switches are used.]]
+The diagram at left shows several key concepts to help understand how an EM game operates.
+A simple example of how a game can score 5000 points (5, 50, or 500 too) begins with the #1 rollover switch, shown as "normally open" (NO), and with a "Start" arrow pointing to it.
+When the rollover switch closes, the circuit to the coil on relay "A" is completed, and A energizes. From the relay information table, we see that relay A has three normally open (i.e. "3A", or 3 form A) switches, all of which are shown in the diagram. All of these switches close when A energizes.
+The top switch is the "seal in" switch for the A relay. Via the "normally closed" (NC) switch at motor 2B, and the now closed seal in switch on A, the A relay will remain energized.
+The middle switch on A, shown in the diagram, closes too. It will complete the circuit to energize L each time that the switch at motor 1A closes.
+The bottom switch on A shown in the diagram closes and causes the score motor to begin running. The score motor will continue to run through a complete cycle via the switch at motor 1C. The switch at motor 1C closes when the score motor begins to turn, by virtue of a cam that raises, thereby closing the switch. Gottlieb motors revolve 1/3 of a revolution to complete a typical action. Bally and Williams score motors revolve 1/2 of a revolution to complete a typical action. The switch at motor 1C is called the "motor runout switch" because it guarantees that the motor will complete the full 1/3 revolution.
+Gottlieb score motors pulse switches at level A on the score motor 5 times per 1/3 revolution. Bally and Williams score motors pulse switches on the "impulse" cam 5 times per 1/2 revolution. These switches are used to score more than a single 1, 10, 100, or 1000...typically 5, 50, 500, or 5000.
+As the score motor turns, the switch at motor 1A will close 5 times in succession. When the switch closes, it completes the circuit to L, the 1000 point relay. Subsequent circuitry associated with the 1000 point relay causes the score reels to increment, the 1000 point chime to ring, and perhaps increment the 10000 point score reel (via a 9th position switch).
+This basic kind of operation can be extended to include much more complex game actions. You will find that this circuit implementation is reused many times.
+<br clear=all>
 ===Start Up Sequences===
-The following is the start-up sequence for a Gottlieb Southern Belle.  The Southern Belle is a woodrail from 1955 with lightbox scoring.  In other words, it has no score reels.  Other Gottlieb woodrails from this era will be similar, but not exactly the same.  You will need to consult your schematic and figure out the exact sequence if it differs slightly from the one below:
+The following is the start-up sequence for a Gottlieb® Southern Belle.  The Southern Belle is a woodrail from 1955 with lightbox scoring.  In other words, it has no score reels.  Other Gottlieb® woodrails from this era will be similar, but not exactly the same.  You will need to consult your schematic and figure out the exact sequence if it differs slightly from the one below:
@@ Line 65: / Line 1,091: @@
-The following is the start-up sequence for a Gottlieb Roto Pool from 1958.  You can see it is similar, but not exactly the same as the Southern Belle sequence.
+The following is the start-up sequence for a Gottlieb® Roto Pool from 1958.  You can see it is similar, but not exactly the same as the Southern Belle sequence.
@@ Line 86: / Line 1,112: @@
 .	The U relay releases – the 10K unit can no longer be pulsed though the switch on the U relay.
-.	The N flip/flop switch activates at some point, releasing the ball release coil  (IMO, this is a poor design, leading to a burnt coil for any number of reasons (no FMEAs at Gottlieb?)
+.	The N flip/flop switch activates at some point, releasing the ball release coil  (IMO, this is a poor design, leading to a burnt coil for any number of reasons (no FMEAs at Gottlieb®?)
-'''1960s Gottlieb Add-A-Ball Start-Up Sequence (Flipper Clown)'''
+'''1960s Gottlieb® Add-A-Ball Start-Up Sequence (Flipper Clown)'''
 #COIN CHUTE energizes START (S) relay.  If HOLD (R) relay is not energized it will energize and hold on through it's own switch.
@@ Line 96: / Line 1,122: @@
 #RELAY BANK resets through S and SCORE MOTOR switches 2C and 1B
 #BALLS TO PLAY steps down (SUBTRACT coil) through switches on S and D and SCORE MOTOR 1A.
-#RESET (D) relay energizes when all score reels and BALLS TO PLAY unit are at zero.  It holds through a switch on itself for one score motor cycle, dropping out at SCORE MOTOR 1C.
+#RESET (D) relay energizes when all score reels and BALLS TO PLAY unit are at zero.  It holds through a switch on itself for one score motor cycle, then the RELAY BANK resets through the START (S) relay armature switch via SCORE MOTOR 1C, de-energizing the D relay.
 #While D is energized the BALLS TO PLAY unit steps up five times through a switch on D and SCORE MOTOR 1A.
-'''Gottlieb Start-up Sequences from the 1970s'''
+'''Gottlieb® Start-up Sequences from the 1970s'''
-There is a great repository of [http://www.xmission.com/~daina/tips/pub/emTips.html Gottlieb startup sequences] gleaned from numerous game manuals.
+There is a great repository of [http://www.xmission.com/~daina/tips/pub/emTips.html Gottlieb® startup sequences] gleaned from numerous game manuals.
 '''70s Williams Start Up Sequence (4 player)'''
@@ Line 151: / Line 1,177: @@
 .     If multiple players are added by the start button, the coin relay advances the coin unit,advances the total play meter, and steps down the credit unit.
-===Series Relay Explained===
+===Score Reel Switch States===
+Most score reels have three switch pairs, although the highest most score reel denomination typically has only two switch pairs.  Regardless of the total amount of switch pairs, the switch states are actuated dependent upon the value displayed via the score window.  The most important score values are when the score reel is either displaying a zero or nine.<br>
+Any given game needs to know when the score reel position is zero in order to successfully complete the [http://pinwiki.com/wiki/index.php?title=EM_Repair#The_Start_Up_Sequence_Explained start up sequence]. If all of the score reels are not returned to zero at start up, the score motor will continue to run, and the start up / reset sequence will not finish.<br>
+The importance of the ninth position of the score reel is rather simple.  When a score reel reaches a value of 9, it must send a signal to the next highest value score reel in order to advance that reel at the same time.  Here's an example. While playing a Williams Gulfstream, the score is currently at 480 points.  A 10 pt. switch is closed, and the score becomes 490 points.  At this given point, the ninth position switch on the 10's reel is now closed.  Shortly after, a second 10 pt. switch is closed, and the total score becomes 500 points.  If the ninth position switch was not closed on the 10's reel, during the 10's reel advancing to zero, the score would "appear" to loop back around to 400 points.  However, since the 10's reel ninth position switch was closed, an additional signal was sent to the 100's reel, telling it to advance one position, at the same time the 10's reel advanced.  On a properly functioning machine, this event happens when any given reel reaches the ninth position.  The exception is the highest denomination score reel, which typically does not have a ninth position switch.<br>
+For values other than 0 and 9, the game determines these values (including 0 and 9) via a bakelite circuit board attached to the score reel assembly.  See the next section for details regarding these circuit boards.<br>
+'''NOTE:''' Although the pics below are from specific eras and reels, the switch states are not all inclusive to all games with these types of reels.  The pics shown are just a sampling, and it is noted what specific game the pics came from.  The game you are working on may not be the same as shown in the pics.  An example would be the difference between the score reels of an early 70's single player versus an early 70's 2 or 4 player game.<br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=75px perrow=3 caption="Gottlieb® 1st Generation Decagon Score Reel Switches - 1966 Gottlieb® Dancing Lady">
+File:GTB 1st Decagon 0.JPG|Gottlieb® 1st Generation Decagon Score Reel at the zero position
+File:GTB 1st Decagon 1-8.JPG|Gottlieb® 1st Generation Decagon Score Reel at the one position - switches will be in same states for 2-8
+File:GTB 1st Decagon 9.JPG|Gottlieb® 1st Generation Decagon Score Reel at the nine position
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=75px perrow=3 caption="Gottlieb® 2nd Generation Decagon Score Reel Switches - 1975 Gottlieb® Atlantis">
+File:GTB 2nd Decagon 0.JPG|Gottlieb® 2nd Generation Decagon Score Reel at the zero position
+File:GTB 2nd Decagon 1-8.JPG|Gottlieb® 2nd Generation Decagon Score Reel at the one position - switches will be in same states for 2-8
+File:GTB 2nd Decagon 9.JPG|Gottlieb® 2nd Generation Decagon Score Reel at the nine position
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=75px perrow=3 caption="Gottlieb® Last Generation Decagon Score Reel Switches - 1975 Gottlieb® Super Soccer">
+File:GTB New Decagon 0.JPG|Gottlieb® Last Generation Decagon Score Reel at the zero position
+File:GTB New Decagon 1-8.JPG|Gottlieb® Last Generation Decagon Score Reel at the one position - switches will be in same states for 2-8
+File:GTB New Decagon 9.JPG|Gottlieb® Last Generation Decagon Score Reel at the nine position
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=150px perrow=3 caption="Bally mid-1970's Score Reel Switches - 1976 Bally Aladdin's Castle">
+File:BLY Score Reel at Zero Marked.JPG|Bally mid-70's Score Reel at the zero position
+File:BLY Score Reel at 1-8 Marked.JPG|Bally mid-70's Score Reel at the one position - switches will be in same states for 2-8
+File:BLY Score Reel at Nine Marked.JPG|Bally mid-70's Score Reel at the nine position
+</gallery>
+</center><br>
+<br clear=all>
+===Score Reel Bakelite Circuit Boards===
+In some cases, it is important for a game to know exactly what value any given score reel is.  The two most common events where a game uses this information is the free game scoring thresholds and the match sequence at the end of the game.<br>
+Unfortunately, the score reel switch stacks are limited to conveying when a score reel is only at either the 0 or 9 position.  If switch stacks were used to determine every value, the assembly would be large, cumbersome, and costly.  To overcome these issues, a bakelite circuit board is attached to the score reel assembly. The compliment part to the circuit board is a small, two contact wiper secured to the score reel drum. As the score reel advances, the wiper makes contact with two, isolated circuit board traces.  In turn, the wiper completes a specific circuit on the board.<br>
+Most all score reels have bakelite circuit boards attached to them.  The exception is typically the next to lowest score reel value.  In other words, if a game uses 4 reels total to achieve a maximum point value of 99,990 (the ones position is a non-existent dummy reel), the 100's reel assembly would not use a circuit board.  The reason is it is not necessary.  The 10's reel has a circuit board, because of the match feature (match numbers would be from 00-90 in this example).  The 1K and 10K score reels have circuit boards too, because the free game scoring thresholds are in the range of 10,000 to 99,000.  However, the game never needs to know the exact state of the 100's reel.<br>
-===Schematics===
+++++add more info and pics++++ <br>
-A guide to reading schematics is available here:
+<br clear=all>
-http://tuukan.fliput.net/emkytkis_en.html
 ==Problems and Fixes==
+===Turning Machines On / Off===
+Most modern EM pinball machines have a main power switch in circuit with the incoming 120VAC.  However, when some games (Bally and Williams games from the 60's / early 70's) are turned on via this switch, the game still remains dark.  To illuminate the game, it is necessesary to push the flipper cabinet button located on the left hand side.  This closes a circuit which powers the game's lock relay.<br>
+[[File:WMS KO Switch.JPG|200px|thumb|left|Williams Knock Off Switch Located on the Front of the Motor Board]]<br>
+Earlier EM games (1940's, 50's, and early 60's) were not equipped with power switches.  Any of these games would be powered on as soon as they were plugged in.  However, these too may not be illuminated.  Again, pressing the left flipper button would illuminate some games, while others would not be completely powered until a coin was dropped into the coin chute or a game started.  To turn these games off, a sharp blow with the heel of the foot or palm of the hand would be necessesary.  A sharp blow would take a small rod that was resting on the cabinet bottom, and cause it to raise upward, and open a normally closed switch which enabled the hold relay.
+<br clear=all>
 ===Lubrication===
@@ Line 164: / Line 1,246: @@
 Over-lubrication causes far more trouble in coin operated equipment than under lubrication. Practically all cases of poor contact on switches and wiper disks are due to oil or grease, or oil vapor, which forms a film or residue on the contacts and will not allow current to pass through. Excess lubricant may also seep into clutches causing them to slip.
-IMPORTANT: NEVER USE VASELINE FOR LUBRICATION OF ANY PART OF THE MACHINE! Vaseline is not a true lubricant. It leaves a dirty and gummy residue and becomes very thick when cold.
+IMPORTANT: NEVER USE VASELINE FOR LUBRICATION ON ANY PART OF THE MACHINE! Vaseline is not a true lubricant. It leaves a dirty and gummy residue and becomes very thick when cold.
 Step-up levers, ratchets, cams, shafts and other sliding or oscillating parts should be very lightly greased with special coin machine lubricant. The bakelite disks (biscuits) on the motor units and step-up units will require lubrication with the special coin machine lubricant only after the grease is completely evaporated or when the film of the grease becomes dirty (machines with bakelite disks only). In either event, clean the parts thoroughly with a solvent, then apply an extremely thin coat of the special grease.
@@ Line 172: / Line 1,254: @@
 The general rule is "when in doubt, don't".  There are very few places on a pinball machine that need lubrication and they're only in spots that have metal-to-metal contact.  When needed, a good choice is "Super Lube Teflon Grease", a clear synthetic grease with Teflon.  It can be found at local hardware stores or online, for example: http://www.pinrestore.com/Supplies.html
+===Free Play===
+====Bally====
+[[file:BallyFlickerFreePlay.jpg ‎| 300px | thumb | left| Two credit unit switches that are opened at the credit unit zero position have been bent "permanently" closed. This image from a Bally "Flicker". The general procedure is identical for most EM games.]]<br>
+The image at left shows how to set a Bally EM game, in this case "Flicker", to free play. The two switches that open when the credit stepper wheel reaches zero, are adjusted so that the "floating" switch (the short switch) remains closed when the zero position cam would normally open them.
+<br clear=all>
 ===Switches===
+====Defeating Bounce, Slam, and tilt switches====
+[[file:DefeatingBounceSwitch.jpg ‎| 300px | thumb | left| A "defeated" bounce switch. This one is on a Gottlieb "Pro-Football".]]<br>
+This technique works well for "normally closed" switches like the one pictured. A dicey bounce switch can cause a game to suddenly tilt without apparent reason.
+Desolder one of the wires to the switch.<br>
+Solder that wire to the other wire.
+<br clear=all>
+====Adjusting Switch Gaps====
+[[file:SwitchTools.jpg|300px|thumb|right|Useful tools for EM switches. 1) Ignition file for Tungsten contacts, 2) Flexstone File for Silver contacts, 3) Switch adjustment tool, 4) Homemade adjustment tool, 5 )Spring push/pull tool, very useful for switches also.]]
+Proper switch clearance gaps are crucial for correct operation of any pinball game. Very many problems in EM games come down to a problem with incorrect operation of a switch. The switch blades are made up of phosphor bronze, which has high conductivity, resilience to form and excellent soldering characteristics, but has the drawback of being brittle compared to copper. Switch blades therefore, are commonly broken by the game, or careless actions by the repair person. A switch adjusting tool, purchased or homemade, is a necessity. Pliers or screwdrivers might be used in special circumstances, or in extremis, but are not best practice.
-Leaf switches in pinball games come in 4 formats: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.), Break-Make, & Make-Make, the last 2 of which are really combinations of a N.O. and/or a N.C. switch. Regardless of their function, all switches are in fact, a N.O. or N.C. type.
+Switches in EM games are designed to have a degree of over-travel, which creates a wiping motion that helps clean the switch. The contacts must meet, stay together and slide across the face of the contact slightly, to be perfectly adjusted. They also must be gapped wide enough that they do not bounce, causing multiple switch closures. This problem is more often seen in electronic games, due to the rapid nature of the switch closures being too fast to effect an EM game. Electrical sparking can often be seen in dim light between the contacts, and this is not necessarily a cause for concern.<br>
-Leaf switches in EM games are of 2 compositions,at least 2 bronze blades each holding a Silver Contact or a Tungsten Contact(occasionally 2 contacts per blade). Since silver is a very high conductor of electricity, it is used on most EM switches, with the exception of the flipper cabinet and End of Stroke (EOS) contacts, which are tungsten. Silver tarnishes and turns black, but this does not effect its conductivity. Silver contacts may be cleaned with a flex-file or sandpaper, in order to redress the switch for adequate surface contact. Tungsten flipper contacts must be redressed with an ignition-type flat file as used in automotive repair, as the contacts are too hard to be smoothed by sandpaper or flex file abrasive. Gold flashed contacts, are not normally used in EM games, and must NEVER be cleaned with a file or sandpaper. A business card, or thin cardboard, is all that is necessary to clean electronic gold flashed contacts.
+Before adjusting switches, make certain the screws holding the switch stacks are tight. Bakelite spacers in the switch stacks due to excessive moisture have occasionally shrunk by drying out, causing poor adjustment.  Failing to tighten a switch stack prior to adjustment can cause newly adjusted switches to become maladjusted in short notice.  When tightening a switch stack, tighten the screw closest to the switch blade contact first.  The screw closest to the soldering tabs can then be tightened.  Tightening switch stacks in this manner will keep the switches from "fanning" out, if the screws are tightened in the opposing manner.  Some switches have a hex nut on the backside which will require holding it as you turn. After tightening a switch stack, be sure to recheck the gap of each switch, because it can change.<br>
-====Normally Open (N.O.) Switch aka Form A Switch====
+If you clean a set of points and find yourself having to do it again soon, check the switch contact. Switch contacts can become loose and swivel or spin.  In turn, the contact will arc, and will not function effectively.  Firm placement of the contact on the switch blade is necessary. The contact can be repeened, or soldered to the backside of the switch blade.<br>
-[[file:SwitchNormallyOpen.jpg|thumb|left|Normally Open Switch in resting state]][[file:GenericSchematicSwitchDiagram.jpg‎|thumb|right|Schematic symbols for a N.O. & N.C. switch]]
-This is a leaf switch that has 2 (rarely 4) contacts that complete a circuit when pushed closed by some mechanical device. The switch re-opens when the device moves away from the moveable contact, and the springiness of the blade opens the circuit. Gottlieb calls this type of switch, a “Form A” switch, and this term is sometimes used in its schematics.<br clear=all>
+Using your switch adjusting tool put twisting pressure on the shorter switch blade as close to the switch stack as possible and include the blade stiffener (if present) in the adjuster slot. Except on rare occasion, never adjust the longer switch leaf which is actuated by the relay's armature.  The exception to this rule is when when an inexperienced tech has mistakenly adjusted it previously and it needs attention.  Try to use as little force and change of gap as possible to incrementally reach your gap goal. Using too much force and a back and forth gap readjustment tends to bend and weaken the switch blade which can make a deformed switch blade difficult to set for correct operation. This is often seen in games that have been “hacked”; sometimes the only way to remedy the situation is to replace the entire switch or disassemble it entirely. Cycle and recycle the mechanical device that activates the switch and observe the switch for proper gap, wiping action and release.<br>
-====Normally Closed (N.C.) aka Form B Switch====
+====Recommended Gap Specifications====
-[[file:SwitchNormallyClosedLabelled.jpg|thumb|left|Normally Closed (N.C.) switch in resting state with optional nylon spacer]]
-This type of switch, called a “Form B” switch by Gottlieb, opens a circuit when a mechanical device pushes against the blade. A typical use of a N.C. switch is the bottom cabinet tilt or game off switch GTB uses on early EM games. When the bottom of the cabinet is struck intentionally or by a disgruntled player, the weight on the end of the blade moves the contacts apart and turns the game off.<br clear=all>
-====Break-Make aka Form C switch====
+Gottlieb® recommends a gap of .019" on a normally open switch on the AG relay, with overtravel of .015". The lock-in switch should have only .010 gap in a de-energized state. Absolute precision in these measurements is not critical, but should give you an idea of what amount of gap you should look for. A automotive feeler gauge set could be used to help with this setting, but after some experience, “eyeballing” it will suffice.
-[[file:SwitchMakeBreakLabelled.jpg|thumb|left|Break-Make switch aka Form C in resting state]][[file:Break-Make_Switch_Schematic.png‎|thumb|right|Schematic diagram of a Break-Make Switch]]
-This switch is really a composite of a N.O. and a N.C. switch with just three blades instead of four. The moveable center blade has contacts on BOTH sides. Proper adjustment insures that when a device moves the center blade towards the open contact, the CLOSED switch OPENS BEFORE the center contact touches the open switch’s contact. When the pressure is released, the center blade returns to its N.C. side and re-makes contact. This type of switch is often used on relays. A Make-Break switch is really the same, just upside-down, or in reverse, of the order of actions of a Break-Make switch. Special care should be taken with a Make-Break switch that the three blades are at not time shorted together. This can happen often when the blade stiffener is maladjusted, and contacts the other blade of the pair.<br clear=all>
-====Make-Make aka Form AA switch====
+Magnet type and interlock relays have longer switch blades, so the gap is wider at .031" or 1/32" with a similar overtravel. Rollover switches that are N.O. have some tolerance to their gap at .031" to .062" or 1/32" to 1/16" with a very small overtravel of 1/64". If the rollover is N.C., only a 1/64" gap is necessary.
-[[file:SwitchMakeMakeLabelled.jpg|thumb|left|Make-Make switch aka Form AA in resting state]]
-A make-make switch is a composite switch consisting of two N.O. switches using only 3 blades. When mechanical pressure is applied to the blade, the switch “makes” or closes the circuit, and continues to move until a second switch contact is closed, tying all 3 blades together.<br clear=all>
-====Adjusting Switch Gaps====
+Kicking rubber, or slingshot switches usually have a generous gap, at least 1/16", due to the rubber ring pushing back against the switch, and a bit of trial and error will be necessary to find the ideal gap setting. Pop bumper switches and scoring “dead” bumper switches,  should have a gap of 1/64" for the actuating switch under the spoon, and a 1/32" gap for the score switch when open. All other types of switches will probably function well with a 1/32" gap, and this would be a starting point, modifying the gap on a case by case basis.
-Proper switch clearance gaps are crucial for correct operation of any pinball game. Very many problems in EM games come down to a problem with incorrect operation of a switch. The switch blades are made up of phosphor bronze, which has high conductivity, resilience to form and excellent soldering characteristics, but has the drawback of being brittle compared to copper. Switch blades therefore, are commonly broken by the game, or careless actions by the repair person. A switch adjusting tool, purchased or homemade, is a necessity. Pliers or screwdrivers might be used in special circumstances, or in extremis, but are not best practice.
+====How to Fabricate Leaf Switches====
-Switches in EM games are designed to have a degree of over-travel, which creates a wiping motion that helps clean the switch. The contacts must meet, stay together and slide across the face of the contact slightly, to be perfectly adjusted. They also must be gapped wide enough that they do not bounce, causing multiple switch closures. This problem is more often seen in electronic games, due to the rapid nature of the switch closures being too fast to effect an EM game. Electrical sparking can often be seen in dim light between the contacts, and this is not necessarily a cause for concern.
+[[file:SwitchParts.jpg|300px|thumb|left|1) Replacement switch blade with pre-formed contact holes
+) Fish paper
+) Blade stiffener
+) Bakelite switch separators in 1/16" & 1/32" thickness
+) Tungsten and Gold flashed contacts
+) Separator and screw insulators
+) “Dead” lug used on SS games]]
+Very often the need to rebuild or fabricate leaf blade switches presents itself to the EM repair person.
+Sometimes the silver contact is worn out or missing, or the blade is bent or broken, to the point that a
+satisfactory repair cannot be done without replacing the switch. It can happen that the switch is missing
+entirely. When doing a repair on location, the exact parts may not be available. Fortunately, most switches for
+EM games can be replicated, and at a cost that may be cheaper than a new assembly. The mechanical procedure is described below, but first a general discussion of individual components (which I hope will be helpful to the novice) will ensue.<br>
-Before adjusting switches, make certain the screws holding the switch stacks are down tightly. Bakelite spacers in the switch stacks, due to excessive moisture, have occasionally shrunk by drying out, causing poor adjustment.  After tightening a switch stack, be sure to recheck the gap of each switch.
+Switch blades come in 3 thicknesses depending on the intended use. The light gauge .008" blade may be used in
+relay banks where a small coil may have to draw down several switches, and perhaps in a spinner switch. The
+medium gauge .010 blade is used generally throughout the pinball game for any switch that is not a relay or
+flipper cabinet or EOS switch. The heaviest gauge .016" is used in EOS and flipper cabinet switches. They can be
+purchased from [http://pbresource.com/pfswitch.htm PBR], and it is advised to buy several of the medium and a few
+of the light & heavy blades for emergency and general repairs. These blades are of a single length, which may be
+cut to a suitable size, and are pre-drilled with 7 contact positions.<br>
-If you clean a set of points, and find yourself having to do it again soon. Check the rivet on the point blade. They can come loose and arc and prevent good contact with the blade. Easy to repeen it, or even solder it down. Clean it and you'll be good to go.  LTG :)
+Switch blades are brittle, and cannot be bent or formed apreciably without cracking or breaking the blade. This
+makes it easy to score the blade with some side cutter pliers, then break off the unneeded section by bending it
+back and forth with a pair of pliers and a vise or some other hold down method. If a formed bend as used in drop
+target switches is required, an old blade from a scavenged switch must be utilized, or special ordered from a
+supplier (if available).<br>
-To adjust a leaf switch, first make sure the switch stack of bakelite spacers and blades are tightly packed against each other by giving the 2 screws a twist of your screwdriver. As long as there is no screw movement with reasonable pressure, you can procede. Some switches have a regular nut on the backside instead of a speednut, which will require holding it as you turn.
+New switch contacts are no longer available in silver (that I am aware), but a gold flashed pair of contacts can
+substitute wherever the voltage and current handling is low. Tungsten contacts must be used for the End-of-stroke
+(EOS) switches and the flipper cabinet blades due to the higher voltage (35v or greater) and greater current
+these contacts must supply.<br>
-Using your switch adjusting tool, put twisting pressure on the moveable switch blade as close to the switch stack as possible, and include the blade stiffener(if present) in the adjuster slot. Try to use as little force and change of gap as possible, and incrementally reach your gap goal. Using too much force and a back and forth gap readjustment, tends to bend and weaken the switch blade, and can make a deformed switch blade difficult to set for correct operation. This is often seen in games that have been “hacked”, and sometimes the only way to remedy the situation is to replace the entire switch, or disassemble it entirely. Cycle and recycle the mechanical device that activates the switch and observe the switch for proper gap, wiping action and release.
+Fish paper spacers may be required for some EOS switches and usually for the coin door credit switch, and perhaps
+in other instances. The old fish paper if undamaged, can be used, and new pre-cut fish paper blades are
+available. A substitute can also be hand cut, if the need arises. Next, some switches require a blade lifter or spacer to push upon another switch or mechanism, such as in double EOS switch assemblies and score motor stacks. Many times these can be scavanged from the old blade, or a new one of a suitable length can be used. The height ranges from 3/32" to 11/32" by increments of 1/32", but usually the exact height is not critical. Again, having a small variety of blade lifters on hand for spares, is strongly
+urged. Some switch assemblies use a metal cover plate and a rectangular speed nut for the anchor for the screws,
+and new ones are available, but the old ones are usually fine.<br>
-====Recommended Gap Specifications====
+Switch stack separators, usually made of bakelite or some other non-conducting material, come in 2 thicknesses,
+/16" & 1/32" and will be combined in various combinations to achieve the desired spacing the operating mechanism
+required. Old ones are fine to use, but are very brittle and prone to breaking if levered off too strongly or at
+an angle. A little care in separating the old switch stacks is indicated here. You may purchase new copies from
+the usual suppliers if necessary, or just scavange the necessary bits from previous repairs or your parts bin.
+If a machine screw is used to hold the switch assembly in place, it is a 4-40 screw (varying lengths) and
+corresponding nut, or a #4 pan head screw, if secured to the cabinet or playfield, or by a speednut.<br=clear all>
-Gottlieb recommends a gap of .019" on a normally open switch on the AG relay, with overtravel of .015". The lock-in switch should have only .010 gap in a de-energized state. Absolute precision in these measurements is not critical, but should give you an idea of what amount of gap you should look for. A automotive feeler gauge set could be used to help with this setting, but after some experience, “eyeballing” it will suffice.
+====Procedure to Fabricate a Leaf Switch====
+If the original switch is present, it is an easy task to replicate a new one, or renew the bad parts, using the
+old switch as a model. Experimentation will be the only source for a missing or incorrect switch. For a
+complicated, multi bladed assembly, it is advised to take careful notes of how many spacers were used between
+each pair of switches,the presence of a "dead" lug (if any) and its location, and which blade had the blade
+lifter or blade stiffener, etc. Use a Stanley or other utility knife to separate the switch stack, levering each
+end of the stack a 1/64" or so, taking care not to crack the fragile bakelite spacer. You may also have success using a pin punch to press the tubing out. The tube switch insulators can be re-used or new ones put to service.<br>
-Magnet type and interlock relays have longer switch blades, so the gap is wider at .031" or 1/32" with a similar overtravel. Rollover switches that are N.O. have some tolerance to their gap at .031" to .062" or 1/32" to 1/16" with a very small overtravel of 1/64". If the rollover is N.C., only a 1/64" gap is necessary.
+Each contact must be peened to the blade tightly for good electrical conductivity. A craftsman may also solder
+the peened nub to the blade to ensure its faultless operation. Use a hard wood scrap block (maple or similar), to
+back up the contact, while striking the nub with a punch and hammer. Don't backup the contact with a metal
+surface like a vise or anvil, as it will likely be marred or cracked. Clip off the long end of the blade if it is
+too long for the application by scoring the blade with a pair of side cutter pliers, and then bending it back
+and forth along the score line with suitable means. A bit of attention with a metal file to the ensuing sharp
+edge may save you a nasty scratch at some point. As an alternative, use a pair of diagonal cutters you don't really care about and just snap right through the blade directly. The nylon blade lifter, if required, may be peened by squeezing it with pliers, since it is rather soft.
+Re-assembly is straightforward, esp. if you took good notes.<br>
-Kicking rubber, or slingshot switches usually have a generous gap, at least 1/16", due to the rubber ring pushing back against the switch, and a bit of trial and error will be necessary to find the ideal gap setting. Pop bumper switches and scoring “dead” bumper switches,  should have a gap of 1/64" for the actuating switch under the spoon, and a 1/32" gap for the score switch when open. All other types of switches will probably function well with a 1/32" gap, and this would be a starting point, modifying the gap on a case by case basis.
+[[file:WMS-03-7811Switch.jpg|thumb|left|A good substitute for an EOS switch]]
+[[file:WMSBLY-SW-1A-120photo.jpg|thumb|right| A useful sub for most low voltage switches]]
+In place of re-creating the entire switch assembly, it may be that the only thing necessary to do is adapt an
+existing switch to an unavailable assembly by a slight modification of an existing readily available part. The
+blades are soft and easily drilled for a new spacer or contact, so I have found that an EOS switch like the
+Williams #03-7811, works quite well with a bit of modification for other EOS switch applications that are
+unavailable, involve double switches, or are just expensive. If a longer blade is needed, the top blade can be
+swapped out, or a second switch pair can be sandwiched in for a double flipper setup. Likewise, the
+Williams/Bally #SW-1A-120 assembly can sub for many playfield applications with just an addition of a spacer or
+two or a blade lifter. Your ingenuity can compensate for a lack of parts from available sources.<br clear=all>
 ===Coils===
-===Relays===
+===Stepper Unit Issues===
-Relays are small coils that when energized complete one or more circuits.  They are usually high resistance so they can be activated for a long time without burning up or blowing a fuse.  They are the workhorse of the EM world; without the relay, the proper circuits do not get energized and nothing happens.  The relays set up the conditions that the score motor then completes the work on.<br>
+====Gottlieb® Stepper Unit Repairs====
+[[File:Stepper.jpg|thumb|300|left|Gottlieb® ball count unit.]]
+[[image:YT.png]] An excellent video showing disassembly, rehab, and reassembly of a Gottlieb® Ball Count Unit can be viewed [https://youtu.be/OPw7RY724us <b><u>here</u></b>].
+What follows is a step by step process for completely rebuilding a Gottlieb® step up/step down type stepper motor.  This will be remarkably similar to a step-up/reset stepper or a continuous stepper.  It will be close enough to a Williams that you can apply the procedure and figure out the few differences For instance, there are no snowshoes on a Williams, but there is a nasty looking brass spider that does the same thing.
+This procedure is fairly comprehensive and if you want to just “fix what’s broke” you can pick and choose what to do within the procedure.  The most common issue is probably that the unit requires a general degreasing and cleanup to step properly.  After 40+ years, the original grease gets dirty, hard and sticky and the stepper will not function optimally in this condition.
+The first thing you should do is to familiarize yourself with the function of the stepper you are rebuilding.  Actuate the plungers by hand.  Try to mimic an electrical response with your fingers – fast on and fast off.  Observe the rotation of the stepper on the rivets. The stepper should advance one set of rivets with each actuation.  It should move quickly, with no hesitation.  The contacts should line up exactly with the rivets.  Step the stepper up and down and establish it’s zero and maximum position.  See if it binds under any of these conditions.
+Assess the cleanliness of the rivet board, the springs (both on the snowshoes and the return spring), the plungers, the levers and the switches.  Play with any levers and see that they rotate freely about their pivot points.  Try to hold the levers out of the drive gear and assess the sluggishness of the gear when free of these encumbrances.
+Look for any other obvious issues.  Do you notice bent, or worn snowshoes?   Is the plastic piece on the lever broken or missing?  Do you notice rivets with large grooves or is the Bakelite disk burned next to some of the rivets?  Are there any broken wires etc.?
+The quickest, dirtiest method of fixing a gunked up stepper is to just clean up the rivets that you can get to with 600 grit sandpaper using alcohol as a lubricant/wetting agent.   Then step the unit a bit and clean up the rest of the rivets.  Wipe off the Bakelite disk with some alcohol and lubricate it with some Teflon gel and you are done.  This may or may not fix your sluggish stepper, but there is a high probability it will get you at least marginally functional.  If you are just starting out, you may want to leave it go at that.  If you want to go further or this didn’t fix your issue, read on.   Again, you can pick and choose what you do, but don’t do anything you are not comfortable with.
+The following example is from a Gottlieb® Subway, 1966.  This is the ball count unit.  Since Subway is an Add-a-Ball, this is a step up/step down unit.  The unit was actually functioning more or less fine when I got it, but I like to assess everything and check the coil stops etc.  Additionally, I really like my mechanisms to be clean.  Finally, I needed to write this pinwiki article, so I just scattered the whole thing and took lots of pictures.  Also, was rebuilding the entire head, so I had the board out of the box and lying flat.  So if it appears to defy gravity, or some angles seem odd, that is why.
+'''Remove the Main Mechanism:'''
+This is usually held in place with one hairpin on top and two on the bottom.  If you remove the top one, it will allow the mechanism to flop down for some inspection and minor repairs or adjustments.  If you remove the bottom two hairpins as well, you will have better access to do a complete overhaul.
+'''Mark for reassembly'''
+Mark your moving and stationary disks in some way that you will be able to reestablish the correct relative position of the stepping disk, the stationary disk and the gear/actuating mechanism upon reassembly.  This is very important, so don’t skip this step.   I like to do the following:
+* Step the mechanism to it’s “home” position.  Usually there is a hard stop of some sort on the back of the gear.
+* Now use a paint pen or sharpie to mark at least one rivet and it’s corresponding snowshoe.   I like to mark on the edge of the Bakelite, so it doesn’t get sanded off in later steps.
+* Take a picture, just to be sure.
+'''Remove the active, snowshoe disk and spider'''
+* Remove the 3 screws that hold the active disk on the spider
+* Remove the spider by loosening or removing the set screws.  I like to remove them, just to be sure they are out of the way.  Note: On some machines, these screws run in a recess on the shaft, on others they run on a flat and on others they run on a finished, round  portion of the shaft.  Regardless, you need to make sure they are out of the way.
+* Work the spider off.  Depending on the design (see above) and how bad the shaft is chewed up, this is anything from a 2 second job to 10 minutes of pain and hate.
+* At this point, your shaft is free on this side and held in place by the mechanism on the other side.  You can stop here if you don’t want to completely remove the entire mechanism from the back box.  You will have great access for cleaning up the rivets etc.
+* –Optional- Remove the rivet board from the stepper by removing the two screws that hold it to the frame.  I like to do this to get the stepper free and to better manipulate it to strip the back side.
+'''Inspect the snowshoes, and rivets'''
+Again, this one wasn’t too bad.  I replaced a couple of rivets for the “photo shoot”, but they probably didn’t need it.  Here are some horror stories from another machine I recently worked on:
+Note the burned out rivets and erosion on the disk.  This was fixed by replacing the rivets and filling the grooves with JB Weld.  In the second picture, the disk was warped and wouldn’t track properly.  The snowshoes were stuck and bent.  Ultimately, this part was replaced with a new one.
+'''Remove the Coils, Coil Stops and Plungers'''
+I like to do this regardless.  As long as I am back there, I want to at least inspect the coil stops and sleeves.  The only way to do that is to take them off.  It isn’t too hard:
+* Remove the coil stops, this will be done by removing either a screw and nut or a socket head screw with an allen head wrench.
+* Slide the coil off the plunger.
+* Remove the plunger by either sliding it off the lever or removing the E clip, depending on the design.
+* Remove the coil sleeve.
+* Inspect and clean the plunger.
+* Face off the plunger end if it is mushroomed or excessively peened.  You can also just replace the plunger if it is rusty or too far gone.
+* Replace or clean the coil sleeve (I always just replace it)
+* Inspect the coil stop.  Replace if required.
+* Clean parts as required.  Pay attention to any joints, such is the Bakelight/plunger joint.
+====Gottlieb® Replay Unit (Credit Unit) Issues====
+This applies to the step up / step down replay unit, commonly referred to as the credit unit, which uses a metal drum wheel.  This does not apply to the "half moon" replay unit used in the mid-70's.  Pictures are from 1970s and 1960s Gottlieb® credit units.  Construction and function of these two different era units is the same.<br>
+[[File:GTB_Replay_Unit_Sticky_Shoulder_Screw.JPG|thumb|300|left|Gottlieb® replay unit showing shoulder screw and subtract pawl (mid-70s unit)]]<br>
+A common issue with a Gottlieb® credit unit is the decrement of more than one credit at a time.  A properly functioning credit unit should only decrement one credit. This issue is more prevalent with credit units from the mid to late 70's, however, any other like Gottlieb® credit unit applies here.  The cause of this issue is typically due to a sticky subtract pawl (A-2484), which is secured by a shoulder screw (A-1058).  The shoulder screw is lubricated by the factory, but due to contaminants and age in general, the lubrication becomes gummy.  When the step down coil pulses, the subtract pawl will successfully be lifted from the ratcheting gear.  However, the pawl will only slowly return to its proper resting position  versus quickly springing back.  A prime symptom of this issue is when 2 - 15 credits are showing via the credit window.  Once the game's start button has been pressed once for a single game, the credit window now shows 0 credits available.
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:GTB_Replay_Unit_Backing_Nut.JPG|thumb|300|left|Gottlieb® replay unit with backing nut highlighted (mid-60s unit)]]<br>
+To resolve the issue, the shoulder screw must be removed, cleaned, and lubricated.  To remove the screw, the backing nut on the drum side of the unit must be removed.  The shoulder screw can now be loosened and removed.  Take special care in removing the screw, as the chance of shearing the screw is high.  The odds of shearing the screw, while attempting to remove the shoulder screw without loosening the backing nut first, are even higher.<br clear=all>
+[[File:GTB A-1058 Shoulder Screw.JPG|thumb|300|left|A gunked up Gottlieb® A-1058 shoulder screw which was not allowing a credit unit to step down one step at a time]]
+[[File:GTB_shoulder_screws.JPG|thumb|300|right|Gottlieb® shoulder screws (A-1058 & A-1059) commonly used on stepper units.]]<br>
+Once the screw is removed, thoroughly clean it, along with the holes used to secure the subtract pawl and reset lever (A-1279).  Use rubbing alcohol as a cleaner, and make certain all of the old lubricant is successfully removed.<br clear=all>
+[[File:GTB Replay Unit Gummy Lube Residue.JPG|thumb|300|left|Gummy lubricant residue on credit unit frame]]<br>
+The old lubricant will sometimes have to gently be scraped away with a small flat blade screwdriver or similar instrument from the frame of the credit unit.  After all of the pieces are cleaned, apply a conservative amount of Teflon gel or similar lubricant to any of the metal-on-metal areas.  Assemble the unit.  Note that the shoulder screw should not be tightened completely down. If this is done, the unit will function improperly as if the shoulder screw was still gummy.  Find an acceptable adjustment for the shoulder screw, and then while steadying the screw with a screwdriver, tighten the backing nut.  The credit unit should now decrement only one credit at a time.
+<br clear=all>
+====Williams Stepper Unit Repairs====
+This shows a basic rebuild of a Williams Player Unit,   This was necessary as someone thought it was a good idea to spray paint the unit blue.
+In addition to removing the paint from the bakelite boards so that electricity might flow, a rebuild was needed as the levers were gummed up and sticky.
+<br>For reference this unit came from a 1973 Jubilee
+<br><br>
+The basic procedure is as follows
+<br>
+* Remove the coils and coil stops.
+* Remove the switch stack
+* Remove the center nut on the bakelite board side
+* Mark the bakelite board in the reset position so that it can be reinstalled in the correct position
+* Remove the board from the shaft
+* Mark the gear on the front in the reset position so that you know where to put it back
+* Remove the gear from the front
+* Pull the metal stepper unit out of the machine
+* Disassemble the parts needing to be cleaned
+* Clean parts,   I prefer an ultrasonic cleaner and some sandpaper
+* Reassemble the unit and reinstall.
+* Verify coil moves correctly and freely.
+{|border="1" cellpadding="2"
+|-
+ |
+<center>'''[[File:WMSPlayerUnitBefore.JPG|200px|thumb|left|Unit Installed and needing to be cleaned]]'''</center>
+|
+<center>'''[[File:WMSPlayerUnitDiscBefore.JPG|200px|thumb|left|Disc side of unit]]'''</center>
+|
+This repair references the Player Unit stepper.
+Someone had spray-painted blue paint all over the unit.
+ Note: It does not work better when blue.
-For example, a 500 point relay will pull in, causing a circuit path to the 100 point relay (which adds 100 points directly to the active score reel set) to be made, and also starting the score motor.  The score motor will turn and additional switches will pulse 5 times, causing the 100 point relay to pulse 5 times, adding 500 points to the score.  A 5000 point relay operates the same way - except it's completing a circuit to the 1000 point relay.  The same 5 pulses from the score motor "do the work" of adding the score.
+In addition the levers and coil sleeves were gummed up and the plungers would not move freely.
-It is the interconnection of relays and their circuits that comprise the "programming" of an electro-mechanical machine.  You can change the way a game plays by adding and changing circuits, to either fix errors in the original programming, or to create new and exciting rules.
+This facilitated a full rebuild of the stepper unit.
-===Stepper Units===
+First remove the springs, both coils and switch stack.
-There are 3 basic types of steppers used in EM machines.  These are the step up/reset, the step up/step down and the continuous steppers.   The step up/reset stepper is generally used when you only need to count up, not down.  An example of the might be on a ball count unit that is used on a replay machine.  For this application, you count up to 3 or 5 balls played, depending on the setting, then reset to 0 or 1 ball as part of the start up sequence.  Step up/reset steppers are also used for the 100K unit on a Gottlieb Woodrail.   They are also occasionally used for bonus counters with the "scan style" bonus used on some later Gottliebs, like Target Alpha or Hot Shot and certainly in other places as well.
+This is a good time to look at the coil sleeves and replace them if necessary.
-A step up/step down stepper is possibly a little more common than the step up/reset style.  A typical application would be as the ball count unit on an Add-A-Ball game.  Here, it would step up the ball count to 5 (or 3), then step down one at a time as balls are used and step up one at a time as balls are earned.  Anther, probably more common application is to count bonus points, where it would be to step up as bonus points are earned, and then step down at the end of the ball, or whenever the bonus is collected.  Probably the most common application of all is to count the credits on a machine.
+To remove the wiper disc first mark the position of the disc while in reset position and then remove the big nut in the middle.
-By far the most common stepper is the continuous stepper.  They come large and small.   The small unit is the infamous, often cursed and never loved AS stepper on later Gottliebs.  This is used most often for the match feature and occasionally as part of the circuit for spinner scoring.  The AS unit can often be removed from the game by unplugging a pair of Jones plugs.  In theory this was done so that the AS match unit could be removed from areas where matches for free games were not allowed.  As a practical matter, it is probably a good thing as these miserable little rube goldbergian contraptions will cause you grief at some point and will need to be rebuilt, preferably in a good light.  Good lighting is required because when the AS relay malfunctions and needs to be rebuilt, it will get its last lick in by flinging a part of itself across the floor in a desperate suicidal mission to permanently bring your game down.
+You can then pull the wiper disc off easily from the assembly
-Luckily, full size continuous steppers are much more common than their diminutive and cantankerous smaller brothers.  The full size stepper are often found in the match feature of earlier Gottlieb and Williams games, often ringing the bell while also stepping along merrily with the smallest score increment (1 or 10 points).  They are also used in Gottlieb woodrails to track the 10K points and send a signal over to the 100K stepper when it steps past 90K and needs to carry the decade over.  Another common application is in the "player unit" on multi-player Gottliebs.  By far the most common use of the continuous stepper is in the score reels.  In fact, it is so common that score reel rebuilding was given its own section in the Pinwiki.  A continuous stepper often is used very heavily, which means they are subject to wear out – possibly more than other failure modes such as getting gunked up.
+|-
+|
+<center>'''[[File:WMSPlayerUnitRivetDIsc.JPG |200px|thumb|left|Disc Removed]]'''</center>
+|
+<center>'''[[File:WMSPlayerUnitFingers.JPG |200px|thumb|left|Finger side of disc after cleaning]]'''</center>
-One thing that all steppers have in common is that then need to work well for you to be happy with the way your game functions.  In fact, most of the functions are so integral to the game that your game will be "broken" if the steppers do not work.  Most games cannot get through a reset sequence unless the score reels reset.  Additionally, they might not advance to the next ball if the bonus is not counted down correctly.  In order for a stepper to work correctly, it must be relatively clean and free of sticky grease and oil.  The electrical contacts must be clean and should be coated with some sort of dielectric grease.  The coil and plunger need to function smoothly.  Finally, it needs to step once and only once per actuation.  There are often adjustments to stops and coil locations that can be made to ensure this.  When you actuate a stepper by hand, it needs to move smartly from by one step to the next.  If this doesn't happen, it is time to rebuild your stepper.
+|
+The rivets were totally covered in paint this required a sanding at the minimum.
-WORK IN PROGRESS.  PICTURES AND REBUILD INSRUCTIONS COMING.
+I used Melamine foam and 92% alcohol to remove the paint.
-===Score Reels===
-There are many types of score reels.  Score reels are essentially 10 unit steppers.  In fact, many of the parts catalogs refer to them as such.  Each manufacturer has their own individual design.  Within each manufacturer, there may be several designs and even variations within each design.    For instance Gottlieb introduced "rat trap" score reels around 1955 on multiplayer games (Duette) and around 1959 on the single player game Miss Annabelle.  Around 1966, Gottlieb moved away from the rat trap score reels to a newer, less complex design, called a "decagon" unit.  However, the decagon unit itself has several iterations, with 10 sided reels, round reels and plastic parts replacing metal parts.  Around 1975, they did a major redesign of the decagon unit that is cheaper and considerably easier to service than prior versions, yet it is still called a "Decagon" unit.
-The point of all this is that there are many designs and iterations of these designs and you will need to figure out your particular unit for yourself, as it is unlikely that every iteration will ever be covered in a step by step guide.
+When reassembling use a thin layer of Teflon lube on the rivets to reduce wear and allow the fingers to move freely across the rivets.
-Score units generally provide the following functions:
+|-
+|
+<center>'''[[File:WMSPlayerUnitPulledOut.JPG|200px|thumb|left|Before Teardown Gear Removed]]'''</center>
+|
+<center>'''[[File:WMSPlayerGearPulledOut.JPG|200px|thumb|left|Gear Removed With Spring]]'''</center>
+|
+Note the winds of the center spring and mark the position of the unit in reset position. Then remove the gear and it should come out freely.
-.	Step once and only once per signal
+The stepper unit pulled out of the machine and ready for disassembly. All that was needed was a screwdriver, 11/32 socket and a wrench.
-.	Provide a signal used by the startup sequence that the score reel is at zero.  The majority of the time the switch is closed at zero, but sometimes it is open, so check you schematic and other score reels in the machine if you are not sure.
+|-
+| colspan="2" |
+<center>'''[[File:WMSPlayerUnitGunk.JPG|200px|thumb|left|Gunk On the posts]] '''</center>
-.	Provide a signal that the score reel did move.  This is often a switch that is normally closed (end of stroke switch) and opens when the plunger moves.  This can be a cause of locked on coils, so you need to be sure it opens.  Some people advocate keeping them permanently open on Gottlieb Decagon units, but I don't see a need for that.
+|
+Here is a closeup of why the lever wouldn’t move freely. Notice the large buildup of old grease on the far post.
-.	A signal when the unit gets to nine, this is used to "carry over the decade" at the next score.  Of course the highest score unit will not have one of these, since there is no higher score reel to carry the decade over to.
+Remove the levers and spacers and then you should be able to unscrew the posts
-.	Provide a signal to the high score and match features of a game as to exactly where the score reel is.  This is typically done via the circuit board on the reel and a wiper that runs across it.
+|-
+|
+<center>'''[[File:Player_Unit_Broken_Down.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Torn down and ready for cleaning]]'''</center>
+|
+<center>'''[[File:Player Unit After Cleaning.JPG|200px|thumb|left|All parts are now clean and ready for reassemble]]'''</center>
+|
+All the parts laid out and ready to get cleaned
+First I soaked the parts in Mean Green.
-Generally, you will need to do the following to service/rebuild one of these units, minimum is usually to clean the circuit board and score reels themselves and de-gunk the unit so it steps smartly.  You can go deeper as required or desired either due to the necessity of the repair or your level of comfort taking it apart.
+I then used an ultrasonic cleaner and sand paper when needed.
-Pull the score unit from the game and let it hang.
+|-
+|
+<center>'''[[File:WMSPlayerUnitMoneyShot.JPG|200px|thumb|left|Money Shot]]''' </center>
+|
+<center>'''[[File:WMSPlayerUnitCleanDisc.JPG |200px|thumb|left|Finger side of disc after cleaning]]'''</center>
+|
+All finished, reassembled and ready for reinstall
-•	Remove the retention on the circuit board
-•	Pull the score reel
-•	Clean up any gunked up, sticky moving parts with Mean Green or a similar degreaser
+|}
-•	Clean up the score reel with Novus.  BE CAREFUL, do not clean the numbers off the wheel.
+===Score Reels===
+There are many types of score reels.  Score reels are essentially 10 unit continuous steppers.  In fact, many of the parts catalogs refer to them as such.  Each manufacturer has their own individual design.  Within each manufacturer, there may be several designs and even variations within each design.    For instance, Gottlieb® introduced "rat trap" metal score reels in late 1954 with the multi-player game, Super Jumbo, and in 1959 the first single player game to use them was Miss Annabelle.  Starting with Dancing Lady in late 1966, Gottlieb® moved away from the rat trap score reels to a newer, less complex design, plastic 10-sided reel, called a "Decagon" unit.  However, the Decagon unit itself has several iterations, with 10-sided reels, round reels, and plastic mechanical parts replacing metal parts.  In early 1975, Super Soccer was the first game to use the new style Decagon unit.  Gottlieb® did a major redesign of the unit, which was cheaper, and considerably easier to service than prior versions. Even though the unit went through a complete redesign, it was still called a "Decagon" unit.<br>
-•	Degrease the circuit board
+The point of all this is that there are many designs and iterations of these designs, and you will need to figure out your particular unit for yourself.  It is unlikely that every iteration will ever be covered in this guide with a step by step procedure.<br>
-•	Sand the face of the circuit board with 600 grit wet or dry sandpaper, using rubbing alcohol as the lubricant.
+Score units generally provide the following functions:
-•	Apply a Teflon based lubricant to the circuit board, like Superlube or a similar product.
+#Step once and only once per signal.
+#Provide a signal used by the startup sequence that the score reel is at zero.  The majority of the time the switch is closed at zero, but sometimes it is open.  It is best to refer to the game's schematic, or inspect other score reels in the machine if uncertain.
+#Provide a signal that the score reel did move.  This is often a switch that is normally closed call the end of stroke (EOS) switch.  Some form of an actuator is attached to the score reel's plunger, which opens the EOS switch each time the plunger is pulled in.  This can be a cause of locked on coils, so be certain the EOS opens properly.  Some people advocate keeping them permanently open on Gottlieb® Decagon units, however, this is not considered a good practice.
+#A signal when the unit is at position nine.  This is used to "carry over the decade" upon the next advance of the reel.  Of course the highest score unit will not (usually) have one of these, since there is no higher score reel to carry the decade over (though there may be an auxiliary "over the top" or other overflow score indicator light on the back glass).
+#Provide a signal to the high score and match features of a game as to exactly where the score reel is.  This is typically done via a circuit board attached to the side of the reel unit, and a wiper on the reel, which rides on the circuit board.
-•	Clean all the contact points.
+Generally, you will need to do the following to service/rebuild one of these units.  At a minimum, clean the circuit board, clean the score reels themselves, and de-gunk the unit so it steps smartly.  You can go deeper as required or desired either due to the necessity of the repair, or your level of comfort taking it apart.
-•	Re-assemble and verify the unit steps correctly and the contacts open and close correctly
+*Pull the score unit from the game and let it hang.
+*Remove the retention on the circuit board
+*Remove the score reel
+*Clean up any gunked up, sticky moving parts with Mean Green or a similar degreaser
+*Clean up the score reel with Novus.  BE CAREFUL, do not clean the numbers off the wheel.
+*Degrease the circuit board
+*Sand the face of the circuit board with 600 grit wet or dry sandpaper, using rubbing alcohol as the lubricant.
+*Clean any remaining grit or residue on circuit board with rubbing alcohol
+*Apply a Teflon based lubricant to the circuit board, like Superlube or a similar product.
+*Clean all the contact points.
+*Re-assemble and verify the unit steps correctly and the contacts open and close correctly
-====Decagon Score Reel Overhaul====
+====Gottlieb® Decagon (Early Design) Score Reel Overhaul====
-A Youtube Video of the process on a Gottlieb Decagon is here:
+A Youtube Video of the process on a Gottlieb® Decagon is here:
 Teardown – (Note, I have since found out that it is a lot easier to do this if you de-solder the coils):
@@ Line 295: / Line 1,594: @@
 http://www.youtube.com/user/newmantjn#p/u/5/zQUHiT7BJB8
-====Rat Trap Score Reel Overhaul====
+====Gottlieb® Rat Trap Score Reel Overhaul====
 '''Background'''
 [[File:RatTrapLovinIt.jpg|200px|thumb|right|The Iconic Rat Trap Score Reel. Where engineering and art intersect.]]
-According to the IPDB, the first appearance of a Rat Trap score reel was on the four player "Super Jumbo" game in 1954.  It is probably not pure coincidence that this was also Gottlieb's  first 4 player game.  Gottlieb had made a few 2 player games with lightbox scoring, but no four player games.  It is likely that the Rat Trap reel was developed to allow for four player games, as the real estate required for lightbox scoring on a four player game would have been excessive.  The single player games didn't catch up until 1959 with Miss Annabelle.
+According to the IPDB, the first appearance of a Rat Trap metal score reel was on the four player "Super Jumbo" game in 1954.  It is probably not pure coincidence that this was also Gottlieb's®  first 4 player game.  Gottlieb® had made a few 2 player games with lightbox scoring, but no four player games.  It is likely that the Rat Trap reel was developed to allow for four player games, as the real estate required for lightbox scoring on a four player game would have been excessive.  The single player games didn't catch up until 1959 with Miss Annabelle.
 The mechanism itself is fairly robust and a beautiful piece of engineering.  It suffers from having a lot of parts, which probably meant that it was a little expensive to produce and difficult to assemble.  Additionally, there were some adjustments within the mechanism that needed to be made, which always adds to assembly cost.  The score reels themselves are gorgeous and feature black letters on a white reel, with a distinctive, yet familiar font.   The Wedgeheads of the 1960's that had these score reels just ooze nostalgia and class in a way that can never be approached with a DMD display.  The drawbacks, most likely the cost of the unit, lead to its eventual replacement in 1966 with the "Decagon" unit.  Subway was the last game to use this classic score reel.
+[[image:YT.png]] A very nice video explanation of Rat Trap Score Reel disassembly, cleaning, and reassemlby has been put together by Kim Oswald (The Goat Shed, AUS). The video can be found [https://youtu.be/0XyiQ1IYcRo <b><u>here</u></b>].<br><br>
 As you read the following procedure, please note a few things.
 # Only do what you are comfortable doing.  9 times out of 10, you will only need to clean up the circuit board, file the points and inspect the coil stops and sleeves.
-# Many of these procedures would apply nicely to a Decagon or Williams score reel.  It's all the same – Take it apart, clean it, lube the circuit board, replace broken parts.
+# Many of these procedures would apply nicely to a Decagon, Bally or Williams score reel.  It's all the same – Take it apart, clean it, lube the circuit board, replace broken parts.
 # Take more pictures than you will need.  You still will not have enough.
-# The letter/number combinations ( i.e. A-3131) are part numbers straight out of the 1962 parts list.  The names are generally correct per the parts list as well (although "Rat Trap" is a term of endearment, not an official Gottlieb name).
+# The letter/number combinations ( i.e. A-3131) are part numbers straight out of the 1962 parts list.  The names are generally correct per the parts list as well (although "Rat Trap" is a term of endearment, not an official Gottlieb® name).
+An exploded view of a Gottlieb score reel can be found on the "Spring Kits" page of The Pinball Resource's web page here:   http://www.pbresource.com/springkit.html .  Scroll down to the "Score Unit" spring kit section and click on the diagram for an enlarged view.
 '''Teardown:'''
 *Remove the score reel assembly from the backbox.  This is done by removing the two hairpin style cotter pins.  It is OK to let the score reel assembly dangle
-*Next, remove the three screws holding the score reel on.  Note that the score reel and the grounding wheel beneath in corporate a "poka-yoke" design.  Poka-yoke is Japanese for "idiot proof", but here in the States we can come up with some pretty good idiots, so you may want to mark the score reel for orientation as well.  The Poka-yoke feature on the score reel is that one of the plastic buttons is larger than the other three, so in theory it can only go together one way.  The top button in the picture is the largest of the three.  It can be jammed together if you are not careful, so be sure to familiarize yourself with this feature, or mark it (or both).
+*Next, remove the three screws holding the score reel on.  Note that the score reel and the grounding wheel beneath incorporate a "poka-yoke" design.  Poka-yoke is Japanese for "idiot proof", but here in the States we can come up with some pretty good idiots, so you may want to mark the score reel for orientation as well.  The Poka-yoke feature on the score reel is that one of the plastic buttons is larger than the other three, so in theory it can only go together one way.  The top button in the picture is the largest of the three.  It can be jammed together if you are not careful, so be sure to familiarize yourself with this feature, or mark it (or both).
 *Next remove the score reel and the grounding wiper beneath it.  Note in the picture of the grounding wheel that the top hole is much larger.
-<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=3 caption="Score Reel Dissamebly">
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=3 caption="Score Reel Disassembly">
 File:RatTrapRemoval.JPG|Score Reel Removal
 File:RatTrapScrews.jpg|Remove these screws.  Note larger hole assembly feature
 File:RatTrapGroundWheelPokaYoke.jpg|Poka-Yoke assembly feature on the ground wheel
 </gallery>
+</center>
 Stop here.  Ask yourself: "Do I need to take this apart further?"  Or "Can I get away with just cleaning up the circuit board and maybe replacing the coil stop or coil sleeve?" This is your machine, so do whatever you are comfortable with.  The directions that follow will get you through a complete overhaul.  This allows for inspection and cleaning of all parts.  It also may result in lost parts and misassembly.
 *Remove the E clip that retains the cam and ratchet hub assembly.  E clips are known to go flying, often resulting in cuss words and trips to the hardware store.  Ease the E clip out and keep your finger over it.
@@ Line 324: / Line 1,631: @@
 *Desolder the lead from the circuit board.  While it is possible to work around this 10 second job, you will spend an extra half hour trying to reach things that you can't reach without a tweezers.  You will also spend an extra hour hunting the pieces that go flying and two hours on diagnosing the poor switch cleaning and misassembly that will inevitably result in not having adequate access to the parts.  Spend the 10 minutes desoldering and soldering.  It is time well spent.
 *Swing the circuit board out of the way and there you have it!  Access to a mechanical engineering marvel.  Take a moment to enjoy that.
+<center>
 <gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=4 caption="Score Reel Dissamebly - Removing the Circuit Board">
 File:RatTrapCamandEclip.jpg|Remove the E clip that retains the Cam and Ratchet Hub Assembly.  Note how dirty the grease is on this circuit board
@@ Line 330: / Line 1,639: @@
 File:RatTrapBoardAway.jpg|Swing Board out of the way
 </gallery>
+</center>
 *Next, remove the coil stop, coil, plunger, insulating fish paper and coil sleeve.  Unscrew the two screws holding the coil stop on and remove the coil stop.  Slide out the coil and lift the plunger off the pin on the Step Up Pawl.  Note any worn parts for replacement.  Set aside the plunger, coil stop assembly, and coil sleeve for cleaning, unless any of these parts will be replaced.
 *Remove the Cam and Ratchet hub from the score reel assembly.  You may need to rotate this while pulling it up.  You may also need to move some of the spring loaded parts out of the way with a small screwdriver. (no picture)
@@ Line 335: / Line 1,646: @@
 *Remove the E clip retaining the A-5177 Drive Index Pawl Assembly on.  Remove the spring and finally, the pawl.
+<center>
 <gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=3 caption="Score Reel Dissamebly - Removing Rotating and Actuating Parts">
 File:RatTrapCoilParts.jpg|Used parts from the coil assembly.  From L to R - Plunger, Fishpaper, Coil Stop and Bracket, Coil Sleeve
@@ Line 340: / Line 1,652: @@
 File:RatTrapRachetandPawl2.jpg|Ratchet and Pawl Removal
 </gallery>
+</center>
 At this point, your Rat Trap score reel is completely disassembled and ready for clean up.  It should look like this.
@@ Line 355: / Line 1,668: @@
 #Lightly touch up the point on the Grounding Wheel.
+<center>
 <gallery widths=170px heights=200px perrow=5 caption="Score Reel Cleanup - The Circuit Board">
 File:RatTrapCircuitBoardInitialClean.jpg|Initial Cleaning Done with Synthetic Steel Wool and Mean Green
@@ Line 362: / Line 1,676: @@
 File:RatTrapTeflon.jpg|Use Superlube or a Similar Dielectric Grease - Use Sparingly
 </gallery>
+</center>
 '''Rotating and Actuating Parts'''
@@ Line 370: / Line 1,685: @@
 #Pull all the parts out and blow off with compressed air.  You might want to put the smaller parts in a sock for this step so you don't blow them across the floor.
+<center>
 <gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=3 caption="Cleaning Rotating and Actuating Parts">
 File:RatTrapMeanGreen.jpg|Hose the parts down with Mean Green
@@ Line 375: / Line 1,691: @@
 File:RatTrapUltrasonic.jpg|Parts in the Harbor Freight Ultrasonic Cleaner
 </gallery>
+</center>
 '''Score Reel'''
-#Clean the number surface with Novus 2 and a gentle hand.  Don't clean off the numbers.
+#Clean the number surface with Novus 2 and a VERY gentle hand.  Don't clean off the numbers.  (Test on an inconspicuous part of a number if you can find one - some score reels will lose ink if you look at them funny with cleaner in your hand.)
 #Coat the number surface with a coat of pure carnauba wax.   Wipe off when dry.
-#Clean the inside surface with Novus or Mean Green.  (or leave it alone if you don't mind the dirt)
+#Clean the inside surface with Novus or Mean Green (or leave it alone if you don't mind the dirt).
+<center>
 <gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=3 caption="Score Reel Cleaning">
 File:RatTrapReelCleaningSupplies 033.jpg|Cleaning Supplies Used for Score Reels
@@ Line 386: / Line 1,704: @@
 File:RatTrapCleanInsideReel.jpg|Clean the Inside with Novus or a Rag Moistened with Mean Green
 </gallery>
+</center>
 '''Coil/Coil stop/Coil Sleeve/Plunger'''
 #The coil stop and coil sleeve are often borderline for replacement.  Generally, I figure that if they show any wear, they get replaced.  The plunger itself is usually OK, or maybe could stand to have the end that hits the coil stop re-faced with a grinder.  The coil is generally either perfectly fine, or completely failed.   This score reel got a new coil stop and coil sleeve.  Both of these parts were marginal, but once it is apart, you may as well replace marginal parts.
-#Replace the coil stop by holding it tightly in a vice and unscrewing the nut.   Install the new one the same way.
+#Replace the coil stop by holding it tightly in a vise and unscrewing the nut.   Install the new one the same way.
 #Slip the new coil sleeve into the coil.
+<center>
 <gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=3 caption="Coil Stop and Associated Parts">
 File:RatTrapCoilNewParts.jpg|Replacement Parts for the Coil and Plunger
 File:RatTrapCoilStopReplacement.jpg|Replacing the Coil Stop
 </gallery>
+</center>
 '''Switches'''
@@ Line 401: / Line 1,722: @@
 #Clean all switches with a flex stone, small file or folded 400 grit sandpaper.  Blow out, or better yet, run a piece of paper through the switches to get rid of any grit left in the switch.
+<center>
 <gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=3 caption="Switches">
 File:RatTrapStripped.jpg|Cleaning the Switches with Flexstone
 File:RatTrapMoreSwitches.jpg|Some Score Reels Have More Switches than Others
 </gallery>
+</center>
@@ Line 416: / Line 1,739: @@
 *Put the fishpaper insulator over the coil stop assembly and install both pieces onto the score reel frame.  Don't forget the insulator.  This can result in additional swearing.
+<center>
 <gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=4 caption="Assembling the Rotating and Actuating Parts">
 File:RatTrapStepUpPawlInstall.jpg|Install the Step Up Pawl, Sring and E clip
@@ Line 422: / Line 1,746: @@
 File:RatTrapCoilandPlungerAssy.jpg|Assemble the Plunger and Coil
 </gallery>
+</center>
@@ Line 432: / Line 1,757: @@
 *Put the score reel back in the backbox and retain it with the two cotter pins.
+<center>
 <gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=3 caption="Finishing up the Assembly">
 File:RatTrapCircuitBoardAssy.jpg|Install the Circuit Board
@@ Line 437: / Line 1,763: @@
 File:RatTrapScoreWheelAssy.jpg|Install the Score Reel, Spider and Screws
 </gallery>
+</center>
-====Chicago Coin Machine (CCM) Score Reels====
+====Williams 5" Metal Reels====
 '''Overview:'''
-CCM Score reels are different than many of the major manufacturers.  Instead of having a switch for the decade rollover the connections are performed by the fingers on the circuit board.
+The Williams 5" metal scoring reels are very similar in design to the Gottlieb "Rat Trap" style reels.
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=3 caption="WMS Metal Score Reels">
+File:WMS 5 inch reel removed.JPG|WMS 0-9 reel with the actual reel removed
+File:WMS 5 inch reel exposed.JPG|The inner workings and switches of the reel
+File:WMS 5 inch metal reel.JPG|WMS 5" metal reel.  Note the hole placement on the hub when reassembling.  The holes circled in red are for the screws.  The other holes are used for indexing on the hub.
+</gallery>
+</center>
+====Chicago Coin Machine (CCM) 3" Score Reels====
+'''Overview:'''
+CCM Score reels are different than many of the major manufacturers.  Instead of having a switch for the decade rollover, the connections are performed by the wiper fingers on the circuit board.  The switches are only for EOS on this unit.<br>
+For reference the following pictures are from a 1974 Hi Flyer.
+<center>
 <gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=2 caption="CCM Score Reels">
 File:CCM_ScoreReel_front.jpg|CCM Score Reel Player 1.  1000s . This is in 0 Position
 File:CCM_ScoreReel_back.jpg|CCM Circuit Board and Fingers in 0 position
 </gallery>
+</center>
-===Drop Targets===
+====Score Reel Related Reset Problems====
-'''Complete Teardown and Rebuild of a Gottlieb Drop Target Bank'''
-This procedure was developed a few years ago while working on a Volley.   The Volley has three, 5 target banks.  Sometime after rebuilding the first one, I decided that there must be a better way.  No way would David Gottlieb have put up with dental picks and the like on his assembly line.  So my goal was to develop a procedure that would require only fingers, or maybe a little "help" from a screwdriver.   Note that this is for a complete overhaul.  You might have to adapt if you just want to change a target or two.  Generally, I like completely overhauling something and not worrying about it again, ever.
-One other thing to note is that Gottlieb made three or four variations on this target bank.  Some have series bars, some don't.  Some have bent reset bars, some are straight etc.  If you generally follow these directions and take a lot of pictures, you will be fine.
-One thing I have discovered over time is that a common mistake is to spend a lot of time trying to save a little time.  This comes up in auto repair a lot.  People will try real hard to not pull off a part which is held on by 4 bolts.  So, in order to save the 3 minutes of time removing the 4 bolts, they will add an hour to the repair time trying to work around the part they should just have removed.  The procedure really takes everything apart.  It took about 45 minutes to completely disassemble the bank, clean every part and re-assemble.  By contrast, the when I did a Big Brave bank a few years prior to this, it took me hours to get it done, since I tried to not take it apart all the way.
-One more thing – you can leave some of the sub assemblies together if you don't plan on running the parts through a cleaner.  For instance, you could leave the brackets attached to the back of the target bank.   It's your machine, you decide how far you want to take it down.
-'''Drop Target Bank Rebuild Procedure:'''
-'''Remove Drop Target Bank  from game'''
-.	Put the playfield up in the full service position, with the playfield resting against the backbox.  Use a towel to protect the playfield and backbox.
-[[File:Volly_done_007.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Playfield in Full Service Position]]
-.	Unscrew all the switch stacks one by one.  Wrap each switch stack in low tack masking tape or thread a 5-40 nut onto each screw to hold the switch stack together.
-.	Undo the coil from the target bank.  Don't let it just hang by the wires, tie it up with a piece of wire, string, tie wrap or old rubber ring.
-.	Remove the screws that hold the target bank to the bottom of the playfield and pull out the target bank.
-'''Teardown''' – NOTE take more pictures than you will ever need.  You will still not have enough.
-Rebuilt bank on the left, dirty bank on the right.  Note, I helped myself out a little here, in that this was the third bank I did (so I had practice) and I had an exact target bank to reference.  Not even a mirror image, which can make you stop and think for a bit.
-[[File:Volleydrop 001.jpg|left|350px|thumb|Two Target Banks]][[File:Volleydrop 002.jpg|right|350px|thumb|Target Bank Ready for Teardown]]
-The bank was completely off, some of the mounting brackets were loose from pulling it from the machine.   The "front" and "back" of the target bank assume the bank is situated as shown, with the targets furthest from you.  The side closest to you is the "front" and the side furthest away from you (closest to the targets) is the "back".
+For EM score reels to reset properly, two things must happen.
+#The score motor must run to pulse the score reels until ALL off the reels have reached the zero position.
+#Each reel must advance until it reaches zero and then stop advancing.
+The different manufacturers had slightly different ways of implementing these functions.
+'''1970s Gottlieb with PLAYER UNIT (e.g. Spirit of '76)'''
+[[File:GTB Z1 External Switch.JPG|thumb|200px|left|Z1 relay assembly noting that the top NC switch is located above / outside of the switch stack armature]]<br>
+#Each score reel reset (zero position) switch must close when its score reel is at zero.  The reset switches are all connected in series and will advance the PLAYER UNIT when they are all zero.  The Z1 & Z2 relays open alternately to reset players 1 & 2 separately from players 3 & 4.
+#Each score reel RUNOUT switch must open when its score reel is at zero.  Pulses from SCORE MOTOR switch 1A advance the score reel until the reel is at zero and the RUNOUT switch opens.  The Z1 relay enables players 1 & 2 for reset.  The Z2 relay enables players 3 & 4 for reset.
+Each NO switch on the Z1 and Z2 relays controls a score reel.  The single NC switch located outside of the switch stack armature is used to advance the player unit.  If one of the score reels does not properly reset, the Z1 or Z2 relay specific to that reel will not disengage.  Hence, the NC switch does not become closed, and the player unit will not advance any further.  The NO switches on the Z1 and Z2 relays are rarely an issue, however, the single external NC switch can become adjusted incorrectly and / or fouled.<br clear=all>
+'''1970s Williams (e.g. OXO) and 1970s Bally (e.g. Wizard!)'''
+#The DRUM UNIT ZERO switches are all wired in parallel.  They are in the lock-in circuit for the RESET relay.  All DRUM UNIT ZERO switches must open for the RESET relay to release, which stops the reset sequence.
+#A second DRUM UNIT ZERO switch opens when its score reel is at zero.  Pulses from the #1 or #2 SCORE RESET relay advance the score reel until the reel is at zero and the DRUM UNIT ZERO switch opens.  The #1 and #2 SCORE RESET relays are energized by score motor switches whenever the RESET relay is energized.
+There are several problems that can occur during score reel reset.  Since there are many switches involved in the score reel reset, especially on four-player games, it is a common cause of reset problems.  It is important to note that the zero position switches, when out of adjustment, can indicate zero when the score reel is not on zero and visa-versa.  Three common problems are described in the following sections.
+#If a single reel doesn't reset properly, the first thing to check is its RUNOUT switch.  If it is stuck open the score reel  won't advance for reset.  If it is stuck closed, the score reel will keep advancing past zero.
+#If the reels all advance to zero and the the score motor keeps running (that is, reset doesn't complete becuase the PLAYER UNIT didn't advance (Gottlieb) or the RESET relay didn't release (Williams/Bally)), there is likely a zero postion switch stuck open (Gottlieb) or closed (Williams/Bally).
+#The last problem is tricky to diagnose.  If a score reel zero position switch is stuck, the reset sequence can terminate prematurely, leaving some of the reels partially reset.  This will show up on score reels that have low, non-zero scores.  Since they need the most pulses to reset (e.g. 9 pulses for a '1') they may only get to 8 or 9 before the reset stops.  Setting some score reels to '1' before starting a reset can help to isolate the problem, but it may be a problem with any of the zero postion  switches.
+===Drop Targets===
+'''Complete Teardown and Rebuild of a Gottlieb® Drop Target Bank'''
+This procedure was developed a few years ago while working on a Volley.   The Volley has three, 5 target banks.  Sometime after rebuilding the first one, I decided that there must be a better way.  No way would David Gottlieb® have put up with dental picks and the like on his assembly line.  So my goal was to develop a procedure that would require only fingers, or maybe a little "help" from a screwdriver.   Note that this is for a complete overhaul.  You might have to adapt if you just want to change a target or two.  Generally, I like completely overhauling something and not worrying about it again, ever.<br>
+One other thing to note is that Gottlieb® made three or four variations on this target bank.  Some have series bars, some don't.  Some have bent reset bars, some are straight etc.  If you generally follow these directions and take a lot of pictures, you will be fine.<br>
+One thing I have discovered over time is that a common mistake is to spend a lot of time trying to save a little time.  This comes up in auto repair a lot.  People will try real hard to not pull off a part which is held on by 4 bolts.  So, in order to save the 3 minutes of time removing the 4 bolts, they will add an hour to the repair time trying to work around the part they should just have removed.  The procedure really takes everything apart.  It took about 45 minutes to completely disassemble the bank, clean every part and re-assemble.  By contrast, the when I did a Big Brave bank a few years prior to this, it took me hours to get it done, since I tried to not take it apart all the way.<br>
+One more thing – you can leave some of the sub assemblies together if you don't plan on running the parts through a cleaner.  For instance, you could leave the brackets attached to the back of the target bank.   It's your machine, you decide how far you want to take it down.<br>
+Finally, if you are more of a "watch and learn" type person, as opposed to a "read and learn", I've posted a Youtube video of the rebuild on a Target Alpha drop target bank here:  [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JIXRwNTL88U], and a [https://troxelrepair.com/2018/10/easy-method-for-replacing-a-drop-target-in-a-gottlieb-em-pinball-machine/ written guide of a 10-target assembly here]
+'''Drop Target Bank Rebuild Procedure:'''
+'''Remove Drop Target Bank  from game'''
+[[File:Volly_done_007.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Playfield in Full Service Position]]<br>
+#Put the playfield up in the full service position, with the playfield resting against the backbox.  Use a towel to protect the playfield and backbox.
+#Unscrew all the switch stacks one by one.  Wrap each switch stack in low tack masking tape or thread a 5-40 nut onto each screw to hold the switch stack together.
+#Undo the coil from the target bank.  Don't let it just hang by the wires, tie it up with a piece of wire, string, tie wrap or old rubber ring.
+#Remove the screws that hold the target bank to the bottom of the playfield and pull out the target bank.
+'''Teardown''' – NOTE take more pictures than you will ever need.  You will still not have enough.<br>
+Rebuilt bank on the left, dirty bank on the right.  Note, I helped myself out a little here, in that this was the third bank I did (so I had practice) and I had an exact target bank to reference.  Not even a mirror image, which can make you stop and think for a bit.<br>
+[[File:Volleydrop 001.jpg|left|350px|thumb|Two Target Banks]][[File:Volleydrop 002.jpg|right|350px|thumb|Target Bank Ready for Teardown]]
+The bank was completely off, some of the mounting brackets were loose from pulling it from the machine.   The "front" and "back" of the target bank assume the bank is situated as shown, with the targets furthest from you.  The side closest to you is the "front" and the side furthest away from you (closest to the targets) is the "back".
+<br clear=all>
 '''Drop Target Bank Teardown Procedure:'''
-.	Remove the E clips on both sides of the rod
+#Remove the E clips on both sides of the rod
+#Remove the two plastic bushings that guide the rod
-.	Remove the two plastic bushings that guide the rod
+#Remove the mounting bracket for the coil and rod
+#Remove the mounting bracket for the other end of the rod  Note, you may need to slide the rod back and forth ¼ to ½ inch to accomplish this.
-.	Remove the mounting bracket for the coil and rod
+#Remove the trigger arm return spring.
+#Remove the rod that runs through all the triggers.
-.	Remove the mounting bracket for the other end of the rod  Note, you may need to slide the rod back and forth ¼ to ½ inch to accomplish this.
+#Remove the front of the target bank.
-.	Remove the trigger arm return spring.
-.	Remove the rod that runs through all the triggers.
-.	Remove the front of the target bank.
 At this point, you will have a sub-assembly like the one shown below.  It should be fairly obvious that it is easy to pull off and reattach all those springs on the drop targets and triggers with the sub assembly as shown.  One word of caution: Do not mix up the springs.  The lighter weight springs attach to the plastic target.  If you mix them up, the drop targets won't drop.
 [[File:Volleydrop003.jpg|center|350px|thumb|Target Bank Major Subassembly]]
-.	Remove all the springs from the drop targets and triggers.
+<ol start="8">
+<li>Remove all the springs from the drop targets and triggers.</li>
+<li>Pull out the drop targets.</li>
+<li>Disassemble the rest of the steel box (if desired for cleaning)</li>
+</ol>
-.	Pull out the drop targets
+I feel that mechanical mechanisms work best when they are clean.  They were not designed to work with a layer of grunge, oil and dirt on them, so I like to clean them up prior to re-assembly.  If it is your first shot at this, you might want to minimize some of the disassembly and cleaning in favor of making sure you can get it back together.  That said, I like to clean the face of the drop targets with Novus, then put a generous layer of carnauba wax over the hot stamped face for protection.  Next, scrub out the nooks and crannies in all the parts with Mean Green and a toothbrush.  Then, into the ultrasonic cleaner, if you have one, otherwise rinse off and blow the parts dry with compressed air.  BE CAREFUL not to blow you parts all over the garage.  You can put the little parts in an old sock or something when you blow them off.  Wipe off the wax when dry. For the very small parts, like screws, you are probably better off not washing them at all, unless you have a lot of spare parts around.<br>
-.	Disassemble the rest of the steel box (if desired for cleaning)
-I feel that mechanical mechanisms work best when they are clean.  They were not designed to work with a layer of grunge, oil and dirt on them, so I like to clean them up prior to re-assembly.  If it is your first shot at this, you might want to minimize some of the disassembly and cleaning in favor of making sure you can get it back together.  That said, I like to clean the face of the drop targets with Novus, then put a generous layer of carnauba wax over the hot stamped face for protection.  Next, scrub out the nooks and crannies in all the parts with Mean Green and a toothbrush.  Then, into the ultrasonic cleaner, if you have one, otherwise rinse off and blow the parts dry with compressed air.  BE CAREFUL not to blow you parts all over the garage.  You can put the little parts in an old sock or something when you blow them off.  Wipe off the wax when dry. For the very small parts, like screws, you are probably better off not washing them at all, unless you have a lot of spare parts around.
+<center>
 <gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=3 caption="Drop Target Cleaning">
 File:Volleydrop004.jpg|Target Bank Completely Disassembled
@@ Line 548: / Line 1,877: @@
 File:Volleydrop006.jpg|Target Bank Clean, Dry and Ready to Assemble
 </gallery>
+</center>
 '''Target Bank Assembly Procedure:'''
-.	Attach the "heavy" springs to the bottom plate
+#Attach the "heavy" springs to the bottom plate.
+#Attach the "back" (the side closest to the targets) to the top and bottom.  Be careful and consult your pictures as it is easy to put the top on upside down, or mix up the top and the bottom.  This is why you may be better off leaving these three sides of the steel box in place the first time you do this.  ATTACH ALL THE SCREWS LOOSELY.
-.	Attach the "back" (the side closest to the targets) to the top and bottom.  Be careful and consult your pictures as it is easy to put the top on upside down, or mix up the top and the bottom.  This is why you may be better off leaving these three sides of the steel box in place the first time you do this.  ATTACH ALL THE SCREWS LOOSELY
+#Drop the targets in through the holes.  No, you can't put the springs on first, they won't fit through the holes.
-.	Drop the targets in through the holes.  No, you can't put the springs on first, they won't fit through the holes.
 [[File:Volleydrop007.jpg|center|350px|thumb|Drop in the targets and attach the springs to the targets.]]
+<ol start="4">
+<li>Stick the triggers in through the targets.  Make sure you have them right side up.</li>
+<li>Attach the springs from the bottom plate to the trigger.</li>
+<li>Attach the springs from the target to the trigger.</li>
+</ol>
+<center>
-.	Stick the triggers in through the targets.  Make sure you have them right side up.
-.	Attach the springs from the bottom plate to the trigger.
-.	Attach the springs from the target to the trigger.
 <gallery widths=270px heights=250px perrow=2 caption="Attaching Springs">
 File:Volleydrop008.jpg|Triggers in Place, all Spring Attached
 File:Volleydrop009.jpg|Another View
 </gallery>
+</center>
-Note: You can do the prior two steps in either order.  You shouldn't need any tools to do it, but a needle nose pliers, a hemostat or even a small screwdriver may help you if you have sausage sized fingers.  Once this sub assembly is together, the springs will hold the triggers in place.
+Note: You can do the prior two steps in either order.  You shouldn't need any tools to do it, but a needle nose pliers, a hemostat or even a small screwdriver may help you if you have sausage sized fingers.  Once this sub assembly is together, the springs will hold the triggers in place.<br>
-.	Feed in the reset arm.  Make sure you have it oriented correctly.  Notes:  You cannot feed it in after you attach the back plate.  Also, on a very long bank, you may need to feed it in prior to attaching the springs from the bottom plate to the triggers. Take care on how you position the reset arm - make sure it is on the correct side of the stop screws in the bottom plate.  With this method of assembly, it is fairly obvious though.
+<ol start="7">
+<li>Feed in the reset arm.  Make sure you have it oriented correctly.  Notes:  You cannot feed it in after you attach the back plate.  Also, on a very long bank, you may need to feed it in prior to attaching the springs from the bottom plate to the triggers. Take care on how you position the reset arm - make sure it is on the correct side of the stop screws in the bottom plate.  With this method of assembly, it is fairly obvious though.</li>
-.	Attach the front plate.   You may have to move the triggers around a little to get them to go though the proper slots in the front plate.  This is fairly easy though.
+<li>Attach the front plate.   You may have to move the triggers around a little to get them to go though the proper slots in the front plate.  This is fairly easy though.</li>
+</ol>
+<center>
 <gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=3 caption="Assembling the Reset Arm and Front Plate">
 File:Volleydrop010.jpg|Feed In Reset Arm
@@ Line 583: / Line 1,913: @@
 File:Volleydrop012.jpg|Front Plate Attached
 </gallery>
+</center>
+<ol start="9">
-.	If there is a series arm, now is a good time to feed that in from one side or the other.
+<li>If there is a series arm, now is a good time to feed that in from one side or the other.</li>
+<li>Now, feed in the arm through the guides in the front plate and all the triggers, the reset arm and the series arm.  Leave the E clips off of both sides of the rod for now.  You may have to wiggle the trigger arms a bit to get the rod to feed through.</li>
-.	Now, feed in the arm through the guides in the front plate and all the triggers, the reset arm and the series arm.  Leave the E clips off of both sides of the rod for now.  You may have to wiggle the trigger arms a bit to get the rod to feed through.
+<li>Install the reset arm return spring.</li>
+<li>Install rod support on one end of the assembly and the coil bracket/rod support on the other end.  Install the plastic bushings on the end of the rods.</li>
-.	Install the reset arm return spring.
+<li>Tighten up all the loose screws.</li>
+<li>NOW – finally- install those E clips!</li>
-.	Install rod support on one end of the assembly and the coil bracket/rod support on the other end.  Install the plastic bushings on the end of the rods.
+</ol>
-.     Tighten up all the loose screws.
-.	NOW – finally- install those E clips!
 [[File:Volleydrop014.jpg|center|450px|thumb|Completed Drop Target Unit]]
-Put the entire assembly back into the game.  Clean up the backside of the switches that the trigger arms actuate when the targets drop.  Gunk on those is a major reason what targets only go down half way.  I like alcohol for this. Verify that all targets score.  Verify that when all targets are down, the series bar pulls away from the NO switch (if you have one) and the switch scores.
+Put the entire assembly back into the game.  Clean up the backside of the switches that the trigger arms actuate when the targets drop.  Gunk on those is a major reason what targets only go down half way.  I like alcohol for this. Verify that all targets score.  Verify that when all targets are down, the series bar pulls away from the NO switch (if you have one) and the switch scores.<br.
-Sit back, have a beer and congratulate yourself on a job well done, secure in the knowledge that you will not have to do it again for 20 years.
+Sit back, have a beer or other tasty cold beverage, and congratulate yourself on a job well done, secure in the knowledge that you will not have to do it again for 20 years.<br>
-===Roto Targets===
 ===Pop Bumpers===
-Over time, you will find that your pop bumpers will need to be rebuilt. I have found that there are two general causes for a rebuild. One being the coil has seized up from a short or has been gunked over by some unknowing repairman who kept spraying the bumper solenoid to lubricate it. Now, it's filled with gunk stuck to the lubricant and needs and overhauled. Pop bumpers should NEVER be lubricated in any way.
+====Refurbishment====
+Over time, pop bumpers will need to be removed. If removal is necessary, rebuilding / refurbishing the pop bumper is recommended.  Below are several reasons why removal of a pop bumper assembly is necessary.
+#The coil has melted from locking on and shorting its windings.  Or, possibly the assembly has been gunked up by some unknowing technician, who kept spraying the assembly to lubricate it. The assembly has become covered with years of built up gunk from the use of this unnecessary lubricant.  The pop bumper now needs to be overhauled. Even though Williams recommends in their EM operational manuals to lubricate the coil plungers with graphite, pop bumpers should really never be lubricated.
+#Another reason is due to the pop bumper body becoming broken or cracked.  Pop bumper bodies are made of plastic, and deteriorate over time.  In most instances, a cracked or broken pop bumper body does not impede the proper function of a pop bumper, but they can look unsightly.
+#The final reason is related to appearance, but preservation comes into play. On the top side of the playfield, most pop bumpers have a Mylar shield or "free-floating" platter, which gets worn and looks ugly.  If dirt and / or grit are present underneath the platter, (this is extremely common), the platter starts to act like sandpaper.  The end result is that the platter wears away the clearcoat and paint versus protecting the playfield like it was intended to do.  The only resolution is removal and / or replacement of this platter.
-The other reason is appearance.On the playfield the pop bumpers have a mylar shield that gets worn down and looks ugly, and needs to be restored. Such is the case for our example.
+Gottlieb®, and in the case of this narrative, Chicago Coin use "free-floating" Mylar platters.  Some manufacturers such as Williams and Bally use self-adhering Mylar rings around the perimeter of the pop bumper skirt.  The self-adhering style of protection may only need replacement if the Mylar ring is losing adhesion, and starting to lift away from the playfield.<br>
-For this narrative I will be discussing refurbishing a pop bumper from a 1966 Chicago Coin Kicker machine. I have found that nearly all pop bumpers are constructed the same so this rebuild will apply to many machines, even solid state games.
+For this narrative, refurbishing a pop bumper from a 1966 Chicago Coin Kicker machine will be discussed. Nearly all pop bumpers are constructed the same, so this rebuild will apply to many machines.  Several solid state machines are similar, and equally apply.<br>
-{| border="1" cellpadding="2"
+{| border="0" cellpadding="0"
 |- valign="top"
 ! scope="row" width="10%" | [[File:OldandWorn.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Our target]]
-| width="70%" | This is the pop bumper that we will be restoring. As you can see the shield next to the playfield is well worn. This pop bumpers brother to the right will also need to be updated eventually.
+| width="70%" | This is the pop bumper that we will be restoring. As you can see the platter next to the playfield is well worn. This pop bumpers brother to the right will also need to be updated eventually.
 |- valign="top"
 ! scope="row" | [[File:RemoveCap.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Remove cap]]
-| The first step in working on the bumper is to remove the pop bumper cap. This is a game manufacturer dependent step. In this case we have two screws that need to be removed to access the interior. On Gottlieb games often the cap is removed by gently compressing the cap leaves and lifting the cap out of the pop bumper base.
+| The first step in working on the bumper is to remove the pop bumper cap. This is a game manufacturer / game era dependent step. In this case, we have two screws that need to be removed to access the interior.<br>
+For Gottlieb® games, starting with Surf Side in 1967, gently compress the sides of the cap at 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock.  In doing this, the tabs which hold the cap in place come free, and removal of the cap from the pop bumper body can be done.
 |- valign="top"
-! scope="row" | [[File:UnscrewBase.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Unscrew Base]]
+! scope="row" | [[File:UnscrewBase.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Remove pop bumper bulb]]
-| Once we have gained access to the internals remove the bulb from the lamp socket and set it aside. As a hint whenever I am working on a section I put the parts in an old peanut can to keep them together. After removing the bulb remove the two screws holding the pop bumper base from the playfield and safely put them aside. Always take care not to lose any parts.
+| Once we have gained access to the internals, remove the bulb from the lamp socket, and set it aside. A good tip is to place related parts from a section into an old peanut can or similar container to keep them together. At this point, '''do not remove''' the screws which secure the pop bumper body to the playfield.  Instead, turn the playfield over to access the pop bumper "guts" on the underside.<br>
-You will notice that after these screws have been removed you will not be able to remove the pop bumper from the playfield. It is still held on by the ring and rod assembly and by the lamp socket wires. From here we turn the game over to give us access to the pop bumper guts under the playfield. I have removed the playfield from the cabinet to make it easier to work on.
+Removing the playfield from the cabinet and placing it horizontally can make it much easier to work on. However, take '''special precautions''' not to crack or break plastics and other assemblies which are elevated higher than the playfield rails.  The playfield should not be resting on these types of assemblies if it is turned over. Otherwise, these assemblies can and probably will break. <br>
 |- valign="top"
 ! scope="row" | [[File:UnderA.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Pop Bumper Under playfield]]
-| This is the under playfield look at the pop bumper with parts identified.
+| Here is a look at the underside of the playfield with the pop bumper with parts identified (click on image to enlarge).
 |- valign="top"
 ! scope="row" | [[File:UnderB.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Remove mounting bracket]]
-| The next step is to remove the mounting bracket for the bumper. This is done by removing the two screws that hold the solenoid bracket and removing the four screws that hold the entire bracket to the playfield. Note that you do not need to remove the plunger stop bracket at the top. On this game one of these top screws has been removed and not replaced. Probably by someone who removed it and did not place it in a peanut can to keep the parts together, but I digress.
+| Remove the mounting bracket for the bumper. This is done by removing the two screws which hold the pop bumper plunger and yoke assembly to the mounting bracket.  Next, remove the four screws which hold the mounting bracket to the playfield. In the case of this unit, removal of the pop bumper coil stop at the top is not necessary. On this game, one of the coil stop mounting screws has been removed, and not replaced. Probably by someone who removed it, and did not place it in a peanut can to keep the parts together, but I digress.<br>
+It is worth mentioning that most other manufacturers employ a pop bumper coil stop which is integral to the pop bumper mounting bracket, and not removable.  Chicago Coin, "classic" Stern, Data East, Sega, and "new" Stern are the exceptions.<br>
 |- valign="top"
 ! scope="row" | [[File:UnderC.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Remove rod and ring]]
-| Now remove the rod and ring by choosing an appropriate socket and unscrewing the nut cap from the rods. Once the rods are removed the plunger assembly can be lifted from the rods. Note how they are put together to restore it to original configuration. [[File:PlungerA.jpg|100px|thumb|left|Remove rod and ring]].
+| Now remove the rod and ring by choosing an appropriate socket and unscrewing the nut cap from the rods.  A 5/16" nutdriver is typically used.<br>
+|- valign="top"
+! scope="row" | [[File:PlungerA.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Pop bumper bracket with plunger, yokes, and spring removed]]
+| Once the rods are removed, the plunger assembly can be lifted from the rods. Take note how it is assembled to restore the assembly to its original configuration.
+|- valign="top"
+! scope="row" | [[File:UnderD.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Unsolder the lamp socket leads]]
+| Unsolder the lamp socket from the wires which feed it power.
 |- valign="top"
-! scope="row" | [[File:UnderD.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Unsolder the Lamp]]
+! scope="row" | [[File:UnscrewBase.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Remove screws from pop bumper body]]
-|[[File:LampA.jpg|100px|thumb|left|Remove unwanted solder]] Unsolder the lamp connections from the GI wires. This is all that is holding the remaining pop bumper body to the playfield. You will need to remove all of the excess remaining solder from the lamp wires as they will need to be clean to fit through the holes in the pop bumper base.
+| The playfield now has to be turned over again.  Remove the two screws inside the pop bumper body which secure it to the playfield, and safely put them aside. Always take care not to lose any parts.
-[[File:MessA.jpg|100px|thumb|none|Removed bumper]] Once the solder is cleaned up the entire pop bumper assembly can be extracted from the playfield, just look at that mess around the mylar protector
+|- valign="top"
+! scope="row" | [[File:MessA.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Removed bumper]]
+| The remaining portion of the pop bumper assembly on the top side of the playfield can now be removed.  Just look at that mess around the Mylar protector.<br>
+Once the body has been removed, and at some point prior to reinstalling it, clean the pop bumper spoon switch with rag or towel dipped in rubbing alcohol.  The spoon switch collects dirt, especially if any lubricants have been applied to it.
+|- valign="top"
+! scope="row" | [[File:LampA.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Remove unwanted solder]]
+| Removal of the excess remaining solder from the lamp socket leads is necessary, if the lamp socket is to be reused.  The leads will need to be clean to fit through the holes in the pop bumper base and body. If the lamp socket is not going to be reused, clip the socket leads just above the location where they were soldered.<br>
+Please note that the yellow piece on the tip of the skirt finger is not typically used with manufacturers other than this era of Chicago Coin.<br>
+It is also worth mentioning that Bally used metal skirt assemblies for a period during the mid-1960's.
 |- valign="top"
 ! scope="row" | [[File:UnderE.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Pop Bumper Shield]]
-| [[File:Shield.jpg|100px|thumb|left|Sheilds new and old]]This is not a playfield restoration narrative to be sure. However, clean the area throughly under the old shield. After the good cleaning place down a new shield. A new shield can be purchased for the various Pinball Suppliers. These shields come in two flavors, sticky and non-sticky. I prefer the sticker version as once down no more dirt and grim can get under them. The loose shields can be subject to the same wear as the originals. This really is a matter of preference. It may be necessary to cut the new replacement shield to fit. Use the removed shield as a guide to cutting the replacement.
+| This is not a playfield restoration narrative to be sure. However, clean the area thoroughly under the old platter. After a good cleaning place down a new shield. A new platter can be purchased from the various [http://pinwiki.com/wiki/index.php?title=Pinball_Parts_Suppliers pinball parts suppliers].
+|- valign="top"
+! scope="row" | [[File:Shield.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Shields new and old]]<br>
+| These shields come in two flavors, self-adhering and free-floating. The recommended version is self-adhering, because once it is applied to the playfield surface, dirt and grime cannot get under it. The free-floating platters can be subject to the same wear as the originals, if not kept constantly clean. Ultimately, it is all a matter of personal preference which style to use. It may be necessary to cut the new replacement platter to fit. Use the removed platter as a guide for cutting the new replacement.
 |- valign="top"
 ! scope="row" | [[File:UnderF.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Pop Bumper Anatomy]]
-| Now it's time to clean all of the pop bumper parts. This includes the skirt, base and body. Note how all of the pieces go together to reassemble. The base is a press fit into the pop bumper body and can be difficult to remove. Take your time and gently pry the pieces apart with a small screw driver, if required. Inside the base an body is a small spring that keeps the skit floating around and responding to pinball coming into contact with the skirt.
+| Now, it's time to clean all of the pop bumper parts. This includes the skirt, base, and body. Note how all of the pieces go together to reassemble. The base is press fit into the pop bumper body and can be difficult to remove. Take your time and gently pry the pieces apart with a small screw driver, if required. Inside the base is a small spring which allows the skirt to retract to its centered, "home" position, after a pinball comes in contact with it.<br>
-I wash the parts with soap and water in the sink. I suppose that they can also be put into the dishwasher for a cleaning, I do not do put them in the dishwasher. I will clean the rod and rings with chrome polish from the auto parts store to make them shine again. All of these parts can be purchased from the pinball suppliers.
+'''Take extra care with any plastic pieces which are hot ink stamped'''.  Even the most gentle cleaners like soap and water can possibly remove the ink.  Test a cleaning agent on a very, very small portion of an inked area first, before cleaning the whole inked area. <br>
+The best way to clean the plastic parts is with a mild liquid soap and and warm water in the sink.  On old toothbrush can be used to clean particularly dirty or hard to reach areas.  Another method is to place the parts in the dishwasher.  If using a dishwasher, do not put it on a heat dry cycle.  '''Do not put plastics which are hot ink stamped in the dishwasher!'''<br>
+Clean the rod and rings with chrome polish from any auto parts store to make them shine again. Replacement parts can be purchased from most of the recommended [http://pinwiki.com/wiki/index.php?title=Pinball_Parts_Suppliers pinball parts suppliers].<br>
+|- valign="top"
+! scope="row" | [[File:Pop_bumper_clean.JPG|200px|thumb|left| Reassemble the top portion of the pop bumper body]]
+| Reassembly is essentially the reversal of removal.<br>
+First, assemble the pop bumper body and associated parts which are located on the top of the playfield.  The order in which the parts go together is the pop bumper body, the rod and ring, the skirt, the small skirt spring, and then the base.  Next, insert the lamp socket leads into the top side of the pop bumper body.  Make certain to use the two openings in the body, which are not intended for securing the body to the playfield.<br>
+Please note that some of the pop bumper skirts will have a small pointed tip on them. This pointed tip should point to the top of the playfield when installed. Our example does not have this little skirt tip.  Next, place the pop bumper body onto the playfield, and using the two screws, secure the body to the playfield.  Once the pop bumper body is secured, turn the playfield over to expose the underside again.<br>
 |- valign="top"
 ! scope="row" | [[File:UnderG.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Pop Bumper Sleeves]]
-| Back to the solenoid, if you will notice there is a sleeve inside of the solenoid that the plunger moves back and forth inside. It is a good idea to replace this sleeve, again available from pinball suppliers. In this example there is metal sleeve and the photo shows next to a replacement nylon one. The sleeve fits inside of the solenoid and has a small lip that goes on the side of the solenoid away from the spring.
+| You will notice there is a sleeve inside of the solenoid, and the plunger moves back and forth inside of it. This is commonly referred to as a coil sleeve.  It is recommended to replace this sleeve, again available from most any of the recommended [http://pinwiki.com/wiki/index.php?title=Pinball_Parts_Suppliers pinball parts suppliers]. In this example, the original brass metal sleeve is on the right, and a new nylon replacement is on the left. Each style of sleeve has a small flange on one side.  When installing a new sleeve in a solenoid, make certain the flanged side is facing towards the coil stop, and away from the pop bumper spring.<br>
+Some manufacturers did not use replaceable coil sleeves prior to the 1960's.  In these cases, the coil sleeve is actually an integral part of the coil's windings.  If the coil sleeve is brass, and there appears to be great difficulty in trying to remove it, don't remove it.  Just clean it as best as possible.  If the sleeve is worn through, replacement of the coil is the only solution.
 |- valign="top"
 ! scope="row" | [[File:UnderH.jpg|200px|thumb|left| Reassemble the plunger]]
-| Reassembly is pretty much a reversal of removal. Place the pop bumper body onto the playfield and use the small lamp leads to hold it to the playfield. Bend the leads a little so that it remains in place and turn the playfield over to expose the guts again. Some of the pop bumper skirts will have a small tip on them. This top should point to the top of the playfield when installed. Our example does not have this little skirt tip.
+| Next, solder the lamp socket leads to the wires which feed power to the lamp. Then, place the plunger yokes over the rods, and secure the nuts to the rods. Do not over tighten these; Hercules need not apply here. Make them snug and secure. Along each step of the way, make sure the rod and ring moves freely, and that the skirt acts as if it is floating on the base. If things are not moving freely or feel restricted, go back and double check your work.<br>
-First, solder the GI lamps electrical wires to the lamp leads. Then place the plunger bottom assembly through the rods holes and place the nuts on the rods. Do not over tighten these guys, Hercules need not apply here. Make them snug and secure. Along each step of the way make sure the rods and ring move and that the skirt acts like it is floating on the base. If things are not moving or feel restricted go back and check your work.
 See how that plunger is shining in the picture, it was cleaned and polished too.
@@ Line 673: / Line 2,043: @@
 |- valign="top"
 ! scope="row" | [[File:UnderI.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Remount the bracket]]
-| Now it is time to remount the bracket. First re-secure the plunger bracket to the mount with the two removed screws. These two will have lock washers on them. Watch the way the solenoid is reinstalled. Make sure the wires are to the correct side or they could get in the way of the bumper action. Finally, secure the bracket to the underside of the playfield with the four (4) removed screws.
+| Now it is time to remount the bracket. Secure the plunger bracket to the mount with the two screws. These two screws will typically have captive lock washers on them. Next, place the solenoid over the plunger.  Pay special attention to the orientation of the solenoid lugs. Make certain the solenoid wires are facing the proper direction.  Otherwise, they may get in the way when the pop bumper activates. Finally, secure the bracket to the underside of the playfield with the 4 screws.
+|- valign="top"
+! scope="row" | [[File:PlungerB.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Inspect the switches]]
+| Now it is time to inspect the switches. The switch stack was not removed, so adjusting may not be needed. However, due to age and general wear, it may need some adjustment.  Equally, contacts which are slightly pitted should be burnished.<br>
+It is a good practice to make certain that the skirt finger is centered within the spoon switch.  Gently push on the center of the backside of the spoon switch.  If the skirt finger moves at all, adjustment is necessary.  Loosen the screws that mount the stack to the playfield, and adjust accordingly.  Once the spoon switch is properly adjusted, push down on the skirt from the top side of the playfield.  Push down at all points where a pinball can roll onto the skirt.  Doing this will ensure the spoon switch contacts properly make at all possible positions.
 |- valign="top"
-! scope="row" | [[File:UnderJ.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Check you switches]]
+! scope="row" | [[File:UnderJ.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Manually actuating the solenoid plunger]]
-| [[File:PlungerB.jpg|100px|thumb|left|Switches]]Now it is time to check your switches. The switch stack was not removed so should not normally need adjusting. Move the skirt around and see if the spoon switch makes and breaks contact. Also self activate the coil with you finger and see if the EOS switch breaks when the plunger is pulled in. Everything should be moving smooth with no binds. Check the rod and ring too for any bindings.
+|  Manually actuate the solenoid plunger with you finger by pushing down on the edge of the yoke.  If this case, make certain the normally closed EOS switch opens when the plunger is pulled in. In other cases, the switch activated by the yoke may be normally open.  Everything should be moving freely with no binds. Check the rod and ring too for any bindings.<br>
@@ Line 686: / Line 2,061: @@
 |}
+====Lamp Sockets====
+[[File:EMPopBumperSocket.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Improving performance of pop bumper lamp sockets. Squeeze the socket slightly...but not too tight!]]<br>
+Pop bumper sockets used by almost all manufacturers are almost always problematic. A pop bumper lamp has a tough life. The vibration environment inside the pop bumper body is pretty severe. The lamp filament is subject to a lot of abuse. Better electrical connection and (somewhat) reduced vibration can be achieved by gently and gradually squeezing the lamp socket with a sturdy pair of needle-nose pliers. You want to squeeze the socket together just enough so that the lamp fits snugly. Using a "lamp cleaning stick" to burnish the socket base also helps. Even if you decide to use a 6.3V AC powered LED in the pop bumper, improving the electrical connection will help.<br clear=all>
+===Score Motors===
+====Gottlieb® Score Motor====
+=====Gottlieb® Score Motor runs too fast (aka Super Fast scoring)=====
+[[file:Gottlieb50HzMotor.jpeg|thumb|right|Bottom view of a Gottlieb 50Hz (European) motor, part number B-11550.]]<br>
+Gottlieb® score motors for <b>US domestic</b> games are part number <b>B-7760</b>, and run on <b>60Hz</b> AC power.<br>
+Gottlieb® score motors for <b>European</b> games are part number <b>B-11550</b>, and run on the European standard <b>50Hz</b> AC power.<br>
+The score motor on games re-imported from Europe to the US will 20% faster since the European motor was designed to run on 50Hz but is being driven by 60Hz power.
+Some machines can stand this increased speed. Most of the problems occur with functions that are pulsed 5 times per 1/3 motor revolution, such as 5/50/500 points or bonus countdown. The hardware must be in perfect working order or it may skip scoring pulses since it is being run faster than it was designed for.
+There is really only one remedy and that is to source a US or European motor as applicable to your game/location.
+Installing a 120 to 100 step down transformer, reducing the voltage 20% won't help since it's the frequency of the AC power that needs to be matched. A European 50Hz motor, powered by 100VAC, 60Hz, will still run fast, but the rest of the game might seem sluggish, the same as it would be if a "low tap" were available.
+<br clear=all>
+=====Gottlieb® Score Motor will Not Stop Running: Frequent Cause=====
+Besides investigating Motor Switch 1C (as above), a frequent cause of a score motor that will not stop running is located in the score reels (when equipped). Each score reel has a ZERO POSITION switch, and EVERY switch must be open for the game to complete its startup routine. If the switch is maladjusted or bent closed, the score motor will run on and not stop. The score reels may continue to cycle the reel with the bad switch, so that could be a clue as to where to investigate first. The wiring of the switch should also be inspected, since even if the switch operates correctly, the reel will not complete the circuit to the score motor. There may be other causes for a score motor that will not stop rotating, but the zero position switch is very common and deserves a special mention.<br>
+=====Servicing and Lubrication of the Gottlieb® Score Motor=====
+[[file:GTBScoreMotorBottom.jpg|thumb|right|Bottom view of a GTB score motor. Use a few drops of 3-in-1 Oil in the indicated hole. Do NOT lubricate the brass gears]]<br>
+The score motor should have two kinds of lubrication when being serviced. A thin smear of a gel type grease like TEFLON GEL or similar should go on the edge of the top and bottom cams, and the studs which protrude from each. Excess lube that can get on the switch contacts must be avoided. In NO case, should you lube or oil the brass gears, and if someone has done so, remove the substance with a degreaser. The score motor itself takes a few drops of light oil like 3-in-1 oil, through a small hole in the base on the underside. To access the oil well of the score motor, most units were hinged, and held in place by a single hairpin opposite the hinged side.  Pull the hairpin out with some needle nose pliers, and the motor can now be pivoted upward. Make sure to replace the clip when done. Pivoting the unit upward is also helpful when trying to view or adjust motor switches located in levels A or B.<br>
+Unfortunately, Gottlieb® score motor units from the 1950's and early 1960's were physically screwed to the wood "motor board" from the underside of the board.  To access the motor's oil well, the large wood "motor board" has to be removed, turned on its side or upside down, and the screws holding the score motor assembly must be removed.  When removing the wood motor board, take precautions not to twist on contort wiring harnesses.
+<br clear=all>
+====Williams Score Motor====
+stub<br>
+====Bally Score Motor====
+stub<br>
+====Chicago Coin Score Motor====
+stub <br>
+====General: Score Motor Keeps Running====
+A common problem in EM games is the continuous running of the score motor.  The score motor controls the relay logic whenever a sequence of events is required, for example, during reset or when a target score requires multiple steps of a score reel.  Score motor problems can be difficult to isolate because there are usually many different functions in the machine that run the score motor.
+It’s important to note that the score motor running is a symptom of the problem and it’s unlikely that the actual problem is the score motor or a switch on the score motor.  To find the relay switches that enable the score motor, find the score motor on the schematics and trace the wire.  You’ll find a group of relay switches in parallel, each of which can energize the score motor.  Normally, those relays should not be energized, so a first check is to see if any are energized.  It’s also possible that a switch is bent and stuck closed.  Sliding a strip of business card between the switch contacts is a good way to make sure the switch is open.  Also check the switch solder tabs to make sure they didn’t get bent and shorted together.
+If the score motor starts running when you power-on the game, a common problem is stuck coin switches on the coin door.
+If the score motor continues to run after you start a new game, then the machine has not properly completed it’s reset sequence.  Problems here are often in the score reel zero position switches or the bonus unit zero position switch.  There are often multiple switches that indicate the zero position, so even though the mechanism appears to have reset correctly, the switch used to indicate completion (zero-position) to the reset circuitry may be malfunctioning.
 ===Kickers/Slingshots===
+[[file:HotShotSling.jpg|thumb|left|200px|Typical EM game "kicker" or "slingshot". This one is from a Gottlieb Hot Shot.]]<br>
+EM game design often included triangular "slingshots" near the bottom of the playfield. Operation of slingshots is pretty simple. As pictured left, most slings have 2 standup switch pairs. When the ball impacts the rubber ring, one or both of these switches will close, routing coil power to the slingshot coil. The coil pulls a plunger in, which is attached to the kicker arm via a pivot joint. The kicker then kicks the entire sling rubber forward.
+Adjustment for optimum performance of slingshots is important. Solid "Kick" factors include:
+#Proper sized rubber ring.
+#Tension of rubber ring.
+#Gap between standup switch contacts
+#Cleanliness of standup switch contacts. These contacts tend to build up carbon. Filing lightly will improve performance.
+#Distance of the kicker arm from where the ball impacts the rubber.
+#Overall length of the playfield facing sling kicker dimension. Shorter kickers impart a greater percentage of the kicker arm energy.
+#Friction at Plunger/Link/Kicker arm pivot points.
+#Alignment of plunger with coil sleeve.
+#Cleanliness of coil sleeve.
+#Condition of built-in coil stop on kicker coil bracket.
+#"Mushrooming" of kicker coil plunger.
+#Electrical current provided to the kicker coil.
+#And there may be others...
+===Chime Units===
+Chimes in electro-mechanical games evolved from discrete bells (or chimes) to "chime boxes" where all (or most) of the games chimes were collocated. Except for the occasional fried coil due to a scoring relay locking on, or a broken/missing nylon plunger tip, they are generally trouble free.
+One exception is the Gottlieb chime box of the 1970s. Gottlieb used "beer tape" under each chime plunger to cushion the plunger's fall after chiming. Over time, this beer tape disintegrates into a sticky "goo", acts like contact cement, and prevents the chime plungers from being pulled up through the coil sleeve.
+Correction is easy...<br>
+#Disassemble the unit.
+#Scrape the beer tape residue off.
+#Use naphtha or isopropyl alcohol to clean down to the metal.
+#Replace the beer tape with your choice of cushioning material, as shown below. Ensure that the material is roughly the same thickness as the original pad. If the material is too thin, the chime plunger may not pull up into the coil sleeve.
+<center>
+<gallery widths=200px heights=200px perrow=3 caption="Gottlieb Chime Unit Restoration">
+File:EMGottliebChimePlungerPadGoo.jpg|<center><b>Uh-oh. This doesn't look good.</b></center>
+File:EMGottliebChimePlungerPads.jpg|<center><b>Chime unit disassembled. The problem can clearly be seen.</b></center>
+File:EMGottliebChimePlungerPadsNew.jpg|<center><b>Here we've cleaned up the gooey mess. We decided to use stick on carpet sliders as pads.</b></center>
+</gallery>
+</center>
+<br clear=all>
+====Solid State Chime Unit in my EM Game?====
+[[Image:WicoSoundBoardFromSpaceMission.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Primitive WICO aftermarket sound board]]
+WICO produced a primitive solid state chime unit for use in Electro-Mechanical games. The one pictured at left was installed in a Williams Space Mission. The sounds produced are often described as "awful".
+A later model of WICO sound board was also produced. A video of it operating on a test bench can be found [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9tG0P6oBcME here].
+<br clear=all>
 ===Flippers===
-====Photo Identification of Different Styles of Flipper Assemblies====
-{|
+====Noisy/Buzzing Flippers====
-|[[File:GottliebSurfSideFlipperLowe.jpg|thumb|Late Style 2" Gottlieb Flipper from 1967 Surf Side]]||[[File:GottliebSurfSideFlipperUpper.jpg|thumb|Late Style 2" Gottlieb Upper Flipper from 1967 Surf Side. Note- Lack of EOS switch & unusual triangular bakelite link]]
+When a flipper is held in the up position, some buzzing is not uncommon, especially in machines with AC voltage coils.  The buzzing can be minimized by ensuring that the plunger and coil stop are flat and that the coil and all parts of the flipper mechanism are tight.  The plunger and coil stop may need to be filed flat if they have mushroomed out.   A spring (wave) washer that keeps tension on the coil can also help.
-|}
+Flipper return springs that are too tight can also cause buzzing flippers.  With the playfield up, the springs should just barely return the flippers to their resting position.
+Excessive buzzing can indicate that the flipper coil is not switching to the hold coil at the end-of-stroke.  You can read about flipper coils in PinWiki section [[General#Flippers|Flippers]].  In a typical EM flipper circuit, the low-resistance (~2-8 ohms) power winding is in series with the high-resistance (~10-20 ohms) hold winding.  The flipper end-of-stroke (EOS) switch shorts out the hold coil when the flipper is at rest.  When the flipper button is pressed and power is applied to the flipper coil, the power coil flips the flipper.  Near the end-of-stroke, the EOS switch opens which switches the hold coil into the circuit.  The combined high resistance coil is enough to hold the flipper up.  If a fast-moving ball should knock the flipper down, the EOS switch closes and the power coil keeps the flipper up.
+There are alternative flipper wiring in some machines, so check your schematics to see how your flippers are wired.
+If the EOS switch isn’t working, the power coil will be active while the flipper is up.  This typically causes a very loud buzz from the flipper.  Also, the flipper coil will rapidly overheat if the flipper is held up.  The power winding of the flipper coil is only designed for low duty-cycle operation.
+====Weak Flippers====
+If the EOS switch is not making good contact, the hold winding will not be properly shorted out when the flipper is at rest.  This will result in a weak flipper.
+====Gottlieb Mid-70's Flipper Crank Set Screws====
+[[File:GTB 70s Flip Crank.JPG|left|thumb|200px|The offending set screws used on some Gottlieb flipper cranks]]
+[[File:GTB 70s Flip Crank2.JPG|thumb|right|200px|Showing the different set screws which can be used on Gottlieb flipper cranks]]<br>
+A word of caution.  There is one style of set screw that was used by Gottlieb which should be replaced.  When removing, add solder to the screw (this will transfer heat better) and heat it with a soldering iron or soldering gun.  Also, use a good 3/16" nutdriver to remove the set screw.  Do not attempt to use a flat blade screwdriver.  If an individual is fortunate enough to be able to remove the offending set screw without issue, '''throw them out'''!  This style of set screw shown in the pics can easily snap off when tightening the screw too.
 <br clear=all>
-===Power Supply Issues===
+===Power Issues===
 '''Williams silicon bridge rectifier:'''
@@ Line 704: / Line 2,187: @@
 Bally also used a bridge to convert AC to DC for various coils (usually flippers) in some of their games.  The wiring is similar to Williams' and the diagnosis of a bad bridge/fuse blown is the same - check the end of stroke switches on the flippers, and for any stuck contacts on pop bumpers, sling kickers, etc.
+<br clear=all>
+===Replacing a Power Cord===
+After many years, it is likely that your power cord on your old EM will need to be replaced.  This could be for a number of reasons.  Sometimes they get old and brittle, sometime they get cut and spliced with electrical tape or whatever.  Replacing the cord is not too difficult.
+The first thing you need to decide is if you are going to upgrade your existing setup or merely just replace like for like.  EMs come with both grounded and ungrounded plugs.  If you are replacing a grounded 3 prong plug with another one, your best bet it to just buy a 3 prong cord from Pinball resource, de-solder the old one and solder in the new one exactly how the old one was.  Be careful not to switch the hot and neutral wires as that would make the game less safe.
+If you are doing a straight swap of a two prong plug for a two prong plug, the easiest and cheapest solution is to buy a 12 foot or longer brown extension from a big box home improvement store, a mom and pop hardware store or even a dollar store.  Cut off the female end, split and strip the wires.  But which wire goes where?  The new plug will be polarized, in other words, it can only go into the outlet in one direction.  The old plug likely was not polarized and can go in either way.  This is actually a good thing, because by carefully hooking up your new cord, you will make your game safer.
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=180px perrow=3 caption="Two Prong Power Cord Replacement">
+File:StartingPoint.jpg|A typical power cord which requires replacing
+File:PowerCordHookUp.jpg|The hook up for a two pronged, polarized line cord. Note that the ribbed side goes to the transformer
+</gallery>
+</center>
+The reason a cord is polarized is so that you will know where the hot wire is.  The hot wire is the one that should always be switched and fused.  Why is this?  If you check for voltage at a plug with a multimeter, you will see that you get about 120v from the hot (small) slot to either the neutral (large) slot or the round (ground) hole.  Within your household wiring, the ground is actually tied back to the neutral at the breaker.  Furthermore, the ground is tied back to the earth at some point.  If you switch off the neutral, rather than the hot wire, YOU could supply the ground, even if the game is turned off or there is a blown fuse.  Current could flow through YOU to the earth.  This would be a bad day.  By switching off the hot wire, you minimize this risk.  Further discussion on household wiring convention is here, if you are interested:   http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/electric/hsehld.html
+So, which wire is hot and which is neutral?  You can follow from the male end of your plug and see that the smaller (hot) side of your cord is SMOOTH.  This is what gets hooked up to your fuse block.  The ribbed (neutral) side gets hooked up to your transformer.
+===Adding an On/Off Switch to an EM===
+Many EMs from the mid-sixties and earlier had a “kick-off” switch.  While this was the on/off mechanism for these machines, it really wasn’t a great set up.  The way the circuit worked was that it was always “at the ready” to come to life if you dropped a coin in, even after you kicked it off.  The line (110v) voltage went through the fuse and several normally closed switched (often including a slam switch in the METAL door).  When you dropped a coin in this would complete the circuit to the 110v side of the transformer, which would, in turn, pull in the hold relay on the 25v side of the transformer.  The hold relay had 110 volts going though it’s switch which supplied the line voltage to the transformer for the duration of the time that the game was on.  When the bottom of the machine was kicked in the area of the kick-off switch, it momentarily cut primary voltage to the transformer and everything would go dead, including the hold relay, so now the machine was “off”, waiting for somebody to drop a coin in and wake it up again.
+This is a less than ideal setup for a number of reasons.  First, I just don’t like to kick the bottom of my 50 year old machines.  Second, the 110v to the coin door is just asking for trouble.  Third, the hold relay is bad news, often getting quite crispy from being on all the time.  Finally, I never feel comfortable with all that voltage “at the ready” within my machine.  I want to know it is switched off in a positive manner.  The following modification will make an early machine close to a seventies style on/off setup.  You can choose to bypass as many of the NC switches as you want to improve the safety and reliability of the game.  I personally choose to bypass all of them, get the 110v out of the coin door and disable the hold relay.  You really don’t need all those slam and cheat switches in a home use environment and all they do is decrease the reliability of your game.
+My preferred method is to disconnect the line wire from the downstream end of the fuse block.  This is not the brown plug wire, but the wiring that is part of the harness.  From here, run a length of wire up to the “traditional” switch area on to the right of the coin box.  Now, find the hold relay switch pair with the 110v and de-solder those from the relay.  Solder those two wires together, along with a new wire that also runs up to the switch area of the cabinet.  Install a switch between the two added wires, shrink tube the splice and you are good to go.  A good installation will also have the switch sitting in a recess in the bottom of the cabinet, so it does not get broken off.  See a stock game with a switch for how that should look.
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=3 caption="Wiring in a New On/Off Switch">
+File:PowerCordHookUp.jpg|This picture shows the new power cord installed and the fuse block after the original wire was removed and the new, larger (14 ga. but 16 ga. would have been fine) one added.
+File:RedtoBlacktoBlack.jpg|The smaller black and red wires, just to the left of the shrink tubing were pulled off the hold relay and soldered together and also to the  single black wire coming out of the splice to the right. The lower, larger, light red/pink wire is the new wire installed at the fuse block. This is downstream of the fuse.
+File:HookUpSwitch2.jpg|The splice on the black wire is almost complete. Just need to slide over the shrink tube and heat it up.
+</gallery>
+</center>
+Another way is to simply de-solder the kick-off switch and run those wires over to your new switch.  I have also seen the switch simply added with a wire going from the fuse block to the switch and back to the “downstream” wire that used to be on the fuse block.  All these methods will “work”, but you will still be running 110v through all the normally closed slam switches and into the coin door if you choose to add the switch this way.
+Regardless of how you wire it, the switch should go into a wooden recessed switch block, similar to those used on later machines.  The following describes how to modify your cabinet to add a recessed switch.  You may actually want to do the cabinet modifications prior to the wiring modifications.
+First, get some birch plywood, cut to 3"x5" and find the center by connecting the corners.   Now, drill out the center and coat the plywood with a heavy coat of Tightbond or similar grade wood glue.  DON'T use gorilla glue.  Next, use a big wood screw or deck screw and screw the block all the way through the bottom.  Let it dry overnight.  Remove the screw and use a hole saw to cut out the hole for the switch.  Note how the hole left by the screw will be gone after the large hole is cut.  Only saw about half way through. Now go from the bottom up to minimize splintering.  The cabinet is now ready for your switch.
+<center>
+<gallery widths=150px heights=180px perrow=5 caption="Modifying your cabinet for an On/Off Switch">
+File:BlockCutandMark.jpg|A 3" x 5" block of birch plywood, cut and with the center marked.
+File:GlueBlock.jpg|Block with glue smeared on it and a pilot hole for the clamping screw drilled into it.
+File:ScrewBlock.jpg|Block installed and with a large screw through the middle of it to hold it overnight until the glue dries.
+File:HoleSawTop.jpg|Hole saw started from the top. Go half way and then finish from the bottom.
+File:CabDone.jpg|Finished cabinet, as viewed from the bottom. Ready for switch installation.
+</gallery>
+</center>
+In order to mount your switch above the hole, you will need to attach it to a plate of some sort.  Some people use hardboard (similar to peg board) and some people use a metal plate from the hardware store.  I feel the cleanest installation is to use a plate that is made for this purpose and scavenged off another machine.  Note that most machines have two of these plates mounted back to back.  This was to not allow access to the threaded ring from the outside of the game, presumably to cut down on vandalism.  In a home use environment, you really don’t need two plates on each machine, so you can easily scavenge one off a later machine that has two plates and use the “extra” one here.  If you really want to finish it off nice, add an original switch cover.  This will be tougher to find, as you will need something from a parts machine.  To finish up and make it look nice, either zip tie or lace the new wires together and use a cable strap to tie them down so they will not get in the way.  You can reference another machine to make it look “factory”.
+<center>
+<gallery widths=220px heights=200px perrow=3 caption="Wiring in a New On/Off Switch">
+File:Laceing.jpg|This picture shows the lacing used to bundle the new wires.  Lacing was how EM wiring harnesses were originally constructed.
+File:CableDone.jpg|This picture shows the completed lacing.  You could also zip tie it.
+File:FinishedOnOff.jpg|The completed installation of the new on/off switch.
+</gallery>
+</center>
+===Roto Targets===
+===Vari Targets===
+===Wax Lacing for EM wire bundles===
+<add a picture of a laced bundle here><br>
+[[file:WaxLacingTechnique.jpg|thumb|left|Wax Lacing Technique, right and wrong...]]<br>
+An excellent resource for learning how to tie wax lacing around wire bundles can be found [http://www.dairiki.org/hammond/cable-lacing-howto/ here]. Of course, wax lacing is for the purist. It's much easier to use "zip ties" these days.
+<br clear=all>
+===Flattening Playfield Light Shields (Plastics)===
+<i>by Chris Hibler</i><br>
+Many techniques have been offered for bringing your playfield plastics back to their original flat form on RGP.
+I've used the "camp stove method" which works pretty good but the risk of "bubbling" irreplaceable plastics is too high. I've never used the "oven method" as I just don't like the idea of putting irreplaceable plastics in an oven. Sure, it's a controlled environment, but I think the option detailed below works better as it's impossible to leave the plastics in the "oven" too long.
+In St. Louis, the hot summers are perfect for flattening plastics. This procedure is simple and completely fool-proof. It is nearly impossible to ruin your plastics using this method, the one caveat being extremely warped, brittle plastics (butyrates) from older games. I don't know how anyone would deal with those anyway.
+<b>Procedure</b><br>
+<ol>
+<li>Remove the playfield plastics and clean with Novus 1 or your choice of cleaner. I like Novus 1 as it's very mild on plastics.</li>
+<li>Use Windex to clean two sheets of playfield glass. Let the Windex evaporate completely.</li>
+<li>Sandwich the plastics between the two sheets of glass in a hot place. If the plastics are extremely warped, don't lay the top sheet of glass down all at once. Rest the edge of the glass on something that will allow the plastics to heat up for an hour or so, then lay the top sheet down all the way. Note: I've never had to do this but your mileage may vary.</li>
+</ol>
+[[file:FlatteningPlasticsTopView.jpg|thumb|left|A shot from above the plastics/glass sandwich]]<br>
+<b>Top View</b><br>
+Here I chose my truck bed in direct sunlight. The black bed liner increases the heat.<br>
+These plastics are from [http://www.ipdb.org/machine.cgi?id=828 Gottlieb's 1975 Fast Draw/Quick Draw]
+<br clear=all>
+[[file:FlatteningPlasticsSideView.jpg|thumb|left|A shot from the side of the plastics/glass sandwich]]<br>
+<b>Side View</b><br>
+Here's a side shot of the setup. The yellow arrows point to the two sheets of glass.<br>
+You can see that the warped plastics lift the top sheet just a bit.<br>
+As the plastics soften, the top sheet will gradually sink.<br>
+<br clear=all>
+<ol start=4>
+<li>Wait 2 or 3 hours. What I like most about this method is that the timing is not critical. I usually set the plastics out some time during the day then wait for sundown to bring them in. It's impossible to "over cook" them.</li>
+<li>Carefully remove and allow to dry in a cooler location.</li>
+<li><b>The Final Step:</b> Pour your favorite cold beverage and marvel at your genius.</li>
+</ol>
+<br clear=all>
 ==Test Procedures==
@@ Line 723: / Line 2,316: @@
 Solder the burned out fuse to the spade terminals of the circuit breaker as shown in the photo. Alternatively, make a two wire female spade mini harness, and solder the bare wires to each end of the bad fuse and attach the circuit breaker that way.<br clear=all>
+==Game Cosmetic Improvement Techniques==
+===Insert Leveling===
+[[File:PlayfieldInserts.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Loose Playfield Lamp Inserts on a 1956 Williams "Hot Diggity". <i>Image courtesy of Steve Schukei.</i>]]<br>
+Some games, Gottlieb Buccaneer and Gottlieb Royal Flush for instance, suffer from loose playfield inserts. Gluing inserts back into place can be tedious. Gorilla glue and SuperGlue are often suggested.
+[[image:YT.png]] One excellent method of "leveling" the insert perfectly, can be seen in the YouTube video posted by EM game aficionado <i>Steve Schukei</i> [https://youtu.be/IUeEmd83IRE <b><u>here</u></b>].
+<br clear=all>
 ==Resources==
@@ Line 731: / Line 2,332: @@
 There is also an "empinbalmachines" group on Yahoo! Groups.
 http://games.groups.yahoo.com/group/empinbalmachines/
-Team-EM provides help via e-mail.  From the Team-EM site at http://www.team-em.com/ you can send an e-mail to the team (the link is at the bottom of the page).
 Here is a handy file showing what fits what and the dimensions for coils and sleeves.
@@ Line 739: / Line 2,338: @@
 ==Game Specific Problems and Fixes==
-Example would be servo controller on Independence Day pinball
+===Gottlieb 2001===
+A discussion of how to mod your game so that the drop targets reset after all targets down can be found here:  http://pinside.com/pinball/forum/topic/give-your-2001-reset-drop-targets
+===Hacking a Fix for Quick Draw/Fast Draw Scoring===
+<i>Procedure by Steve Charland (RIP my friend). Photos, video, and text by Chris Hibler, Updated schematic by Scott Charles</i>
+Gottlieb's 1975 classic [http://www.ipdb.org/machine.cgi?id=828 "Fast Draw"] sometimes suffers from a timing problem which results in 100 points being added to each player's score as the player unit advances during a single player game. Similar problems can occur in multi-player games. Steve Charland identified a very simple "hack" to fix this problem way back in 1999. Several people, including Steve, myself, and Scott Charles (seymour-shabow on RGP) have successfully implemented the hack. It corrects the problem 100% of the time.
+There have been some reports that this problem can also occur in Fast Draw's 2-player brother, [http://www.ipdb.org/machine.cgi?id=1893 "Quick Draw"], as well as [http://www.ipdb.org/machine.cgi?id=2459 "Surf Champ"], [https://www.ipdb.org/machine.cgi?id=823 "Far Out"], and [http://www.ipdb.org/machine.cgi?id=2035 "Royal Flush"].
+The "hack" will correct the problem in these games too.
+[[File:FastDrawHead.jpg|200px|thumb|left| ]]<br>
+<b>A video recording of the problem</b><br>
+Click [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3Nw2GnSLFHI here] for a YouTube video of the problem manifestation...
+<br clear=all>
+In an old [http://groups.google.com/group/rec.games.pinball/browse_frm/thread/27733dac23315cc1/dcaa9ec629da8667?hl=en&ie=UTF-8&oe=utf-8&q=kirb+fast+draw+motor+group:rec.games.pinball#dcaa9ec629da8667 RGP] post, "Kirb" suggested several switch adjustments that can be made to minimize the problem. These adjustments may not eliminate the problem entirely. If you don't want to implement the hack, you can try these adjustments instead.
+#OPEN the gap of the trough switch (under the apron) . Make sure this switch is only closed when the ball just rolls over the switch. The idea is to have this switch closed for the shortest time possible. (BIG help)
+#OPEN the gap of motor 2D (yellow and blue wire) so that it does not reset the drop targets sooner than it has to.
+#OPEN the gap of motor 1C (yellow/black and red/white wire) to block the sealing of the J relay.
+<b>On to the "hack"...</b><br>
+The problem occurs because the "500 Point and Add Bonus Unit" relay (J on Fast Draw, E on Far Out) is energized when the drop targets are being reset as the player unit advances. By placing a switch in series with the J relay, we can prevent J from being energized. To do this, add a normally closed switch to the "Add Player Unit" relay (P), in series with J relay power. When P is energized, the normally closed switch that we'll add will open, breaking the circuit to J.
+Note: Clicking on the thumbnails below will open a larger version of the image.
+[[File:J-Relay-Annotated.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Modifications at the "J" Relay]]<br>
+<b>J relay mods...</b><br>
+Remove the slate+white wire from the J relay. Leave the wire that goes from this lug to the coil in place. That wire "seals in" the relay. In this game, that wire was brown but YMMV. In place of the slate+white wire, solder a new wire that is about 12 inches long. Note: the other wire on this switch blade pair is brown-white-red but Gottlieb reds fade badly so this can't be seen in the photo.
+Next, add about 9 more inches of wire to the end of the slate-white wire that was removed.
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:P-Relay-Annotated.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Modifications at the "P" Relay]]<br>
+<b>P relay mods...</b><br>
+Add a normally closed switch to the end of the P relay. Solder the extended slate+white wire to one lug. Solder the new wire that you added from the J relay to the other lug. Which wire you solder to which lug is immaterial. Here I used a white wire with an orange tracer.
+The switch that is added should be arranged as such: spacer, long blade, spacer, spacer, short blade, spacer, switch stack backing plate, screws. Using the right length screws is important as they cannot impinge on the relay armature.
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:CompleteWiring-Annotated.jpg|200px|thumb|left|An overview of the complete wiring "hack"]]<br>
+<b>The big picture...</b><br>
+Be sure to check the gap for each switch on the P relay. Be sure that your new switch is adjusted normally closed and that it opens when P pulls in.
+Note the heat shrink tubing where the slate+white wire was joined to the added white+orange wire. Zip-ties were used to tidy up the wiring.
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:UpdatedSchematic.jpg|200px|thumb|left|The applicable schematic snippet, updated to show the "hack" as implemented]]<br>
+<b>And an updated schematic snip-it...</b><br>
+This schematic diagram was provided by Scott Charles. The location of the NC switch was moved to reflect where it was implemented in this game.
+<br clear=all>
+===Hacking a Gottlieb Lucky Hand===
+<i>Procedure by Steve Charland, parts by Tim Meighan</i><br>
+Gottlieb used the same playfield layout for two great games in 1977, [http://www.ipdb.org/machine.cgi?id=1281 Jacks Open] and [http://www.ipdb.org/machine.cgi?id=1488 Lucky Hand]. Jacks Open is the replay version of the game while Lucky Hand is the Add-A-Ball version of the game. Lucky Hand could be set so that the "WOW" feature awarded either an extra ball or 50,000 points (novelty setting). On novelty setting, players could accumulate much higher scores which were indicated by "lightbox" type scoring in addition to the normal score reels.<br>
+On an [http://groups.google.com/group/rec.games.pinball/topics?tsc=1&hl=en RGP] challenge by Mike Ostradick on June 18, 2007 ([http://tinyurl.com/26x6og link]), armed with a Lucky Hand to work with and an extensive background in EM pins, Steve Charland developed the following "hack" which modifies Lucky Hand so that the lightbox advance feature unit is split, awarding extra balls (WOW's) AND counting scores over 199,990 points instead of one or the other.<br>
+A player could now score up to 1,999,990 points while accumulating extra balls during add-a-ball play. Nice.
+<br>
+<b>WARNING:</b> I suggest reading all of what needs to be done before jumping in on this hack. You might be in over your head and should stop before you kill your game (or not, if you do it the easy way). This is something that should only be done if you have a good grasp of EM function and the ability to read a schematic so you don't get lost.
+<br>
+[[File:BothWOWandNoveltyModeLit.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+Our Objective, shown here is to enable both the Add-A-Ball feature and "novelty" scoring. Note how the picture shows 1,999,990 points scored plus 5 extra balls (the 5 "WOW"s that are illuminated).
+Note: Clicking on any of the small pictures will open a larger picture in a new browser window.
+<br clear=all>
+<b>SELECTING THE BEST DISK AND WIPER SET FOR THIS HACK</b>
+I picked a bonus unit disk set for this hack because it has just about everything you need to make it work. You will have to add 3 wipers to the wiper disk to make all 5 WOW's light when won. It looks a lot nicer when you use the correct parts and wire in to the same harness for the hack. My good friend Tim Meighan was kind enough to make a matching disk/wiper set for this hack to make my game look correct. He can be contacted at TimMeighan@msn.com if you would like to purchase a set of ready-made disks from him, or have him add more rivets to yours. Also thanks to Tim for contributing to this article.
+Here are some pics of Tim's work, used in the implementation of this "hack".
+Left to right:
+a. back of custom disk,
+b. Both custom disk and wiper,
+c. back of custom wiper,
+d. front of custom wiper,
+e. Custom disk and wiper installed.
+<center>
+<gallery widths=150px heights=150px perrow=5 caption="Custom Disks Used in the Hack">
+File:BackofCustomDisk.jpg|<center><b>back of custom disk</b></center>
+File:CustomDisks.jpg|<center><b>Both custom disk and wiper</b></center>
+File:DiskWipersInstalledBack.jpg|<center><b>Back of custom wiper</b></center>
+File:DiskWipersInstalledFront.jpg|<center><b>Front of custom wiper</b></center>
+File:CustomDisksInstalled.jpg|<center><b>Custom disk and wiper installed</b></center>
+</gallery>
+</center>
+<b>SPLITTING THE WOW/100,000 UNIT</b>
+Gottlieb wasn't one to waste space or money on lots of extra parts. In the case of some of their later add-a-ball games, they took this philosophy to the extreme, allowing two completely different features to operate from one stepper unit. Of course, only one of these two features could be functional on location at a time and the one you got depended on whether the game was set to add-a-ball or novelty play.
+One of these features was to keep track of "add-a-balls" (accumulated extra balls) earned through WOW's. On Gottlieb EM's, a WOW is the add-a-ball equivalent of a SPECIAL on a replay game. The other feature was to provide lightbox bulb-scoring of multiple 100,000's beyond what the score reels could hold, since the reels simply rolled back over to zero after 99,990.
+It's easy to see that both of these features are desirable, so our objective with this hack is to split this unit and activate BOTH features at the same time during normal game play. There are two ways to complete this objective. Remove the "WOW" portion from the "lightbox advance" unit, or remove the "100,000" count from it. I chose the WOW to start because it *seemed* simpler but after it was done, really isn't, I'm always doing things the hard way. Both methods move about the same amount of wires but there is very little switch adjustment to do in the second hack. Would I do the hack again this way? NO, I'd go the other route but nothing is learned that way (especially by me). We'll go over doing the easy hack too. (make sure the wire used to run the coils is at least 18 gauge, 20 gauge for any lights minimum) The neat part about both hacks that the game can be converted back to original since you don't have to cut any wires. :)
+<b>MOVING THE "WOW" FEATURE TO A SEPARATE UNIT</b>
+[[File:1. WowUnitPlacement.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. Install another stepper unit in head (ball count stepper is best choice, we'll call it the "WOW" unit now). Make sure it doesn't touch any wires or light busses where installed (any wiring that can touch the chassis will have to be moved). Add the modified disk set to it.
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:2. JonesPlugSelection.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. Add a male Jones plug to novelty plug location in the head. This is optional but I like to do it when working out a new hack as an additional point of reference.
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:3. JonesPlug.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. Remove the wire (white-red on Lucky Hand) from the add-a-ball Jones plug that runs to the 100,000 relay and jumper it over to the added novelty plug to it's opposite correct pin location. This disables the 100,000 relay ("JX" relay on Lucky Hand, possibly other games as well) and allows the "lightbox advance" unit to step up to 1,900,000 (in Lucky Hand).
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:4. Old5thPositionSwitch.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. Remove the lead wire (black-white wire on Lucky Hand) from the 5th position cam limiting switch on the "lightbox advance" unit disk and leave it loose for now. This switch is no longer needed on this unit and will be moved to the added "WOW" unit later.
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:5. CoilGroundLine.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. Install a jumper on the added "WOW" unit from one coil solder lug to the other, then run one black wire from one of the leads to any coil black return lead. We'll visit these coils again in a later step. Be sure to leave enough room in *all* of the "WOW" unit wiring you install so you can still open it and work on the backside.
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:6. JumperFromChassisToChassis.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. Run a new wire from the added "novelty" Jones plug hot lead for the 100,000 feature lights up to the added "WOW" unit light tab on the chassis. (WOW and 100,000 counting lights) so both features light up at the same time. Another place to add this jumper that seems easier is on the "lightbox advance" unit itself at the end of the same leads as on the Jones plugs. (wire colors are maroon-yellow and maroon-orange on Lucky Hand)
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:7. MovingTheWOWFeatureLights.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. Remove all 5 WOW light wires (wire colors are blue-black, orange-black, brown-black, green-black & slate-black on Lucky Hand) from the "lightbox advance" unit disk and jumper them down to the added "WOW" unit disk in their proper positions. Now the easy work is done, both features should now be lit and the "lightbox advance" unit should now work properly. NOTE: One problem that will fix itself later as we move switches is that at this point, the through switch will take off 100,000 points each time a ball rolls over it. However, the added "WOW" unit should step up and down manually. From now on, we'll call the "lightbox advance" unit the "100,000 unit.
+<br clear=all>
+<b>MAKING THE WOW UNIT STEP UP</b>
+[[File:8. 1st.AddedSwitch.WOWUnit.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. This is one of 3 new switches that must be added to the backside of the added "WOW" unit runout post. Remember the wire (black-white wire on Lucky Hand) you removed from the "100,000" unit cam switch on step 4 above? Splice a wire to it and run it down to the added "WOW" unit switch on the backside of the unit. After stepping up, this switch must open when the post on the stepper gear touches it (just like a ball count unit).
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:9. JumperToStepupCoil.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. Add a jumper wire from the run out switch to the step up coil. If done correctly, the "WOW" unit will now step up.
+<br clear=all>
+<b>MAKING THE KNOCKER POP AT STEP UP OF THE "WOW" UNIT</b>
+Gotta have that POP when you win an extra ball!
+[[File:10. Red-greenWireRemoved-Capped.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]
+[[File:10a. KnockerWire.jpg|200px|thumb|right]]<br>
+. Remove the wire (red-green on Lucky Hand) from the add-a-ball Jones plug that connects up the knocker to the female portion of the plug. Cap it off since you won't be needing it. Add a wire to the solder lug and then run it up to the step up coil on the "WOW" unit. The knocker will now fire every time you win an extra ball.
+<br clear=all>
+<b>MAKING BOTH UNITS RESET AND THE "WOW" UNIT STEP DOWN WITH THE "BALL COUNT" UNIT</b>
+We'll deal with reset completed runout switches first. Right now, there are two, one on the "ball count" unit and one on the "100,000" unit. Another switch needs to be added in line with these two and installed on the added "WOW" unit. I chose to put the new switch between the zero position ball count and "100,000" reset completed switches. This switch will tell the game that the "WOW" unit has reset along with everything else and to then stop the reset.
+[[File:11. RunoutSwitch.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]
+[[File:11a. 2nd.AddedSwitch.WOWUnit.jpg|200px|thumb|right]]<br>
+. Remove the reset runout wire off of the switch on the "100,000" unit. It should be the switch closest to the stepper post (brown-white-red wire on Lucky Hand). Add a wire to this wire and run it to the new runout switch (second added switch) on the "WOW" unit. From there, add another wire to the other side of the new switch and run it back to the place you removed the original wire (brown-white-red wire on Lucky Hand) from the "100,000" unit. This switch should close when the "WOW" unit is at zero and the AXR relay will now trip when all of the resets are completed on the game.
+Now on to the reset of the "WOW" unit. Right now, you should have a problem with the through switch resetting the 100,000 unit since it's set up to step down the WOW count instead. This needs to be corrected and moved to the "WOW" unit instead. Also, there is a zero position game over switch on the "100,000" unit that needs to be moved down to the "WOW" unit. This switch turns off the "ball count" unit when a extra ball is won and allows the "ball count" unit to advance to game over when you don't have any more extra balls to play (we'll start here). then we need to make the "100,000" unit reset.
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:12. 3rd.AddedSwitch.WOWUnit.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. Remove the 2 wires (red and green-red wires on Lucky Hand) on the "100,000" unit zero position runout switch and splice wires to both. Add a new zero position runout switch (third added switch, or just move the old one to this unit) to the backside of the "WOW" unit. This switch needs to be closed when you have no extra WOW's (zero position). Connect the added wires to this switch.
+<br clear=all>
+This next step is important, it involves the game over portion of the hack (mentioned above). If ignored, "game over" won't work correctly. It will only go to game over after the last ball is played and it gets kicked back to the plunger lane via the through switch. We want it to turn the game off before doing so.
+[[File:13. MovedGameOverSwitch.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. Locate the game over zero position switch on the "100,000" unit backside that controls reset (blue-red center wire on Lucky Hand) that comes from the AX reset relay. Remove the game over zero position switch (on-on) from the "100,000" unit and transplant it to the "WOW" unit. Take the center wire (blue-red on Lucky Hand), splice a wire to it and connect it to the transplanted game over zero position switch on the "WOW" unit. This wire should now be in the center of the 3 lug switch. Splice a wire to the other removed wire (orange-red on Lucky hand) from the old position on the "100,000" unit and run it over to the transplanted game over zero position switch on the "WOW" unit. This switch should be closed when the "WOW" unit is reset to zero.
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:14. JumperFromCoilToGameOverSwitch.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. Now take a jumper wire and connect one end to the reset coil on the "WOW" unit. Take the other end of that jumper wire and connect it to the last solder lug on the transplanted game over zero position switch. This switch should be open when the "WOW" unit is reset to zero. Make sure all switches do what they used to do when they were on the old "lightbox advance" unit and the game over will work correctly.
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:15. JumperFromResetToResetCoils.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. Abandon the wire (brown-red on Lucky Hand) on the "100,000" unit reset coil and run a new wire from the coil to the reset coil on the "ball count" unit. Connect the wire to the wire (slate-yellow on Lucky Hand) that isn't black on that coil. You should now be finished and ready to test the game for adjustments and a little fine tuning. At this point, your game should be working like mine, with both features.
+<br clear=all>
+[[File:HackCompleted.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]<br>
+. All done. A complete view of the backbox with additional stepper and wiring included. Now go rack up some points and some extra balls.
+<br clear=all>
+<b>An Alternative Method: MOVING THE 100,000 FEATURE TO A SEPARATE UNIT</b>
+For those that want to do this the easy way ;-) , I'll explore this hack (since my game is working the other way and I have no plans to change it now). I'll be doing the shortened version to save time (without extra comments or optional connections like Jones plugs). What will be needed is a bonus stepper unit with matching disks and a stepper gear from a credit unit. The reason for the gear change is that a credit unit gear allows for advancing past position 15, a bonus unit stepper unit gear does not. 4 more rivets will need to be added to the disk so the counter can go up to 1,900,000 like it originally does in novelty mode. The easiest way to do this is to send the disk to Tim Meghan for modification or have a new one made. Nothing should change on the wiper disk if it came from a bonus unit.
+b. Install the stepper unit ("100,000" unit) in the same place as step 1 above.
+b. Add 4 rivets to the disk and wire up the backside to work correctly during advance. Note: If you do nothing to the disk, it will only count to 1,500,000 which is more than enough.
+b. Move all ten of the 100,000 light wires from the "lightbox advance" unit disk and install them on the new "100,000" unit disk in their proper positions.
+b. Jumper a wire from the "lightbox advance" unit chassis lug to the added "100,000" unit chassis lug.
+b. Run a black wire from an existing coil up to the two coils on the added "100,000" unit for ground.
+b. Remove the wire (blue-white-red on Lucky Hand) from the 100,000 relay and run it to an added run out switch on the "100,000" unit. This switch is to limit the step up to 19. Connect the other side of this switch to the other lug on the added "100,000" unit step up coil.
+b. Run a reset wire from the reset coil (slate-yellow on Lucky Hand) on the ball count unit up to a zero position switch on the added "100,000" unit. From the other side of that switch, jumper a wire to the reset coil on the added "100,000" unit for AX reset.
+b. Splice a zero position switch into the line (brown-white-red on Lucky Hand) for the AX reset relay and install it in the same place mentioned in step 12 above for reset completed.
+That should do it. It's easier, with less switch adjustments to make. I don't think I missed anything.
 ==Repair Logs==
-Did you do a repair? Log it here as a possible solution for others.
+<b>Williams Klondike</b> - there are three 3" score reel assemblies used in the playfield for a type of slot machine.  Out of those three reels, two have the same symbols in the same order, while the third one does not.  The "odd" reel is to be installed on the right reel assembly.<br>
+Something to keep in mind is that, as noted on the [http://www.ipdb.org/machine.cgi?id=1388 IPDB], there are some games where the right reel is not wired correctly.<br clear=all>